OPERATION & MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Switchboard Name: IP1

Specification: Section 26 23 00.00 40
(Switchboards and Switchgear)
TABLE OF CONTENTS

1. SWITCHBOARDS DESCRIPTION3
2. PRLC TYPE SWITCHBOARD PRODUCT DATA5
3. SWITCHBOARD INSTRUCTION MANUAL9
4. SWITCHBOARD DRAWINGS.34
5. MAIN BREAKER (MAGNUM SB) PRODUCT DATA.37
6. MAIN BREAKER (MAGNUM SB) INSTALLATIONS INSTRUCTION.44
7. SPD SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICE INSTRUCTION MANUAL115
8. DIGITRIP RMS 520M LSIG INSTRUCTIONS..132
9. SWITCHBOARD TESTS..173
10. ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS.186
SWITCHBOARD DESCRIPTION
1 PRLC Switchboard
Pow-R-Line C Switchboard, Front Access/ Front and Rear Align, Type 3R (nonwalk-in) Flat
Roof
480Y/277V 3-Phase 4-Wire, 2000 Silver Plated Copper, Minimum Interrupt Rating: 65kA,
Bus Bracing Rating: 65kA
1 Pow-R-Line C
2 Type 3R (nonwalk-in) Flat Roof
1 2000 Amp Silver Plated CU Bussed Incoming Pull Section
1 SPD Series 160kA SPD, Standard w/ Surge Counter (Disconnect Included)
1 2000 Amp Silver Plated CU Feeder Structure
1 Digitrip RMS 520M LSIG
1 Breaker Magnum 1200A bornes (6) 750MCM por fase/neutro
1 1600A 3P Magnum SB Brkr SBS-616 [Fixed-Manual], Trip 1200 A., RMS520M LSIG, (5)
3/0-750 kcmil, Mechanical, Bottom

Designations: MAIN #1, N3R

PRLC TYPE SWITCHBOARD PRODUCT DATA
 4.1 Switchboards
Group-Mounted Switchboards

Contents
4 Pow-R-Line Group-Mounted Distribution Switchboard
Description Page
4 Pow-R-Line Distribution Switchboards
Commercial Metering Switchboards . . . . . . . . . . . V2-T4-3
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4 Pow-R-Line Distribution Switchboards
4 Product Description Features, Benefits Standards and Certifications
Eatons Pow-R-Line and Functions Meets NEMA Standard
4 distribution switchboards 6000A maximum main Main and Individually
Mounted Devices
PB-2 and UL 891
combine a space-saving bus rating Seismically qualified
4 Magnum SB insulated

design with modular 600 Vac and below
construction and increased case circuit breakers, 800
600 Vdc and below 5000A, fixed or drawout
4 system ratings to provide
economical and dependable Front or rear accessible Magnum DS power circuit
electrical system distribution Type 1 or Type 3R breakers, 8005000A,
4 and protection. enclosures fixed or drawout Product Selection
ANSI-61 gray powder Molded case circuit For complete application and
4 Application Description
Refer to Eatons Consulting
coat paint finish breakers, 4002500A, pricing information, contact
Microprocessor-based fixed mounted your local Eaton sales office.
4 Application Guide. metering and monitoring Bolted pressure switches,
devices 8005000A
4 Utility metering provisions FDPW fusible switches,
Surge protective devices 4001200A
4 (SPD)
Group-Mounted
Ground fault protection
Distribution Devices
4 on mains and distribution
devices Molded case circuit
breakers, 151200A
4 Busway and transformer
connections FDPW fusible switches,
301200A
4 Complete protective device
accessory capability
4 65 kAIC bus bracing
standard; optional 100
or 200 kAIC
4 Standard tin-plated
aluminum bus; optional
4 copper- or silver-plated
copper bus
4 Standard bus ampacities
based on UL heat test
4 ratings. Optional density
rated bus systems are
4 also available

V2-T4-2 Volume 2Commercial Distribution CA08100003EJune 2012 www.eaton.com

 4.1 Switchboards
Group-Mounted Switchboards
Features, Benefits and Functions
4 Pow-R-Line designates
a family of distribution
4 switchboards, incorporating
design concepts that fit
4 the ever-increasing need
for applications on high
4 short-circuit systems,
while retaining maximum
4 safety and convenience
throughout the line.
4 Front Accessible
Front-accessible switchboards
4 align at the rear, enabling
them to be placed against
4 a wall (Pow-R-Line front
accessible). If the main
4 section is deeper than others,
due to physical size of the
main device, the necessary
4 off-set in line-up will occur in
front, and the main section
4 will be accessible from the
side as well as from the front.
4 Standard front accessible
switchboards will align at
4 the front and rear.
Rear Accessible
4 Rear-accessible switchboards
align at the front and the rear.
4 Bus maintenance and cable
entry and exit require rear
4 access. There are two
types of rear accessible
4 switchboards. Both types
use the same incoming utility
and/or main structures.
4 symmetrical, are available
The first type uses group-
mounted feeder devices
4 with panel construction
(Pow-R-Line rear accessible).
4 The second type uses
individually compartmentalized
4 feeder devices with load side
insulated bus bar extensions
(Pow-R-Line i).
4 Main bus and sub-main
Standard Switchboard Height
4 Standard Pow-R-Line
switchboard height is
4 90 inches (2286.0 mm).
4 are required. Refer to factory
4
4
4
4
4
V2-T4-4 Volume 2Commercial Distribution
Group Mounting
Group-mounted circuit
protective devices are an
assembly of units mounted
on a panelboard type base
(panelboard construction).
Units may be molded case
breakers, or FDPW fusible
switches. Circuit protective
devices are accessible from
the front.
A main molded case breaker
or main FDPW fusible switch,
within the sizes listed for
panelboard design, can
be included in the panel-
mounted assembly in lieu
of a separate, individually
mounted unit.
Space Only for Future Devices
Group-Mounted Construction
Where space only for future
circuit protective devices is
required, the proper space
and a blank filler plate will
be supplied. Connections
and mounting hardware are
not included.
Provision for Future Devices
Where provisions for future
circuit protective devices
are required, space for the
device, corresponding vertical
bus, device connectors and
the necessary mounting
hardware will be supplied.
Bus Bar System
Standard bus in the
switchboards is tin-plated
aluminum. Copper and
silver-plated copper are
also available.
buses meet UL and NEMA
standards for temperature
rise on all Pow-R-Line
switchboards. Special bus
densities are available.
CA08100003EJune 2012
Overcurrent Devices
To properly select and size
overcurrent devices for use in
a switchboard, the allowable
temperature rise must be
taken into account as to its
effect on the tripping
characteristics of the
devices in question.
Accordingly, Article 220
of the NEC requires
overcurrent devices to be
rated not less than 125% of
the continuous load they are
protecting. To comply with
this, an 80% derating factor
must be used with all
overcurrent devices such
as molded case breakers
and FDPW fusible switches
unless they are tested
and marked as 100%
rated devices.
Short-Circuit Rating
Standard bus and connectors
on all switchboards are rated
for use on systems capable
of producing up to 65,000A
rms symmetrical short-circuit
current at the incoming
terminals.
Increased bus short-circuit
ratings equal to that of
connected switchboard
devices, up to 200,000A rms
in most Pow-R-Line
switchboards when approved
main devices are installed.
Contact Eaton for more
information. UL labeled
switchboard sections are
marked with their applicable
short-circuit rating.
www.eaton.com
Provision for Busway
Entrance and Exit
Busway connections to
switchboard sections include
cutout and drilling in the
top of the switchboard with
riser connections from the
switchboard device or bus, up
to the point where the bus
duct enters the switchboard.
No connections are furnished
external to the switchboard.
Note: In all transactions
involving busway attached to
switchboards, it is essential that
information regarding orientation
of the busway with respect to the
front of the switchboard be
supplied to the coordinating
assembly plant.
On Pow-R-Line switchboards,
solid bus bar is used to
connect the bus duct to the
individually mounted main
device, main or sub-main
switchboard bus, or vertical
main bus of panel mounted
circuit protective device
panels. Busway fed by group-
mounted branch devices are
cable connected.
Aluminum riser connections
are standard. Copper- or
silver-plated copper is
available as a modification.
Transitions
Transition structures are
required for connecting
switchboards to the
secondary of power center
transformer (dry or fluid
filled), motor control centers,
and for other special
switchboard configurations
such as L or U shaped
lineups. In some application,
an extra structure complete
with connections is required;
in others, where switchboard
depth and space permit, only
the connection conductors
for these applications.
 Switchboards
Group-Mounted Switchboards
4.1
Standards and Certifications
UL 891 4
NEMA PB-2
4

Seismically qualified
4
4
Product Selection
For complete application and
4
pricing information, contact
your local Eaton sales office. 4
Technical Data and Specifications 4
Service Metering Sections 4
120/240V, single-phase, Tenant main disconnects
three-wire and meter sockets (200A
maximum self-contained
4
240/120V, 208Y/120V,
415Y/240V, 480Y/277V or
600Y/347V three-phase,
metered circuits)
Hot sequence
4

four-wire
600 Vdc
metering circuits
Cold sequence metering
4
Main Bus Rating
circuits (WCMS only)
Optional rear barriered
4
4004000A
4

wireways or load side

pull sections for cable
Service Section exit requirements
Main circuit breaker, Sections for metered 4
4004000A circuits larger than 200A
Main fusible switch, available with 400A 4
4004000A continuous rated self-
Main lugs only, contained sockets or
with CT compartment
4
4006000A
and transformer rated
socket in combination 4
with disconnect
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4

Volume 2Commercial Distribution CA08100003EJune 2012 www.eaton.com V2-T4-5

SWITCHBOARD INSTRUCTION MANUAL
 Pow-R-Line
Switchboards
Instruction Manual

Supercedes IM01500001E
Pages 1-24, dated May 2004

Description Page
Safety Measures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Pre-Installation: Receiving, Handling and Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Pre-Installation Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Considerations for Seismic Qualified Installations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Electrical Connection of Switchboard Sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Energizing Switchboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Appendix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20

IM01500001E For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com

Instruction Manual Pow-R-Line Switchboards
Page 2 Effective: September 2005
Safety Measures
This publication contains instructions on the installation
of Cutler-Hammer
brand Pow-R-Line low voltage distribu-
tion switchboards from Eatons electrical business. Any
person or persons that design, purchase, install, operate
or maintain new systems utilizing these products must
understand the equipment, its markings and limitations.
Hazardous voltages in distribution switchboards and all
other electrical equipment pose a potential hazard to life
and property. Please follow instructions, labeling and appli-
cable codes and standards for installation, maintenance
and operation of this equipment and its components.
Only Qualified Persons should install and/or service this
equipment. NFPA 70 National Electrical Code
defines a
Qualified Person as One who has skills and knowledge
related to the construction and operation of electrical equip-
ment and installations and has received safety training
on the hazards involved.
Standard symbols have been established for recognition
of potentially hazardous situations and conditions. Please
review and understand the critical warning symbols shown
below. These symbols will appear on safety labels affixed to
the product. Installer should always read and understand
these labels before working on equipment.
Symbol Meaning
The addition of either symbol to a Danger
or Warning safety label indicates that an elec-
trical hazard exists which will result in personal
injury if the instructions are not followed.


This is the safety alert symbol. It is used to
alert you to potential personal hazards. Obey
all safety messages that follow this symbol to
avoid possible injury and death.

DANGER
DANGER INDICATES AN IMMINENTLY HAZARDOUS
SITUATION WHICH, IF NOT AVOIDED, WILL RESULT IN DEATH
OR SERIOUS INJURY.

WARNING
WARNING INDICATES A POTENTIALLY HAZARDOUS
SITUATION WHICH, IF NOT AVOIDED, CAN RESULT IN DEATH
OR SERIOUS INJURY.

CAUTION
CAUTION INDICATES A POTENTIALLY HAZARDOUS
SITUATION WHICH, IF NOT AVOIDED, CAN RESULT IN MINOR
OR MODERATE INJURY.
CAUTION
CAUTION, USED WITHOUT THE SAFETY ALERT SYMBOL,
INDICATES A POTENTIALLY HAZARDOUS SITUATION WHICH,
IF NOT AVOIDED, CAN RESULT IN PROPERTY DAMAGE.
For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com
Eaton Corporations liability for any errors or omissions in
this document is limited to the documentary correction of
errors. Eaton will not be responsible in any event for errors or
omissions in this document or for any damages, incidental
or consequential (including monetary losses), that might
arise from the use of this document or the information con-
tained in it. Information in this publication is not intended for
use as a training manual for non-qualified personnel. The
information or statements in this publication concerning
the suitability, capacity or performance of the switchboard(s)
may not cover all configurations of this custom built product.
Eaton has made all reasonable efforts to ensure that the
instructions in this document are adequate and free of
material errors and omissions. Eaton will, if necessary,
explain issues, which may not be covered by the document.
The information contained in the Instruction Leaflet is sub-
ject to change without notice.
Introduction
This instruction manual is designed to supplement other
industry standards including all local, state and federal
codes and safety regulations, such as OSHA, NFPA 70
(National Electrical Code), NFPA 70E (Standard for Electrical
Safety Requirements for Employee Workplaces), NEMA

PB2.1 General Instructions for Proper Handling, Installa-
tion, Operation and Maintenance of Deadfront Distribution
Switchboards Rated 600 Volts and Less, other workplace,
electrical installation requirements and all safety rules.
Safety
Due to the weight and size of switchboards and dangers
from electrical hazards, every precaution should be taken to
maintain safe working conditions when handling this equip-
ment. Due to the custom nature of switchboards and the site
variables, every potential situation cannot be anticipated.
Safety must always be the overriding factor.
Always follow all instructions and all safety guidelines
published by OSHA and other industry and local, state and
federal agencies.
IM01500001E
 Pow-R-Line Switchboards Instruction Manual
Effective: September 2005 Page 3

Pre-Installation: Utilizing Lifting Means

Receiving, Handling and Storage Lifting means are bolted to each switchboard shipping
length. Lifting a switchboard by crane is the recommended
Receiving method for moving this equipment.

Upon delivery, use the packing list to confirm the number of

items against what was received to ensure that the shipment
Lifting Means
is complete. Any discrepancies should be noted on the
freight bill before signing. Report any shortages or damage
to the freight carrier immediately.
Immediately upon receipt of the switchboard, the plastic
covering should be carefully removed and a thorough
inspection of each section should be made to detect any
damage incurred during shipment. Any damage should be
noted on the bill of lading (freight bill) and the consignee
receiving the equipment should notify the freight carrier.
FAILURE TO NOTIFY THE FREIGHT CARRIER OF DAMAGE
IN A TIMELY MANNER MAY RESULT IN THE CONSIGNEE
ASSUMING THE COSTS ASSOCIATED WITH REPAIR OR
REPLACEMENT OF DAMAGED EQUIPMENT.
After inspection, it is recommended that a plastic covering Figure 1. Typical Indoor Lifting Means
be used to protect the equipment from dust, dirt, moisture
and damage until ready for installation.
The switchboard should remain attached to its shipping skid Lifting Means
until it has been moved into its final installation position.

Handling

WARNING
SWITCHBOARD IS TOP HEAVY. USE CARE IN HANDLING.

Switchboards are top heavy. Switchboard sections may

weigh over 2000 pounds. Before moving or lifting, verify that
the equipment used to handle the switchboard is within safe
limits of its lifting capacity.
Switchboard shipping lengths will vary. Each shipping
section is bolted with lag bolts to heavy wooden skids that
extend beyond all sides of the switchboard.
Figure 2. Typical Outdoor Lifting Means
DO NOT pass cables or chains through the holes in the lift-
ing means. Utilize cables or chain with hooks or shackles
rated for the load and weight of the switchboard shipping
length to be lifted.
Prepare a sling and a spanner or spreader. (See Figures 3
and 4.) Eaton does not provide chain, cables, shackles,
hooks, spanner or spreader.

IM01500001E For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com

Instruction Manual Pow-R-Line Switchboards
Page 4 Effective: September 2005

Chains/cables must be securely attached to hooks, eyes

and shackles and the spanner/spreader. Prior to lifting, check
the security of the rigging assembly. Use the crane to bring
the assembly taut without raising the switchboard from
the floor.
Check the security of the rigging, again. Make any adjust-
ments necessary before moving the equipment.
Slowly lift equipment to the minimum height from the floor
required to safely relocate it. Move the equipment to approx-
imately 2 inches above its resting place. Safely make a visual
inspection of the rigging. If necessary, return the switch-
board to its original resting place to make any modifications
necessary to the rigging.
Spreader Bar
Forklifts
A forklift may be utilized for handling switchboards. Only
personnel trained for that equipment should operate forklifts.
Be sure that the ground surface is solid and follow all safety
recommendations for operating the forklift. Be aware of wet
or slick floors and surfaces, which can affect stopping and
turning. Check labeling on the switchboard packaging
material for additional information.
Verify that the forklift load and lifting ratings are within
safe limits for the weight of the switchboard being lifted.
Do not lift switchboard from the front. Damage to
components, such as breakers, fusible switches and
metering, can result.
Figure 3. Front View

CAUTION
SWITCHBOARD IS TOP HEAVY. USE CARE IN HANDLING.

Switchboard

Forks
Secure
Under Entire Switchboard
Switchboard to Forklift with
Safety Strap Here

Figure 5. Forklift
Note: Always use caution when moving switchboards,
which are top-heavy equipment.

The forks or blades of the forklift must run through the entire
switchboard shipping length and shall be extended to the
outermost sides of the wooden shipping skids. (See Figure 5.)
Secure the switchboard with a safety strap, belt or leash
approved for this purpose. Take care in positioning of the
strap to ensure stability of the equipment and confirm that
it is not in an area that will damage components.
Slowly lift equipment to the minimum height from the floor
Figure 4. Side View
required to safely relocate it.

For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com IM01500001E

 Pow-R-Line Switchboards
Rollers
Rollers should only be used on solid and flat surfaces,
such as a finished floor. Only use rollers suitable for
this purpose.
Storage
Switchboards, which cannot be immediately installed
and energized, should be stored in an indoor dry, clean
and heated environment.
Do not store in areas where conditions such as dampness,
changes in temperature, cement dust or a corrosive atmo-
sphere is present.
Should the storage area be prone to moisture condensation,
take precaution by making sure that the switchboard is
covered and install temporary heating equipment. Approxi-
mately 250 watts per vertical section are required for
average conditions.
Switchboards should be placed on solid, level surfaces for
storage. Switchboard sections must remain in an upright
position at all times. Laying switchboard sections on their
back or side can result in permanent damage to components
and the switchboard structure.
Outdoor switchboards are not weather resistant until
completely and properly installed and energized. Addition-
ally, utilizing temporary heating as described above should
keep an un-energized outdoor switchboard dry internally.
IM01500001E For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com
Instruction Manual
Effective: September 2005 Page 5
Pre-Installation Preparation
The permanent location of switchboards must be on a
smooth, solid and level foundation. Alignment is verified in
the factory prior to shipment.
An uneven foundation can cause misalignment of sections,
units, doors and other parts.
If a housekeeping pad is utilized, check factory drawings and
verify handle height rules relative to the National Electrical
Code (NEC) and utility meter heights where applicable.
When embedded anchors or channel sills are used,
materials and attachments must be adequate to support the
structure(s). Switchboard sections must be aligned and level
over the length of the installation.
From manufacturers drawings, determine the layout of the
electrical distribution equipment for each location. Verify
and confirm that the available equipment space and equip-
ment location(s) is in compliance with the minimum working
space clearances per the NEC.
Refer to the manufacturers switchboard drawings for
available conduit area in each section before installing
the finished grade flooring. (See Figure 6.) Conduits must be
installed in conduit area shown to ensure compliance with
NEC wire bending space requirements.
Note: Conduit areas may vary in each section of a multi-section
switchboard lineup.
24.00
(609.6)
2.50 2.50
12.00
(63.5) (63.5)
(304.8)
2.50 30.00
(63.5) (762.0)
3.00 3.00
(76.2) (76.2)
Figure 6. Conduit Space Drawing Floor Plan
Note: Used for reference only. See drawings for actual space.
The preferred method of anchoring the switchboard is by
fastening the switchboard to steel channels that are properly
and permanently embedded in a concrete floor or by using
anchors designed for this purpose.
Conduits, floor and/or wall openings, such as busway or
other penetrations, should be located relative to the space
shown on the manufacturers drawings.
Refer to the National Electrical Code for installations in
damp locations for additional requirements.
Final preparation of the entire area and around the
switchboard should be thoroughly cleaned of all debris.
Instruction Manual Pow-R-Line Switchboards
Page 6 Effective: September 2005

Considerations for Seismic

Qualified Installations
Switchboards that are Seismically Qualified require
additional considerations. Since electrical equipment is
installed as part of a system, pre-engineering layouts are
critical in seismic applications.
When seismic qualified and marked Cutler-Hammer brand
1 2
switchboards are used, anchoring the switchboard recom-
3 4
mended by the design engineer is critical. Experienced
5 6
engineers in seismic requirements should select methods
7 8
and techniques of attachment and tested anchoring sys-
9 10
tems. Embedded concrete anchors or steel attachments
11
must be adequate to resist the forces established by the
local building code. Bolts of the proper grade of steel must 12

be correctly sized and torqued. The embedded anchors 13

must be correctly installed in accordance with the method
specified by the anchor manufacturer. 1 *
* 2
Conduit layout in concrete for loads entering and/or exiting
the bottom must be designed and installed to prevent
damage from an earthquake. If top entry is necessary, Figure 7. Switchboard A Front View
seismic fittings or flexible conduit is needed. Note: Switchboard A has a shipping split between Sections 1 and 2.
This is depicted by * within the circle between sections.
Consult applicable local building codes and regulatory agen-
cies for other specific requirements for seismic installations.
Additionally, six (6) inches of space should be added to the
length of the switchboard assembly to accommodate seis-
mic anchor plates. Contact Eaton for additional information.

Installation
Use caution and appropriate equipment and practices
1 2
when moving switchboard into its final position.
3 4

5 6

CAUTION 7 8

9 10
SWITCHBOARD IS TOP HEAVY. USE CARE IN HANDLING. 11

12
Determine the switchboard orientation with the use of
13
manufacturers drawings and markings on the switchboard
sections. Switchboards may be shipped either in individual
1 2
sections or in two or more sections joined by the
manufacturer. (See Figures 7 and 8.)
Figure 8. Switchboard B Front View
Note: Switchboard B, without an asterisk, ships with sections
bolted together.

The drawing supplied with the switchboard will indicate the

correct orientation of sections by section number. Each sec-
tion will have a label with the UL listing mark designating
Deadfront Distribution Switchboard Section ___ of ___.
The manufacturer will fill in the blanks prior to shipment.
An example, the first section of a three-section switchboard
will read Section 1 of 3. Section 2 of 3 would be mounted
adjacent per the manufacturers drawings. (See Figure 9.)

Deadfront
Switchboard
Section

_____ of _____

Figure 9. Label Illustration

For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com IM01500001E

 Pow-R-Line Switchboards Instruction Manual
Effective: September 2005 Page 7

Alignment of multi-section switchboards is designed to
be front and rear aligned or rear (only) aligned. Drawings
provided by the manufacturer and located in the switch-
board will show footprint details. Orientation, as shown on
the drawings, must be maintained. (See Figures 10 and 11.)
Use caution and appropriate equipment and practices when
moving switchboard into its final position.

WARNING
SWITCHBOARD IS TOP HEAVY. USE CARE IN HANDLING.

Exercise caution while maneuvering top-heavy switchboard

sections into place. Switchboard sections must always
remain in the upright position during installation. Use care
when moving the switchboard so not to damage the section,
Switchboard Front Top View including the structural base and frame. Some switchboards
house sensitive components, which can be damaged by
rough handling.
Figure 10. Example of Front and Rear Aligned Switchboard
Prior to moving the switchboard sections into its permanent
position, make note of all obstacles including conduit stubs.
Implement a plan for safe transition and appropriate means
to accommodate these obstructions. Take note of conduits
entering through the bottom of the switchboard, rear of the
switchboard, and at the top of the switchboard to ensure
appropriate clearances from chassis, structure, cross bus,
Switchboard Front Top View ground, neutral and components.
Provide space for a minimum 1/2 clearance from back of
Figure 11. Example of Rear Aligned Switchboard switchboard and any wall for front accessible switchboards
Sections may contain factory cross bus and/or cable to installed indoors.
connect power between switchboard structures and other
Refer to the National Electrical Code (NEC) for required
components. Installers should note the location and
switchboard clearances.
orientation of all splice plates and/or cables as reference
for installation once sections are joined. When unpacking the switchboard, exercise care not to
scratch or mar the finish. Repair all scratches with touch-
If supplied, remove splice plates and associated hardware,
up paint, which is available from Eaton. Remove shipping
again noting the orientation for re-installation once switch-
skids and all packaging material. Remove any temporary
board is in place. If additional hardware is needed to com-
shipping braces or spacers. Remove lifting angles and
plete these connections, extra hardware will be provided.
associated hardware. Plug lifting angle holes with hole
For shipping purposes, it will typically be secured inside
plugs supplied by the manufacturer. (See Figure 12.)
one of the structures. Keep bus and hardware in a clean
and protected environment to guard against damage until
re-installation. Protect any factory-installed cables (wire)
used to connect components between sections from
damage when moving switchboard sections into place.
An outdoor multi-section switchboard will ship with
un-installed intermediate roof cap(s) for each joint between
sections. Remove roof cap(s) prior to moving sections into
their permanent position. Retain roof cap(s) and associated
hardware for re-installation. Keep roof caps and associated Example of Hole
Plugs Installed
hardware in a clean and protected environment to guard
against damage awaiting re-installation.
There are two roof designs for outdoor switchboards.
These are the flat roof design and the sloped roof design.
Figure 12. Hole Plugs Installed
The standard outdoor switchboard utilizes a flat roof design. Where two or more switchboard sections are to be joined
This design does not require any sealant when the interme- together, they should first be aligned and all sections leveled.
diate roof cap is correctly installed in the field.
Once aligned and level, attach switchboard sections together.
The optional sloped roof outdoor design also uses an
intermediate roof cap design. When a break occurs between
sections for shipping purposes, the intermediate roof cap on
the optional outdoor sloped roof design shall have a 3/16
minimum bead of silicone sealant (RTV 732) applied to
the underneath side of the roof cap. Each roof cap should
have two (2) continuous beads of sealant from end to end.
Each bead must be located between the row of mounting
holes and the outer edge of the roof cap. A tube of sealant is
provided with every outdoor switchboard for customers use.

IM01500001E For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com

Instruction Manual Pow-R-Line Switchboards
Page 8 Effective: September 2005

Attaching Switchboard Sections

The manufacturer has provided hardware with the equip-
ment to join switchboard sections. The hardware includes
3/8 x 1 carriage bolts and 3/8 hex nuts with captive
Belleville-type washer. (See Figure 13.)
Holes are provided on the side of each switchboard section
for this purpose. Three holes are located on the side of
each section towards the front and back. Switchboards
with deep designs, including rear-connected switchboards,
may have an additional three holes for attachment on the
center vertical section support. (See Figure 14.)

Carriage bolt and hex nut

with Belleville washer.
Bolt sections together
using fasteners supplied
Figure 13. Hardware by the manufacturer.

Figure 15. Joining Switchboard Sections

Join sections utilizing the carriage bolts and hex nuts with
captive Belleville-type washer through the holes provided.
(See Figure 15.) While maintaining level and alignment of
the structures, torque each connection to the values shown
in Appendix Table 2.
Section connection If switchboard sections are outdoor type, re-install roof
with carriage bolt cap(s). Visually inspect the roof cap to ensure a reliable,
and hex nut with permanent watertight fit prior to energizing the switchboard.
Belleville washer.
Once the switchboard structures are attached, visually
inspect the board for foreign objects and visually inspect
the structure for proper clearances of live parts.

Figure 14. Switchboard Section Connection

For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com IM01500001E

 Pow-R-Line Switchboards
Electrical Connection of Switchboard Sections
Several methods may be used to make electrical connec-
tions within switchboards. More than one of these methods
may be used in a section and/or switchboard lineup. These
include bus splice plates, factory installed cable and busway
connections. Consult the manufacturers drawings for details
for each switchboard section.
Remove structure deadfront covers and side sheets as
needed to access switchboard chassis and components.
Retain all cover mounting hardware and covers for
re-assembly. Protect hardware and parts from moisture,
debris and damage.
Splice Plates
Splice plates are short pieces of bus bar that join the main
bus running horizontally through multiple section switch-
boards. Depending on the configuration and alignment of
the switchboard, the splice plates used for the main cross
bus may vary. These plates may either be flat or Z shaped.
(See Figures 16 and 17.)
View "A"
Typical View When More
Than 1 Bar Per Phase
Figure 16. Splice Plates
For larger amperage switchboards, multiple splice plates
are to be used on the same phase. Maintain the orientation,
by phase and sequence of the splice plates. The orientation
of the splice plates must remain identical as they were
shipped from the manufacturer. Clearances must be
maintained. If unsure about the correct orientation or
questions about the installation, contact Eaton before
installing the splice plates.
IM01500001E For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com
Instruction Manual
Effective: September 2005 Page 9
Spacer
Figure 17. Spacer Locations Between Splice Plates
(Typical for All Widths)
Splice plates are used to attach the main horizontal bus
between switchboard sections or shipping splits. While
maintaining the correct phase orientation and sequence,
install splice plates with the carriage bolts and hex nuts
with captive Belleville washers supplied by the manufac-
turer. Refer to Appendix Table 2 for torque values.
Carriage bolts must align with the corresponding rectangular
holes in the fixed horizontal bus and the splice plates.
If multiple splice plates are used, install in the same
sequence as shipped from the manufacturer. The neutral
(when furnished) and ground bus should be connected
in the same manner.
Inspect splices plates and main fixed horizontal bus prior
to installation. If there is any suspected damage, contact
the manufacturer immediately for replacements. NEVER
ENERGIZE ANY SWITCHBOARD WITH DAMAGED BUS
OR COMPONENTS.
To accommodate future serviceability, the manufacturer
recommends that the head of the carriage bolt should
be mounted from the rear of the switchboard for FRONT
ACCESSIBLE switchboards with the hex nut with Belleville
washer positioned to the front.
For REAR ACCESSIBLE switchboards, the manufacturer
recommends that the head of the carriage bolt should be
mounted from the front of the switchboard with the hex
nut and Belleville washer positioned to the rear.
Repeat the process until all holes in the horizontal bus
are connected with bolts and nuts for each shipping split.
Inspect connections to ensure that there is no foreign
material at the connection point and that all connections
are properly aligned and bolts are seated.
Torque all connections to torque requirements on labels
affixed to each switchboard and as shown in Appendix
Table 2.
Instruction Manual Pow-R-Line Switchboards
Page 10 Effective: September 2005
IFS Switchboard Factory Cabling
Some switchboards utilize cable/wire for some connections
in lieu of bus. Cabling is typical in Integrated Facility
System (IFS) type switchboards that incorporate lighting
and appliance branch circuit panelboards and dry-type
distribution transformers within a switchboard lineup.
Eatons selection of wire and cable follows UL891
switchboard procedures, National Electrical Manufacturers
Association, Federal Specification standards, and the
National Electrical Code standards for IFS switchboards.
The manufacturer identifies each phase conductor by means
of color-coded tape with markings Factory Installed in
IFS switchboards. Markings are affixed to both the line and
load ends of the conductors. Markings follow the industry
accepted phase colors. (See Figure 18 and Table 1.)
Factory
Installed
Figure 18. Typical Phase A 240 Vac Wire Label
Table 1. Wire Label Color Codes
240 Vac Systems Systems Above
and Below Nominal 240 Vac Nominal
Phase A Black Phase A Brown
Phase B Red Phase B Orange
Phase C Blue Phase C Yellow
Neutral White Neutral Gray
Ground Green Ground Green
Conductors installed by the manufacturer have been cut and
stripped to pre-determined lengths for connection between
components. When conductors are intended to run between
components in two different sections that are joined by the
manufacturer, the manufacturer will connect both the line
and load ends of the conductors.
Note: The National Electrical Code restricts the field installation
of conductors that run horizontally through switchboard vertical
sections. Refer to the NEC for specifics.
When there is a shipping split between sections that are
cabled, the factory connects one end of the conductors.
The remainder of the conductors are coiled and secured
in the section with the connection.
Factory drawings included in the switchboard clearly indi-
cate the required field connections for the coiled conductors.
Inspect conductors/cables for damage. Any damaged conduc-
tors must be replaced. Contact manufacturer for replacement.
Factory color-coded markings indicate phasing/neutral and
are marked on both the line and load ends of the conductors.
Using the factory drawings, the installer connects conduc-
tors to the component(s) indicated on the drawings keeping
phases correctly oriented. Care should be taken in forming
insulated cables to ensure that no insulation is forced per-
manently against edges of any metal parts.
Torque both line and load connections to values indicated on
the labeling on the switchboard. Refer to Appendix Table 2
for torque values.
For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com
Installation of Incoming Switchboard Connections

DANGER
DE-ENERGIZE SWITCHBOARD HAZARDOUS VOLTAGE.
WILL CAUSE SEVERE INJURY OR DEATH.
DO NOT work on electrical equipment while energized.
Verify power entering the equipment is de-energized at
the source.
Power is normally brought into a switchboard either by
cable or by busway (busduct).
Remove structure covers as needed to access switchboard
chassis and components. Retain all cover mounting hard-
ware and covers for re-assembly. Protect hardware and
parts from moisture, debris and damage.
Note: As a minimum, all switchboard connections are rated for
use with 75C or higher rated conductors. When wire is used with
temperature ratings above 75C, it shall be sized based on the
ampacity of wire rated 75C.
Wire/Cabling
When cable connections are used, either mechanical set
screw or compression lugs are typically supplied. (See
Figure 19.) See factory drawing for specific lug terminations
and wire ranges. Some utilities make their own service
entrance connections. In these cases, the manufacturer
typically supplies lug landing provisions or a landing pad
in lieu of lugs. These are designed to the specific utilitys
requirements. Refer to the manufacturers drawings for
specifics covering this connection.
Standard One Hole
Compression Type Lug
Mechanical Set
Screw Lug
Optional Two Hole
Compression Type Lug
Figure 19. Screw and Compression Lugs
Unless a switchboard specifically restricts entry to a single
means or area, cables may enter through the top, bottom,
side or back of the main incoming section. These restrictions
are typically required to conform to wire bending space
requirements of the NEC. Consult the manufacturers
drawings for conduit entry data.
IM01500001E
 Pow-R-Line Switchboards Instruction Manual
Effective: September 2005 Page 11

Once the conductors are pulled inside the main section,
the cables should be formed in the space provided. Clearly
identify and segregate conductors by phase and neutral.
Care should be taken in forming insulated cables to ensure
that no insulation is forced permanently against the edges
of any metal parts.
Other Requirements for Rear Connected Switchboards
On systems that require short circuit current ratings
above 10,000 amperes rms, Cable Bracing may be required
to restrict cable movement. Lashing and lacing cables
accomplish this.

Using appropriate tools, the installer must strip the conduc- Cable Bracing Instructions
tor insulation sufficiently to fill the entire barrel of the con- For short-circuit ratings above 10,000 amperes rms, install
nector with bare, un-insulated conductor. Conductor must cable braces per the following instructions:
be stripped without damage to the conductor strands. Bare
1. The material required for the cable braces is 3/8
strands should be of equal length (flush) on the end cut.
diameter nylon rope
or any rope having a minimum
Do not strip off more insulation than needed. Exposure of tensile strength of 2,000 pounds. 
bare conductor outside lug can compromise clearances.
2. All cable conductors of a load circuit are to be bundled
The connector and conductor should be free of all foreign together with five adjacent wraps of rope at distances
debris. of 6 inches and 12 inches from the supply terminals for
ratings up to 200 amperes maximum. (See Figures 20
Never clip cable/wire strands in order to fit within connec- and 21.)
tors. If cable/wire does not match the rating of the connector,

Wellington Puritan Mills, Inc., Madison, GA., Catalog Number 10989
contact the manufacturer.
 Norva Products, Carrolton, GA., Catalog Number TPR12
Mechanical set screw lugs are the most common. Use an
antioxidant compound, if required. Insert bare conductor
into lug so the bare conductor fills the full length of the lug A
Cable
body. Tighten lug, then torque to levels indicated on the Rope
switchboard label.
If compression lugs are utilized and supplied with the B
switchboard, the lugs will be mounted on the incoming lug Cable
Lugs
pad. Remove lugs from the pad. Use an antioxidant com-
pound, if required. Use a crimping tool approved for that C
specific lug manufacturer and lug size. Follow instructions
provided by the manufacturer of the crimp tool.
6.00 6.00
Once the lug is affixed to the conductor, re-install the lug on (152.4) (152.4)
the lug pad utilizing the existing hardware. Torque hardware
using information provided on switchboard labeling. Refer Figure 20. Cable Bracing
to Appendix Table 2 for torque values.

Cable Lugs Cable

Supports
Optional Cable
Cable Support
Application

Support
Typical Cable Support
Side View Detail

Figure 21. Cable Bracing

IM01500001E For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com

Instruction Manual Pow-R-Line Switchboards
Page 12 Effective: September 2005

Busway
A switchboard may include one or more provisions for con- Recommened Busduct
nection to Cutler-Hammer brand busway. Busway can feed Hardware for Bolting Flange
the switchboard, be fed from the load side of an overcurrent to Flange Extensions
Phase Bus
device within the switchboard, or both. Extension Switchboard
CL Ground Bus
Switchboards with busway connection(s) contain flange 92.00 Connection
connection tie-bar(s) assembled in the appropriate section. (2336.8)
.375 Hardware 90.50
The tie-bars will accept the corresponding busway flange (2298.7)
Hex Head Bolt
extension. Consult switchboard and busway drawings Flat Washer
for specifics. The tie-bars are a transition between the & Keps Nut.
switchboard conductors and the busway flange extension, Tighten Bolt with
and are assembled as part of the switchboard section. 20 Ft. Lbs Torque

View of Three-Phase
Four-Wire Busduct Centered
in Switchboard

X 5.00
CL Busduct (127.0)
CL
CL

Rear of Enclosure
3.00
Tie Bar (76.2)
Y

Side View of Busduct Aligned

From Rear of Switchboard

Figure 24. Busway/Busduct

The bus assembly is completely formed and drilled for
connections, including phase bussing and neutral, if needed.
Additionally, grounding connections are supplied.
Busway typically enters a switchboard section through
the top. However, busway may attach from the bottom,
Figure 22. Downward Elbow Right Flange back or side of the switchboard in special configurations.
(See Figure 24.)
Temporary bracing may be provided to support the busway
assembly in the switchboard during shipment. All temporary
bracing must be removed after connections are completed.
The switchboard structure should NOT be used to support
any busway run or flange and extension.
Bolts and hex nuts with captive Belleville washers are sup-
plied by the manufacturer with the switchboard to connect
the switchboard installed flange and the busway flange.
Follow instructions shipped with the switchboard and
11.62
with busway flange.
(295.2)
minimum
When a busway connection is supplied on an outdoor
switchboard, sealing the busway connection is very critical.
Upon completing the necessary bus connection, the installer
is responsible for sealing the connection point where the
busway flange connects to the chimney top cover or side/
rear cover. A tube of RTV 732 silicone sealant and a roll of
Figure 23. Standard Flange gasketing material are provided with the switchboard for
this purpose.
The switchboard flange has a corresponding piece shipped
with the busway run. The busway installer attaches the two For installation instructions on busway runs, please refer
flange pieces together prior to energization. (See Figures 22 to NEMA publication BU 1.1-2000, General Instructions for
and 23.) Handling, Installation, Operation and Maintenance of
Busway Rated 600 Volts or Less.

For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com IM01500001E

 Pow-R-Line Switchboards
Pre-Energizing Procedures and Inspection
Before energizing any switchboard, perform a comprehen-
sive inspection to make certain that the switchboard is ready
to be energized. This includes the following steps:
1. Verify that the switchboard is not energized.
2. Visually inspect the switchboard and remove all foreign
materials, such as, tools, scraps of wire and other debris
from all switchboard sections.
3. Remove and discard all packing materials and tempo-
rary shipping braces from the switchboard.
4. Any accumulation of dust and dirt should be removed
with a vacuum cleaner. Use a lint-free cloth to remove
dust and dirt on other surfaces. Never use compressed
air as this may blow contaminants into electrical and/or
electronic components. Never use solvents or other
chemicals to clean surfaces or components.
5. Visually inspect all ventilation points to ensure that
there is no blockage or debris. Remove all debris, if
present.
6. Verify all field bus and wire connections have the
proper torque per instructions on the switchboard and
on components.
7. All factory connections are made utilizing calibrated
power tools. However, vibrations do occur in transit
and handling. Verify factory connections by checking at
least 10% of the total factory connections for tightness.
If this spot check reveals loose connections, proceed to
check all factory connections. These connections include
bus hardware connections, circuit breaker and switch
terminals, contactors, metering and other connections,
including the incoming terminals.
8. Visually inspect switchboard insulators, bus bar and
conductors for damage. DO NOT ENERGIZE IF DAMAGE
IS FOUND. Contact Eaton.
9. If fusible switch type overcurrent devices are used, verify
proper fusing has been selected and installed. Eaton
does not typically supply switchboards with these fuses.
Overcurrent Devices
Overcurrent devices are typically shipped in either the
open (OFF) or tripped position. Manually close, and then
open these devices to ensure they are functioning properly.
At the completion of this process, be sure that the overcur-
rent device is in the OFF or tripped position.
Inspect overcurrent devices for any visible damage.
If damage is found, DO NOT ENERGIZE the switchboard.
Contact Eaton.
SWITCHBOARD
OPERATOR
PRESTART
IM01500001E For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com
Instruction Manual
Effective: September 2005 Page 13
Circuit Breakers
Some circuit breaker types include the ability to adjust trip
settings. When shipped, settings are typically at the mini-
mum rating. There are two types of trip units included in
this group. These types are adjustable thermal magnetic
and electronic trip units.
Thermal magnetic trip units may have an adjustable mag-
netic setting. Use the engineering study recommendations,
if available, to adjust to the proper setting. Low magnetic
settings feeding high inrush loads, such as motors, could
nuisance trip on startup. For specifics on breaker types,
consult the circuit breaker instruction leaflets shipped with
the switchboard.
Electronic trip units have several settings depending on the
breaker ordered. Electronic trip units may include long-time
(L), short-time (S), instantaneous (I) and ground fault (G)
settings. These trip units are available in combinations LS,
LSI, LSG and LSIG. Check the electrical drawings, engineer-
ing study or the engineers recommendations for these
trip unit settings. For details on each type, refer to the
Eaton circuit breaker and electronic trip unit instruction
leaflets shipped with the switchboard.
For certain breakers with electronic trip units, a portable
test kit is available from Eaton. An auxiliary power module
is included in the test kit. This auxiliary power module pow-
ers the electronic trip unit when the board is de-energized
and allows testing. The kit includes complete instructions
and test times for testing long-time, short-time/instanta-
neous operations and optional ground fault operation of
the circuit breakers.
Circuit Breaker with
Adjustable Magnetic Circuit Breaker with
Trip Unit Electronic Trip Unit
Figure 25. Circuit Breakers
Instruction Manual Pow-R-Line Switchboards
Page 14 Effective: September 2005

Overcurrent Devices with Ground Fault Protection Current Transformers

This switchboard may contain overcurrent devices with
Ground Fault Protection (GFP). The National Electrical Code
may require ground fault protection for this installation.
Other GFP applications may be used including multi-level
ground fault protection. Refer to the switchboard drawings
and electrical construction drawings for usage and place-
ment within the switchboard.
Ground fault protection may be installed integral to overcur-
rent device(s) or as a separate system. Separate systems
typically are connected to a shunt tripping mechanism on
an overcurrent device.
Visibly inspect connections on GFP systems, neutral sensors
and ground connections. Refer to manufacturers instruc-
tions for details.
Prior to shipment, the manufacturer has pre-set the ground
fault protection at minimum set points. Adjust settings per
engineered electrical plan drawings. If this information is not
readily available, contact the design engineer or other quali-
fied persons responsible for the specifics of the installation
and system design.
Prior to testing the GFP system, remove the neutral
disconnect link(s) on the switchboard to isolate the neutral
of the system from the supply and ground.
Confirm that the neutral connection has been run from
the supply to the service equipment per the National
Electrical Code.
The National Electrical Code, Article 230-95 requires that
any GFP systems must be performance tested when first
installed. Conduct tests in accordance with the approved
instructions provided with the equipment. A written test
report must be available for the Authority Having Jurisdic-
tion (AHJ). Refer to the National Electrical Code for specific
requirement or contact Eaton.
For certain breakers with electronic trip units, a portable
test kit is available from Eaton, at additional cost. The kit
includes complete instructions and test times for testing
long-time, short-time/instantaneous operations and ground
fault operation of the circuit breakers. Use of testing
equipment other than that supplied by Eaton can cause
permanent damage to the circuit breaker trip unit and
will void the warranty.
Switchboards containing metering and monitoring
equipment may contain current transformers (CTs) integral
to the switchboard. Ensure that the load side of the CTs
are connected or are shorted together with terminal block
shorting means. Remove shorting means for normal
CT operation with metering equipment. For additional
information and instructions, refer to instruction leaflet
shipped with the switchboard.
Preparing Switchboard for Insulation/Megger Testing

CAUTION
FAILURE TO SHORT OR DISCONNECT DURING SWITCHBOARD
TESTING WILL RESULT IN FAILURE OF ELECTRONIC
COMPONENTS.
Devices Installed with Control Power Fusing
Devices, which require control power fusing, can be easily
damaged beyond repair if not disconnected during the
testing phase. These devices include, but are not limited to,
customer metering equipment, electronic breaker trip units,
motor operators and communication equipment.

WARNING
DISCONNECT POWER AT SOURCE BEFORE REMOVING OR
INSTALLING FUSES. HAZARDOUS VOLTAGE WILL CAUSE
SEVERE INJURY OR DEATH.
Prior to testing the switchboard, turn off all control power
devices in the switchboard to prevent damage to compo-
nents. The control power may be turned off by utilizing the
control power switch or by removing the fuses. Components
that use power supplies include customer metering and
certain breaker accessories and these must be isolated
before testing.
The following label will appear on the equipment.

CAUTION
DO NOT TEST A CIRCUIT BREAKER WHILE ITS IN-SERVICE
AND ENERGIZED.

CAUTION
TESTING OF A CIRCUIT BREAKER THAT RESULTS IN THE
TRIPPING OF THE CIRCUIT BREAKER SHOULD BE DONE ONLY
WHEN THE SWITCHBOARD IS DE-ENERGIZED.

Field-testing of ground fault protection must follow instruc-

tions provided with each GFP device. Due to the varied types
of GFP systems, testing instructions can vary from device
to device. Refer to the specific testing instructions for each
device. Refer to instruction leaflets that are shipped with
each switchboard containing GFP or contact Eaton.

For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com IM01500001E

 Pow-R-Line Switchboards

CAUTION
FAILURE TO DISCONNECT CONTROL POWER DURING
SWITCHBOARD TESTING WILL RESULT IN FAILURE OF
ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS.
Failure to disconnect control power during switchboard
testing will result in failure of electronic components and
void manufacturers warranty.
Transient Voltage Surge Suppression (TVSS)
and Surge Protective Devices (SPD)
Prior to testing the switchboard, disconnect line and neutral
connections to all TVSS and/or SPD units in the switchboard.
Keep hardware in a clean and protected environment to
guard against damage until re-installation.

CAUTION
FAILURE TO DISCONNECT LINE AND NEUTRAL DURING
TESTING WILL CAUSE THE TVSS AND SPD SURGE
PROTECTION SYSTEM TO FAIL AND WILL VOID THE
WARRANTY ON THE DEVICE.
Failure to disconnect line and neutral during testing will
cause the TVSS and SPD surge protection system to fail and
will void the warranty on the device. After testing, re-install
all connections.
The following label will appear on the equipment.
IM01500001E For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com
Instruction Manual
Effective: September 2005 Page 15
Pre-Energizing Switchboard Insulation Testing
Exercise extreme care to prevent the equipment from
being connected to the power source while tests are being
conducted.
Prior to energizing the switchboard, perform a Megger
or DC test of the switchboards insulation. With the neutral
isolated from the ground and the switches and/or circuit
breakers open, conduct electrical insulation resistance tests
from phase to phase, phase to ground, phase to neutral,
and neutral to ground. Retain results for use to compare
to results produced in the future. A form for recording test
results is provided in the Appendix of this document. Prior
to testing, remove all control power fusing and connections
to products, which will be damaged in this test. See above.

WARNING
TO PREVENT DAMAGE TO GROUND FAULT CONTROL CIR-
CUITS, METERING CIRCUITS, OR OTHER CONTROL CIRCUITS
WHEN MEGGERING SWITCHBOARD, ISOLATE CIRCUITS FROM
SWITCHBOARD SYSTEM BEFORE BEGINNING THE MEGGER
OPERATION. BE SURE TO RECONNECT THOSE CIRCUITS
AFTER MEGGER TESTS ARE COMPLETED.
NOTE: SOME GROUND FAULT CIRCUITS MAY NOT BE FUSED,
THEREFORE ISOLATION OF THOSE CIRCUITS REQUIRES
DISCONNECTING WIRING FROM BUS BARS.
DO NOT USE AC dielectric testing.

WARNING
DO NOT USE AC DIELECTRIC/MEGGER TESTING.
Test resulting in readings at or above 1 megaohm is
satisfactory.
Post-Testing
After testing, and with the switchboard de-energized,
reconnect all devices, control fusing and disconnects
removed prior to testing. Re-attach Transient Voltage Surge
Suppressors (TVSS) and Surge Protective Devices (SPD).
Securing the Switchboard
Re-install all side covers, deadfront plates, doors and trim
parts on the switchboard using hardware supplied by the
manufacturer. Take caution that conductors are not pinched
between parts when installing the deadfront, cover plates,
side sheets and filler plates. All parts should be aligned and
secured when installed. Do not leave holes or gaps in the
deadfront construction. Clean up any debris in and around
the switchboard.
SWITCHBOARD
TESTING
 Instruction Manual Pow-R-Line Switchboards
Page 16 Effective: September 2005
Energizing Switchboard

WARNING
HAZARDOUS VOLTAGE WILL CAUSE SEVERE INJURY OR DEATH.

WARNING
ONLY THOSE PROFESSIONALS TRAINED AND QUALIFIED
ON ELECTRICAL DISTRIBUTION SWITCHBOARDS SHOULD
INSTALL AND/OR SERVICE THIS EQUIPMENT.
Extreme hazards can exist when energizing electrical distri-
bution equipment and switchboards. Take all precautions
necessary to protect people and property when energizing
the equipment. Short circuits and ground faults may exist
as a result from inadequate installation. Short circuits and
ground faults within the switchboard can cause catastrophic
damage, injury and death.
1. Prior to energizing the switchboard, turn OFF all over-
current devices and loads internal to the switchboard
plus mains in downstream equipment.
2. Verify and follow the sequence of energizing circuits
and loads. Verify phase sequencing on loads, such
as motors, which can be damaged or destroyed by
incorrect phase connections.
3. If provided, use remote operators to close and energize
switchboard, overcurrent devices and loads.
4. Beginning with the main(s), turn ON each overcurrent
device.
SWITCHBOARD
START UP
For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com
Maintenance
It is essential to maintain the equipment in satisfactory
condition.
To ensure continued quality service, a systematic mainte-
nance schedule is vital. Facility operation and local
conditions vary to such an extent that the schedule must be
prepared to suit the conditions. The maintenance schedule
for individual devices, such as circuit breakers, meters,
fusible switches, etc., should be based upon recommenda-
tions contained in the individual instruction leaflet for
each device. Inspection and test operations should be
coordinated with an overall testing program to result in
the least operating inconvenience and system shutdowns.

DANGER
HAZARDOUS VOLTAGE WILL CAUSE SEVERE INJURY OR
DEATH. DE-ENERGIZE SWITCHBOARD PRIOR TO SERVICING.

WARNING
ONLY THOSE PROFESSIONALS TRAINED AND QUALIFIED ON
ELECTRICAL DISTRIBUTION SWITCHBOARDS SHOULD
INSTALL AND/OR SERVICE THIS EQUIPMENT.
Prior to performing any maintenance on the switchboard,
first de-energize the switchboard at the source. Use lock-
out/tag-out precautions as prescribed in OSHA, NFPA 70E
and other safety manuals.
The switchboard should be given a thorough maintenance
check annually.
Exercise extreme care to prevent the equipment from
being connected to the power source while tests are being
conducted.
SWITCHBOARD
MAINTENANCE
IM01500001E
 Pow-R-Line Switchboards
Switchboard Insulation Resistance Testing
Maintenance Before Cleaning
Prior to cleaning, perform an initial Megger or DC test of
the switchboard insulation, between phases and ground.
Inspect for symptoms which may indicate overheating or
weakened insulation. Record test readings. Refer to NEMA
publication AB-4 Guidelines for Inspection and Preventative
Maintenance of Molded Case Circuit Breakers Used in
Commercial and Industrial Application.
Prior to testing, remove all control power fusing and
connections to products, which will be damaged in this
test. This includes all components with control wire fusing,
Transient Voltage Surge Suppression, Surge Protective
Devices, metering equipment, etc.

WARNING
TO PREVENT DAMAGE TO GROUND FAULT CONTROL CIR-
CUITS, METERING CIRCUITS, TRANSIENT VOLTAGE SURGE
PROTECTION (TVSS) OR OTHER CONTROL CIRCUITS, WHEN
MEGGERING SWITCHBOARD, ISOLATE CIRCUITS FROM
SWITCHBOARD SYSTEM BEFORE BEGINNING THE MEGGER
OPERATION. BE SURE TO RECONNECT THOSE CIRCUITS
AFTER MEGGER TESTS ARE COMPLETED.
NOTE: SOME GROUND FAULT CIRCUITS MAY NOT BE FUSED,
THEREFORE ISOLATION OF THOSE CIRCUITS REQUIRES
DISCONNECTING WIRING FROM BUS BARS.
DO NOT USE AC dielectric testing.

WARNING
DO NOT USE ALTERNATING CURRENT (AC) DIELECTRIC/
MEGGER TESTING. DAMAGE TO COMPONENTS WILL OCCUR.
Cleaning
While the switchboard is de-energized, remove dust and
debris from bus bars, connections, supports and enclosure
surfaces. A vacuum cleaner with a long nozzle will be of
assistance. Wipe clean with a lint-free cloth. Do not use sol-
vents to clean equipment as damage to surfaces can occur.
Should the switchboard be exposed to adverse conditions,
such as, airborne contaminants, more frequent inspections
and cleaning may be required.

WARNING
DO NOT USE COMPRESSED AIR TO CLEAN OR BLOW OUT
DEBRIS OR DUST IN SWITCHBOARDS.
Use of compressed air to clean or blow out debris in switch-
boards may imbed the contaminants within overcurrent
devices, metering equipment and other components.
Damage to insulation and other surface materials can
occur. Do Not Use Compressed Air in cleaning.
SWITCHBOARD
MAINTENANCE
IM01500001E For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com
Instruction Manual
Effective: September 2005 Page 17
Switchboard Insulation Resistance Testing
Maintenance After Cleaning
After cleaning, perform a second Megger or DC test of the
switchboard insulation between phases and ground.
Prior to testing, remove all control power fusing and
connections to products, which will be damaged in this
test. This includes all components with control wire fusing,
Transient Voltage Surge Suppression, Surge Protective
Devices, metering equipment, etc.

WARNING
TO PREVENT DAMAGE TO GROUND FAULT CONTROL CIR-
CUITS, METERING CIRCUITS, TRANSIENT VOLTAGE SURGE
PROTECTION (TVSS) OR OTHER CONTROL CIRCUITS, WHEN
MEGGERING SWITCHBOARD, ISOLATE CIRCUITS FROM
SWITCHBOARD SYSTEM BEFORE BEGINNING THE MEGGER
OPERATION. BE SURE TO RECONNECT THOSE CIRCUITS
AFTER MEGGER TESTS ARE COMPLETED.
NOTE: SOME GROUND FAULT CIRCUITS MAY NOT BE FUSED,
THEREFORE ISOLATION OF THOSE CIRCUITS REQUIRES
DISCONNECTING WIRING FROM BUS BARS.
DO NOT USE AC dielectric testing.

WARNING
DO NOT USE ALTERNATING CURRENT (AC) DIELECTRIC/
MEGGER TESTING. DAMAGE TO COMPONENTS WILL OCCUR.
Test resulting in readings at or above 1 megaohm is
satisfactory.
Compare these test readings with prior readings and
retain with previous testing for future comparisons. Trends
of lowered insulation resistance are signs of potential prob-
lems. A form is provided in the Appendix to record readings.
Bus and Cable Connections
1. Inspect bus bar and cables for visible damage.
2. Visually inspect connections for overheating and
damage.
3. All bus bar and cable connections should be checked
and torqued in accordance with labeling on the switch-
board. Refer to Appendix Table 2 for torque values.
4. Inspect for broken wire strands and pinched or damaged
insulation on cable connections.
Insulation
All bus bar and structure insulation in the switchboard
including bus supports, bus shields, bus bracing, insulating
barriers, etc., should be visually checked for damage.
Replace damaged parts. The life of insulation material is
dependent on keeping the material dry and clean.
Instruction Manual Pow-R-Line Switchboards
Page 18 Effective: September 2005
Overcurrent Devices
Maintenance instructions and field-testing for overcurrent
devices are included with the instruction leaflet for each
device within a family. One instruction leaflet per frame
or family type was included with this installation booklet
inside the switchboard. Refer to the leaflet on each device.
If leaflets are missing, contact Eaton for replacement.
Circuit Breakers
Visually inspect circuit breakers for signs of discoloration,
cracking, scorching, overheating or broken parts. Exercise
the breaker operating mechanism making sure it is opening
and closing. A breaker showing signs of any one of these
issues should be replaced. Refer to NEMA publication AB-4
Guidelines for Inspection and Preventative Maintenance of
Molded Case Circuit Breakers Used in Commercial and
Industrial Applications.
Fusible Overcurrent Devices
Visually inspect the switching mechanism and fuse
connections. Visually inspect the fusible devices for signs
of discoloration, cracking, scorching, overheating or broken
parts. Replace any worn parts or the entire switch.
Fuse Replacement

DANGER
HAZARDOUS VOLTAGE WILL CAUSE SEVERE INJURY
OR DEATH. DE-ENERGIZE BOARD PRIOR TO SERVICING
FUSIBLE DEVICES.
Be sure the switch mechanism is turned to the OFF position
before attempting to remove fuses. Visually inspect the
switch contacts, blades and mechanism to ensure that the
mechanism is in the open/off position.
Check fuses to ensure that they are of the proper class,
ampere, voltage and interrupting rating. Ensure that
non-current limiting fuses are not used as replacements for
current limiting fuses. Never attempt to defeat rejection
mechanisms which are provided to prevent the installation
of the incorrect class of fuse.
Meters, Controllers, Surge Equipment and
Other Devices
Individual devices should be maintained according to
the specific instructions supplied for each device. Remove
dust and dirt from exterior with a dry lint-free cloth. Unless
specifically instructed in the individual device instruction
leaflet, do not attempt to open sealed cases or containers.

WARNING
NEVER USE COMPRESSED AIR TO CLEAN OR BLOW OUT
DEBRIS OR DUST IN SWITCHBOARDS.
Secondary Wiring
Check all wiring connections for tightness, including those
at the current and potential transformers, if present, and at
all terminal blocks. Check all secondary wiring connections
to ensure they are properly connected to the switchboard
ground bus, where indicated. Look for broken wire strands
and pinched or damaged insulation.
For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com
Ventilation
Check all grills and ventilation ports for obstructions and
accumulations of dirt. Clean ventilation ports, if necessary.
For switchboards installed outdoors, inspect the air space
under the switchboard to be sure that it is clean and clear of
debris, leaves and obstructions.
Records
It is essential to maintain the equipment in satisfactory
condition.
Maintain a permanent record of all maintenance activities
and testing for future reference. (See Appendix B.)
The condition of each switchboard should be recorded as
a guide for anticipating the need for any replacement parts
or components or special attention at the next regular main-
tenance period. It is recommended that a series of inspec-
tions be made at quarterly intervals until the progressive
effects of local conditions can be analyzed to determine a
regular schedule.
Switchboard Events and Service Interruptions
Short Circuits, Ground Faults and Overloads

WARNING
DO NOT ATTEMPT TO RE-ENERGIZE SWITCHBOARD OVER-
CURRENT DEVICES AFTER ELECTRICAL EVENTS, SUCH AS
SHORT CIRCUITS, GROUND FAULTS AND OVERLOADS,
UNTIL THE CAUSE OF THE EVENT HAS BEEN IDENTIFIED
AND CORRECTED.
A thorough assessment, identification and correction of the
event origin must be completed. An additional assessment
of the conductor insulation and other insulating materials
should be made. Replace all damaged insulation materials,
conductors and overcurrent devices. Original switchboard
parts, insulators, insulation material and overcurrent
devices must be replaced with renewal parts from Eaton.
(See Renewal Parts Page 19.)
Do not attempt to re-energize switchboard overcurrent
components after electrical events, such as short circuits,
ground faults and overloads, until the cause of the event
has been identified and corrected.
After the event has been rectified, test equipment per the
maintenance process described in this publication.
Physical Damage
Any physical damage to the switchboard that occurs after
the switchboard is installed must be corrected. A thorough
inspection, which includes the exterior enclosure and dead-
front, plus interior components in the damaged portion of
the switchboard, should be conducted. Replace all damaged
parts and components. Ensure that there are no gaps in the
switchboard enclosure that could cause exposure to live parts.
Contact Eaton for renewal parts and assistance.
After the physical damage has been corrected, test equipment
per the maintenance process described in this publication.
IM01500001E
 Pow-R-Line Switchboards Instruction Manual
Effective: September 2005 Page 19

Water Damage Renewal Parts

Switchboards can be complex assemblies with unique parts

DANGER to fit the specific application and need. The manufacturer
offers expertise with renewal part identification. To ensure
WET SWITCHBOARDS PRESENT A HAZARDOUS CONDITION safety and to maintain UL listing, it is essential that only new
AND MAY CAUSE INJURY OR DEATH. DE-ENERGIZE POWER parts and components from Eaton be utilized.
TO ALL EQUIPMENT BEFORE SERVICING.
When ordering renewal parts or when requesting informa-
DO NOT WORK ON SURFACES OR FLOORS WHERE THERE tion on the switchboard, it is essential to include as much
IS STANDING WATER. information as possible.
Each switchboard will have a nameplate and other identifi-

DANGER cation marks with details that will help expedite information
requests and orders. The following may be required to help
DO NOT WORK ON SWITCHBOARDS OR ENTER AREAS THAT identify parts and information requests.
HAVE STANDING WATER. DE-ENERGIZE ALL EQUIPMENT IN
AREAS WITH STANDING WATER. GO or General Order Number
Item number
DO NOT WORK ON WET ENERGIZED ELECTRICAL Description of the equipment
EQUIPMENT. Supply voltage
Major accumulation of water or moisture on any part Equipment ratings
of the switchboard can cause catastrophic damage to the Catalog number or style number of part, if available
switchboard. If a switchboard has been submerged by Description of the part
more than 2 inches or where running or standing water
Drawing numbers
has had contact with current carrying parts, it has
sustained significant damage. Rating of part(s)
Electrical distribution equipment has a limited life span.

WARNING As such, the manufacturer cannot guarantee the availability
of obsolete equipment or parts. Equipment replacement
SWITCHBOARD COMPONENTS, INCLUDING CIRCUIT BREAK- may be recommended.
ERS, FUSIBLE SWITCHES, METERING, ETC., SUBJECTED
TO WATER OR MOISTURE MAY BE RENDERED UNSAFE.
REPLACEMENT IS REQUIRED.
SWITCHBOARD
The switchboard and its components may be damaged
beyond repair and may need replacement. SPARE PARTS
1. Do not attempt to clean or repair water damaged
equipment or components.
2. De-energize the switchboard at its source.
3. Do not energize. SWITCHBOARD
4. Contact Eaton for replacement.
REPLACEMENT
INSTRUCTIONS
Minor accumulations of moisture, such as condensation,
over a short period of time may be corrected using heat.
De-energize switchboard.
Apply approximately 250 watts per vertical section for
a sufficient period of time until the moisture disappears,
then remove all heat sources and materials used for drying.
Inspect for damage to components and any corrosion.
If any damage or corrosion is present, contact Eaton.
DO NOT RE-ENERGIZE SWITCHBOARD.
After the switchboard has completely dried, remove all
materials and tools from the equipment. Inspect all connec-
tions for damage and torque. Re-install all covers, fillers,
deadfront assemblies and side sheets. Conduct switchboard
insulation resistance testing described in this publication.

IM01500001E For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com

Instruction Manual Pow-R-Line Switchboards
Page 20 Effective: September 2005

Appendix Appendix B

Appendix A Switchboard Maintenance, Testing and Inspection Logs

Refer to Maintenance section of this document on Page 16 for detailed information.
Table 2. Torque Values for Copper or
Aluminum Bus Bar Connections

DANGER
Bolt Size Torque Inch Lbs Torque Foot Lbs
HAZARDOUS VOLTAGE WILL CAUSE SEVERE INJURY OR DEATH.
#10 30 Inch Lbs. 2.5 Foot Lbs. DE-ENERGIZE BOARD PRIOR TO SERVICING FUSIBLE DEVICES
1/4 65 Inch Lbs. 5.4 Foot Lbs. ONLY QUALIFIED PERSONS SHOULD INSTALL AND OR SERVICE THIS EQUIPMENT.
5/16 130 Inch Lbs. 10.8 Foot Lbs.
3/8 240 Inch Lbs. 20.0 Foot Lbs.
1/2 600 Inch Lbs. 50.0 Foot Lbs.

Note: For other torque values, refer to instruc-

WARNING
tion leaflet for the specific component.
TO PREVENT DAMAGE TO GROUND FAULT CONTROL CIRCUITS, METERING
CIRCUITS, TRANSIENT VOLTAGE SURGE PROTECTION (TVSS) OR OTHER CONTROL
CIRCUITS, WHEN MEGGERING SWITCHBOARD, ISOLATE CIRCUITS FROM SWITCH-
BOARD SYSTEM BEFORE BEGINNING THE MEGGER OPERATION. BE SURE TO
RECONNECT THOSE CIRCUITS AFTER MEGGER TESTS ARE COMPLETED.

NOTE: SOME GROUND FAULT CIRCUITS MAY NOT BE FUSED, THEREFORE ISOLATION
OF THOSE CIRCUITS REQUIRES DISCONNECTING WIRING FROM BUS BARS.

WARNING
DO NOT USE ALTERNATING CURRENT (AC) DIELECTRIC/ MEGGER TESTING.
DAMAGE TO COMPONENTS WILL OCCUR.

PREVENTIVE
MAINTENANCE
PLAN AND
SCHEDULE

For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com IM01500001E

 Pow-R-Line Switchboards Instruction Manual
Effective: September 2005 Page 21

Table 3. Initial Insulation Resistance Test Record

Date ALL OVERCURRENT DEVICES OPEN
Phase to Phase Connections Phase to Ground Connections Neutral-
A-B A-C B-C A Ground B Ground C Ground Ground
Connection

Date ALL OVERCURRENT DEVICES CLOSED

Phase to Phase Connections Phase to Ground Connections Neutral-
A-B A-C B-C A Ground B Ground C Ground Ground
Connection

Notes:

Date ALL OVERCURRENT DEVICES OPEN

Phase to Phase Connections Phase to Ground Connections Neutral-
A-B A-C B-C A Ground B Ground C Ground Ground
Connection

Date ALL OVERCURRENT DEVICES CLOSED

Phase to Phase Connections Phase to Ground Connections Neutral-
A-B A-C B-C A Ground B Ground C Ground Ground
Connection

Notes:

Date ALL OVERCURRENT DEVICES OPEN

Phase to Phase Connections Phase to Ground Connections Neutral-
A-B A-C B-C A Ground B Ground C Ground Ground
Connection

Date ALL OVERCURRENT DEVICES CLOSED

Phase to Phase Connections Phase to Ground Connections Neutral-
A-B A-C B-C A Ground B Ground C Ground Ground
Connection

Notes:

Date ALL OVERCURRENT DEVICES OPEN

Phase to Phase Connections Phase to Ground Connections Neutral-
A-B A-C B-C A Ground B Ground C Ground Ground
Connection

Date ALL OVERCURRENT DEVICES CLOSED

Phase to Phase Connections Phase to Ground Connections Neutral-
A-B A-C B-C A Ground B Ground C Ground Ground
Connection

Notes:

IM01500001E For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com

Instruction Manual Pow-R-Line Switchboards
Page 22 Effective: September 2005

Table 4. Switchboard Inspection Log

Date Check List Notes and Actions Taken

Cleaning
Bus and Cable Connections
Insulation Inspection
Overcurrent Device Inspection
Meters
Controllers
Surge Protective Devices
Other Protective Devices
Secondary/Control Wiring
Clean Ventilation

Date Check List Notes and Actions Taken

Cleaning
Bus and Cable Connections
Insulation Inspection
Overcurrent Device Inspection
Meters
Controllers
Surge Protective Devices
Other Protective Devices
Secondary/Control Wiring
Clean Ventilation

Date Check List Notes and Actions Taken

Cleaning
Bus and Cable Connections
Insulation Inspection
Overcurrent Device Inspection
Meters
Controllers
Surge Protective Devices
Other Protective Devices
Secondary/Control Wiring
Clean Ventilation

Note: Refer to Maintenance section on Page 16.

For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com IM01500001E

 Pow-R-Line Switchboards Instruction Manual
Effective: September 2005 Page 23

Notes

IM01500001E For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com

Instruction Manual Pow-R-Line Switchboards
Page 24 Effective: September 2005

National Electrical Code and NEC are registered trade-

marks of the National Fire Protection Association,
Quincy, Mass. UL is a federally registered trademark of
Underwriters Laboratories Inc. NEMA is the registered
trademark and service mark of the National
Electrical Manufacturers Association. Cutler-Hammer
and Pow-R-Line are federally registered trademarks of
Eaton Corporation.

Eaton Electrical Inc.

1000 Cherrington Parkway
Moon Township, PA 15108-4312
United States of America
tel: 1-800-525-2000
www.EatonElectrical.com

2005 Eaton Corporation

All Rights Reserved
Printed in USA
Publication No. IM01500001E / Z3621
September 2005
SWITCHBOARD DRAWINGS
 SPD

MLO

SWITCHBOARD
PARTS

Front View
1 * 2 *

Power Flow

Floor Plan
Cable Exit

24.00 24.00

3.00 2.50
13.00

24.00 30.00
3.00 3.00

Total of 2 Structures, Total Width of 66 Inches with Front Hinged Doors.Total of 2 Structures, Total Weight of 1342 Weight-Lbs.

Width-Inches 30.00 36.00

Width-MM 762 914
Depth(Inner)-In. 30.00 30.00
Depth(Inner)-MM 762 762
Depth(Outer)-In. 43.00 43.00
Depth(Outer)-MM 1092 1092
Height-Inches 90.00 90.00
Height-MM 2286 2286
Weight-Lbs.(Est.) 630 712
Weight-Kg.(Est.) 285 322
The information on this PREPARED BY DATE
document is created by Eaton U174 10/24/13 Eaton Corporation Sumter, SC
Corporation. It is disclosed
APPROVED BY DATE JOB NAME Servicios Electricos
in confidence and it is only
to be used for the purpose in DESIGNATION MAIN #1, N3R
which it is supplied. VERSION TYPE DRAWING TYPE

8.0 Switchboards Customer Appr.

NEG-ALT NUMBER REVISION DWG SIZE G.O. ITEM SHEET

U10L0612D301-0004
1 A 2 OF 3
 Switchboard Units Information
Str# Unit Description/Modifications Nameplate
1
Surge Protective Device -SPD Series 160kA SPD, Standard w/ Surge Counter (Disconnect Included)

2
Feeder Breaker - Ind Mtd-1600A 3P Magnum SB Brkr SBS-616 [Fixed-Manual], Trip 1200 A. RMS520M LSIG, 100% rated
Terminals, Mechanical, (5) 3/0-750 kcmil, Bottom

The information on this PREPARED BY DATE

document is created by Eaton U174 10/24/13 Eaton Corporation Sumter, SC
Corporation. It is disclosed
APPROVED BY DATE JOB NAME Servicios Electricos
in confidence and it is only
to be used for the purpose in DESIGNATION MAIN #1, N3R
which it is supplied. VERSION TYPE DRAWING TYPE

8.0 Switchboards Customer Appr.

NEG-ALT NUMBER REVISION DWG SIZE G.O. ITEM SHEET

U10L0612D301-0004
1 A 3 OF 3
MAGNUM SB PRODUCT DATA
 3.1 Power Breakers, Contactors and Fuses
Power Circuit Breakers MAGNUM SB BREAKER
PRODUCT SUBMITTAL
DATA
Contents
3 Power Circuit Breaker
Description Page
3 Low Voltage Power Circuit Breakers
Features, Benefits and Functions . . . . . . . . . . V4-T3-3
3 Magnum DS Low Voltage Power
Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T3-6
3 Magnum MDSL Current Limiting Power
Circuit Breaker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T3-11
3 Magnum SB Low Voltage Insulated Case
Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T3-14
3 Magnum IEC Rated Air Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . V4-T3-18
Series NRX Low Voltage Power Circuit Breakers . . . V4-T3-27
3 Medium Voltage Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T3-34

3
3
3
3 Low Voltage Power Circuit Breakers
3 Product Overview

3 Magnum Low Voltage Power

Circuit Breakers for Global
Application
3 Magnum Low Voltage
Power Circuit Breakers
3 enable comprehensive
solutions to meet and exceed
3 the unique and wide-ranging
requirements of todays
3 global power distribution
systems. This powerful
circuit breaker offering is
3 designed for ultimate custom
configuration and application
3 flexibility, with the needs of
the power distribution
3 200 to 6000A continuous
equipment user and the
electrical equipment
3 manufacturer in mind.
Three Product Families
Magnum consists of three
product families; each
provides specific ratings
features and approvals to
optimize performance when
applied in power distribution
equipment and custom
enclosures:
Magnum DS Low Voltage
Power Circuit Breakers for
ANSI Rated Switchgear
Applications
Up to 635 Vac
42 to 200 kA interrupting
Magnum SB Low Voltage Magnum IEC Air Circuit
Insulated Case Circuit
Breakers for Switchboard
Breakers for IEC Rated
Switchboards
Applications
Up to 690 Vac
Up to 635 Vac 200 to 6300A continuous
200 to 5000A continuous 40 to 105 kA Icu/Ics
50 to 150 kA interrupting
Magnum SB Low Voltage Insulated
Case Circuit Breaker Family UL Rated
for Switchboard Applications
Magnum IEC Low Voltage Air Circuit
Breaker Family

3
3
Magnum DS Low Voltage Power Circuit
3 Breaker Family ANSI Rated for
Switchgear Applications

3
3
3
3
3
3
V4-T3-2 Volume 4Circuit Protection CA08100005ESeptember 2012 www.eaton.com

Features, Benefits and Functions
200 kA interruption
ratings with current
limiting performance and
low current let-through to
reduce damaging energy
to downstream equipment
at high fault levels
Withstand ratings up to
100 kA to maximize
system coordination and
selectivity
Four physical frame sizes
(Narrow, Standard, Double
Narrow and Double)
to promote breaker
application in compact
modular enclosures and
improve enclosure density
Continuous current
ratings from 800 to
6300A with 100% rating
at 104F (40C) and no
derating on most ratings
up to 122F (50C)
Fixed breaker mounting
configurations with
horizontal and optional
vertical and front
connected terminal
connections
Drawout breaker
mounting configurations
with cassette and optional
safety shutters
Three- and four-pole
breaker configurations
Through-the-door design
for human interface with
the breaker compartment
door closed
Power Breakers, Contactors and Fuses
Power Circuit Breakers
3.1
Two-step stored energy 3
mechanism for manually
and electrical operated 3
breakers
Digitrip RMS Trip Unit 3
family protection with
four models each providing 3
increasing levels of
protection and feature
options for coordination,
3
information and
diagnostics: 3
Microprocessor-based
3
rms sensing
Basic to programmable
overcurrent protection 3
and alarms
Local display for Through-the-Door Design for Human 3
information, status and Interface with the Breaker
3
Compartment Door Closed
diagnostics
Ampere, voltage and
power metering 3
Power quality,
harmonics and
waveform capture
3
Communications with
translators to common
3
protocols
Zone selective
3
interlocking for
improved coordination 3
Integral Arcflash
3
Reduction Maintenance
System
3
Breaker health High Technology Microprocessor-
monitoring Based Digitrip RMS 1150+ Trip Units are
3
Available With Advanced Features Like
Field-installable Programmable Overcurrent Settings,
accessories (UL listed) Power Metering, Power Quality
common across the and Communications
3
breaker frames and
designed to be easily
installed in the field to
3
service or modify the
breaker at the point of use 3
Secondary terminal
3
contacts mounted at the
top front of the breaker and
away from the primary 3
voltage areas for improved
safety and access. Finger-
safe terminal blocks
3
accommodate ring-tongue
or spade type terminals as 3
standard
3
3
3
3
3
Volume 4Circuit Protection CA08100005ESeptember 2012 www.eaton.com V4-T3-3
 3.1 Power Breakers, Contactors and Fuses
Power Circuit Breakers

Contents
3 Magnum SB Low Voltage Insulated Case Circuit Breaker
Description Page
3 Low Voltage Power Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . V4-T3-2
Magnum DS Low Voltage Power
3 Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T3-6
Magnum MDSL Current Limiting Power
3 Circuit Breaker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T3-11
Magnum SB Low Voltage Insulated Case
3 Circuit Breakers
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . V4-T3-15
3 Magnum IEC Rated Air Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . V4-T3-18
Series NRX Low Voltage Power Circuit Breakers . . . V4-T3-27
3 Medium Voltage Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T3-34

3
3
3
3 Magnum SB Low Voltage Insulated Case Circuit Breakers
3 Product Description Standards and Certifications
Magnum SB is a Low Voltage downstream circuits at the
3 Insulated Case Circuit breaker maximum instantaneous UL and ANSI Test Certifications Comprehensive Enclosure
Solutions
family designed for the trip point and to facilitate Magnum SB meets or
3 performance and economic
requirements of UL 891
feeder circuit breaker
protection in UL 891
exceeds the applicable ANSI,
NEMA, UL and CSA
Magnum DS has proven
performance in Eaton
switchboards with 3-cycle standards, including: manufactured switchgear
3 switchboards.
bus bracing and switchboards with the
Magnum SB Insulated
ANSI C37.13 (Low Voltage following test certifications:
Magnum SBSE Current
3 Case Circuit Breakers have
interrupting ratings up to
Limiting Power Circuit
AC Power Circuit Breakers
Used in Enclosures) UL 1558 (Certified
Breakers have 150 kA Magnum DS Low Voltage
3 100 kA at 635 Vac with
continuous current ratings
interrupting ratings at
ANSI C37.16 (Preferred
Ratings, Related Metal-Enclosed
480 Vac with continuous switchgear)
up to 5000A Requirements, and
3 Magnum SB Insulated
current ratings up to
5000A. The short-time Application UL 891 (Certified
Case Circuit Breakers have Recommendations for Pow-R-Line C Low Voltage
3 lighter-duty short-time
withstand rating is 30 kA
for standard frame and Low Voltage Power Circuit Switchboards)
withstand ratings and fixed 50 kA for double frame Breakers and AC Power UL, CSA 22.2.31 Low
3 internal instantaneous trips breakers Circuit Breakers) Voltage Assemblies
on most ratings, which is ANSI C37.17 (Trip Devices
3 characteristic of UL 489
molded case breakers
for AC and General
Purpose DC Low Voltage
Approvals and Marks
UL listed: Magnum DS
commonly used in UL 891
3 switchboards. This
Power Circuit Breakers)
ANSI C37.50 (Test
Breaker UL File E52096 and
Cassette UL File E204565
provides for greater
3 economy and excellent
Procedures for Low
Voltage AC Power Circuit
coordination and selectivity Breakers Used in
3 for most commercial
applications
Enclosures)
UL 1066 (Standard for Low Product Selection
3 Fixed internal
instantaneous trips will
Voltage AC and DC Power Contact Eaton for pricing.
Circuit Breakers Used in
3 be phased in on all SB
Insulated Case Circuit
Enclosures)
Breakers rated 3200A and
NEMA SG3 (This standard
3 below to provide an extra adopts ANSI C37.16 in
its entirety)
safety factor by reducing
3 the energy let-through to
Typical Magnum SB Low Voltage
Insulated Case Circuit Breaker
3 Nameplate

3
V4-T3-14 Volume 4Circuit Protection CA08100005ESeptember 2012 www.eaton.com
 Power Breakers, Contactors and Fuses
Power Circuit Breakers
3.1
Technical Data and Specifications
3
Magnum SB Switchboard Class Insulated Case Low Voltage Air Circuit Breakers
rms Symmetrical Current Ratings kA 50/60 Hz 1
3
Breaker Type Available Current Sensor and
Frame
Amperes
Catalog
Position 16
Frame
Type
Interrupting
at 254 Vac
Interrupting
at 508 Vac
Interrupting
at 635 Vac
Short-Time
Withstand Rating
Fixed Internal
Instantaneous Trip
Rating Plugs for Digitrip RMS Trip Unit
(Establishes Breaker In Rating) 3
3
2
800 SBN-508 Narrow 50 50 35 20 200, 250, 300, 400, 600, 800
2
SBN-608 Narrow 65 65 42 20
SBN-C08 Narrow 100 100 65 20 18 x In 3
2
SBS-608 Standard 65 65 65 20
SBS-C08 Standard 100 100 85 20 2 3
3
SBS-E08 4 Standard 200 150 30 30
1200 SBN-512 Narrow 50 50 35 25 2
200, 250, 300, 400, 600, 800, 1000, 1200
3
3
2
SBN-612 Narrow 65 65 42 25
SBN-C12 Narrow 100 100 65 25 18 x In
SBS-612 Standard 65 65 65 25 2
3
2
SBS-C12 Standard 100 100 85 25
SBS-E12 4 Standard 200 150 3
30 30 3
2

3
1600 SBN-516 Narrow 50 50 35 30 200, 250, 300, 400, 600, 800, 1000, 1200, 1600
2
SBN-616 Narrow 65 65 42 30
SBN-C16 Narrow 100 100 65 30 18 x In
2
3
SBS-616 Standard 65 65 65 30
SBS-C16 Standard 100 100 85 30 2
3
4 3
SBS-E16 Standard 200 150 30 30
2000 SBN-620 Narrow 65 65 65 35 2
200, 250, 300, 400, 600, 800, 1000, 1200, 3
1600, 2000
SBN-C20
SBS-620
Narrow
Standard
100
65
100
65
65
65
35
35
18 x In
2
3
SBS-C20 Standard 100 100 85 35 2
3
4 3
SBS-E20 Standard 200 150 30 30
2500 SBS-625 Standard 65 65 65 45 2
200, 250, 300, 400, 600, 800, 1000, 1200, 1600, 3
2 2000, 2500
SBS-C25 Standard 100 100 85 45
SBS-E25 4 Double 200 150 3
50 50
3
3
2
3000 SBS-630 Standard 65 65 65 50 200, 250, 300, 400, 600, 800, 1000, 1200, 1600,
2 2000, 2500, 3000
SBS-C30 Standard 100 100 85 50
SBS-E30 4 Double 200 150 3
50 50 3
4000 SBS-840 Double 85 85 85 85 2000, 2500, 3000, 4000
SBS-C40 Double 100 100 100 100 3
3

3
SBS-E40 4 Double 200 150 50 50
5000 SBS-850 Double 85 85 85 85 2500, 3000, 4000, 5000
SBS-C50 Double 100 100 100
3
100
3
SBS-E50 45 Double 200 150 50 50
6000 SBS-C60 5 Double 100 100 100 100 3000, 4000, 5000, 6000 3
Notes
1 Interrupting ratings shown based on breaker equipped with integral Digitrip RMS Trip Unit. Interruption ratings for non-automatic breakers are equal to the published short-time withstand rating. 3
These interruption ratings are based on the standard duty cycle consisting of an open operation, a 15-second interval and a close-open operation, in succession, with delayed tripping in case of
short-delay devices. The standard duty cycle for short-time ratings consists of maintaining the rated current for two periods of 1/2 seconds each, with a 15-second interval of zero current between
the two periods.
3
3
2 Fixed internal instantaneous trip set at approximately 18 x I symmetrical will be phased into the product.
n
3 Product to be tested. Contact Eaton for product rating.
4 Magnum SBSE Current Limiting Power Circuit Breaker with fast opening contacts.
5 Breaker applied in a tested fan-cooled enclosure.
3
Magnum SB is UL 1066 listed.
3
3
Volume 4Circuit Protection CA08100005ESeptember 2012 www.eaton.com V4-T3-15
 3.1 Power Breakers, Contactors and Fuses
Power Circuit Breakers

Digitrip Trip Units for Magnum SB and Magnum DS ANSI/UL Rated Power Circuit Breakers
3
3
3
3 Trip Unit Type Digitrip 520 Digitrip 520M Digitrip 520MC Digitrip 1150+ 1

3 Ampere range
Interrupting rating at 480V
2006000A
42200 kA
2006000A
42200 kA
2006000A
42200 kA
2006000A
42200 kA

3 rms sensing Yes Yes Yes Yes

Protection and Coordination
3 Protection Ordering options LI, LSI, LSIG LSI, LSIG, LSIA LSI, LSIG, LSIA LSI, LSIG, LSIA
Fixed rating plug (In) Yes Yes Yes Yes
3 Overtemperature trip Yes Yes Yes Yes

3 Long delay
protection
Long delay pickup 0.41.0 x (In) 0.41.0 x (In) 0.41.0 x (In) 0.41.0 x (In)
Long delay time I2t at 6 x Ir 224 sec 224 sec 224 sec 224 sec
(L)
3 Long delay time I4t No No No 15 sec
IEEE curves No No No Yes
3 Long delay thermal memory Yes Yes Yes Yes

3
High load alarm No No No 0.51.0 x (Ir)
Short delay Short delay pickup 2001000% x (Ir) and M1 2001000% x (Ir) and M1 2001000% x (Ir) and M1 2001000% x (Ir) and M1
protection
3 (S) Short delay time I2t at 8 x Ir 100500 ms 100500 ms 100500 ms 100500 ms
Short delay time flat 100500 ms 100500 ms 100500 ms 100500 ms
3 Short delay time ZSI Yes Yes Yes Yes
Instantaneous Instantaneous pickup 2001000% x (In) and M1 2001000% x (In) and M1 2001000% x (In) and M1 2001000% x (In) and M1
3 protection
(I)
Making current release Yes Yes Yes Yes

3 Ground fault
Off position
Ground fault alarm
LSI and LSIG
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes

3
protection
Ground fault pickup 25100% x (In) 25100% x (In) 25100% x (In) 24100% x (In)
(G) 2
Ground fault delay I2t at 0.625 x In 100500 ms 100500 ms 100500 ms 100500 ms
3 Disable ground fault protection No No No No
Neutral protection (N) Model LSI Model LSI Model LSI Model LSI
3 System Diagnostics

3 Cause of trip LEDs Yes Yes Yes Yes

Magnitude of trip information No Yes Yes Yes

3 Remote signal contacts No Yes Yes Yes

Programmable contacts No No No Yes
3 Electronic operations counter No No No Yes

3 Notes
1 Over and undervoltage alarm or trip, over and underfrequency alarm or trip, voltage unbalance alarm or trip, reverse power trip and phase rotation alarm are included.

3
2 1200A maximum ground fault setting per UL/NEC.

In = Rating plug and sensor rating.

Ir = Long delay pickup setting.
3
3
3
3
3
3
V4-T3-16 Volume 4Circuit Protection CA08100005ESeptember 2012 www.eaton.com
 Power Breakers, Contactors and Fuses
Power Circuit Breakers
3.1
Digitrip Trip Units for Magnum SB ANSI/UL Rated Power Circuit Breakers, continued
3
3
3
Trip Unit Type Digitrip 520 Digitrip 520M Digitrip 520MC Digitrip 1150+ 1 3
System Monitoring
Digital display No 4-Character LCD 4-Character LCD 24-Character LED
3
Current (%) full scale sensor No Yes +/ 2% Yes +/ 2% Yes +/ 1% 3
Voltage (%) L to L No No No Yes +/ 1%
Power and energy (%) No No No Yes +/ 2% 3
Apparent power kVA and demand No No No Yes
Reactive power kVAR No No No Yes
3
Power factor No No No Yes
3
Crest factor No No No Yes
System Communications 3
Type INCOM/PowerNet/Modbus 2/ INCOM/PowerNet/TripLink/
PROFIBUS 2 Modbus 2/PROFIBUS 2 3
Power supply in breaker N/A Optional Standard Standard
Additional Features 3
Trip log (three events) No No No Yes
Electronic operations counter No No No Yes
3
Testing method 3 Test set Test set Test set Integral and test set
3
Waveform capture No No No Yes
ARMs (Arcflash Reduction Maintenance System Mode) No No Yes Yes 4 3
Breaker health monitor No No No Yes
Programmable relay functions No No No Yes 1 3
Notes
1 Over and undervoltage alarm or trip, over and underfrequency alarm or trip, voltage unbalance alarm or trip, reverse power trip and phase rotation alarm are included.
3
3
2 Requires externally mounted MMINT or PMINT module.
3 Test set for secondary injection.
4 Contact Eaton for availability.

In = Rating plug and sensor rating. 3

Ir = Long delay pickup setting.

3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
Volume 4Circuit Protection CA08100005ESeptember 2012 www.eaton.com V4-T3-17
MAGNUM SB INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION
 Instruction Leaflet IB2C12063H03 effective March 2012

Instructions for Installation, Operation

and Maintenance of Magnum SB
Insulated Case Low Voltage Power
Circuit Breakers

WARNING
DO NOT ATTEMPT TO INSTALL OR PERFORM MAINTENANCE
ON EQUIPMENT WHILE IT IS ENERGIZED. DEATH OR SEVERE
PERSONAL INJURY CAN RESULT FROM CONTACT WITH
ENERGIZED EQUIPMENT. ALWAYS VERIFY THAT NO VOLTAGE
IS PRESENT BEFORE PROCEEDING. ALWAYS FOLLOW
SAFETY PROCEDURES. EATON IS NOT LIABLE FOR THE
MISAPPLICATION OR MISINSTALLATION OF ITS PRODUCTS.

WARNING
OBSERVE ALL RECOMMENDATIONS, NOTES, CAUTIONS, AND
WARNINGS RELATING TO THE SAFETY OF PERSONNEL AND
EQUIPMENT. OBSERVE AND COMPLY WITH ALL GENERAL
AND LOCAL HEALTH AND SAFETY LAWS, CODES, AND
PROCEDURES.

CAUTION
TESTING A CIRCUIT BREAKER WHILE IN-SERVICE AND
CARRYING LOAD CURRENT IS NOT RECOMMENDED FOR
POWER AND MEDIUM VOLTAGE CIRCUIT BREAKERS. TESTING
THAT RESULTS IN THE TRIPPING OF THE CIRCUIT BREAKER
SHOULD BE DONE ONLY WITH THE CIRCUIT BREAKER IN A
DEENERGIZED SYSTEM OR IN THE TEST OR DISCONNECTED
CELL POSITIONS OR WHILE IT IS ON A TEST BENCH.
PERFORMING TESTS WITHOUT THE EATON-APPROVED TEST
KIT MAY DAMAGE THE TRIP UNIT.
Instructional Leaflet IB2C12063H03
Effective March 2012
Contents Page
Section 1: Introduction
General Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Safety Features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Safety Practices. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Qualified Personnel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Other Publications and Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Section 2: Receiving, Handling And Installation
General Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Suggested Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Unpacking Circuit Breaker. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Storing Circuit Breaker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Lifting Circuit Breaker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Circuit Breaker Inspection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Installing Drawout Circuit Breaker. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Rejection Interlocks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Circuit Breaker Positioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Levering Circuit Breaker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Fixed Circuit Breaker. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Circuit Breaker Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Section 3: Circuit Breaker Description And Operation
Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Basic Circuit Breaker Assembly. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Pole Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Primary Moving Contacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Primary Stationary Contacts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Operating Mechanism. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Manual Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Electrical Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Anti-Pump Feature. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Arc Chambers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Arc Chute . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Electronic Tripping System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Microprocessor-based Trip Unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Rating Plug . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Current Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Trip Actuator. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Mechanical Trip Flag. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Making Current Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Fixed Instantaneous Non-Adjustable Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
High Instantaneous Trip. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Voltage Taps. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Secondary Contacts and Connection Diagrams . . . . . . . . . 28
2 EATON CORPORATION www.eaton.com
Instructions for Installation, Operation and
Maintenance of Magnum SB Insulated Case
Low Voltage Power Circuit Breakers
Contents Page
Connection Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Accessory Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Plug-In Electrical Accessories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Internal Electrical Accessories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Mechanical Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Section 4: Drawout Circuit Breaker And Cassette
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Drawout Cassette. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Drawout Circuit Breaker Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Drawout Cassette Dimensions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Section 5: Fixed Circuit Breaker
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Fixed Circuit Breaker Dimensions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Section 6: Inspection And Maintenance
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
General Cleaning Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
When to Inspect. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
What to Inspect. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Functional Field Testing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Manual Operation Functional Test. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Electrical Operation Functional Test. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Trip Unit Overload Functional Test. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Arc Chute Inspection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Primary Contact Inspection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Breaker Frame Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Breaker Mechanism Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Circuit Breaker Modifications and Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Rating Plug Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Current Sensor Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Section 7: Troubleshooting
Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Section 8: Renewal Parts
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Figures
Figure 1. Family of Magnum SB Low Voltage Power Fixed and
Drawout Circuit Breakers (800-5000 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . 6
Figure 2. Typical Magnum SB Nameplate. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Figure 3. Typical Magnum SB Designation Example. . . . . . . 8
Figure 4. Shipping Clamps for Drawout Circuit Breaker. . . . 9
Figure 5. Magnum SB Circuit Breaker with Lifting
Yoke Attached . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Instructions for Installation, Operation and Instructional Leaflet IB2C12063H03
Maintenance of Magnum SB Insulated Case Effective March 2012
Low Voltage Power Circuit Breakers

Figures Page Figures Page

Figure 6. Rear View Showing Current Sensor Rating Figure 33. Pictorial Diagram of Typical Current Sensing,
Through Viewing Window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 Processing and Tripping System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Figure 7. One Side of Drawout Circuit Breaker Properly Figure 34. Digitrip RMS 1150 Programmable Trip Unit
Seated on Extension Rail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 Installed in Magnum SB Circuit Breaker. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Figure 8. Cassette Rejection Interlock Pin Positioning/ Figure 35. Hand Held Tester . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Installation for Standard and Double-wide Frames. . . . . . . 12 Figure 36. Replaceable Current Sensors Shown with
Figure 9. Cassette Rejection Interlock Bracket Location/ Bottom Adapters and Cover Plate Removed. . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Installation for Narrow Frames . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Figure 37. Line Side Voltage Tap for 1150 Trip Unit. . . . . . . . 28
Figure 10. Remove Position. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 Figure 38. Top View Secondary Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Figure 11. Disconnect Position. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 Figure 39. Secondary Connector Protective Hood . . . . . . . 28
Figure 12. Test Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 Figure 40. Typical Cassette Mounted Secondary Wiring. . . 29
Figure 13. Connect Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 Figure 41. AMP Secondary Wiring Removal Tool. . . . . . . . . 29
Figure 14. Cassette Label Showing Disconnected, Test and . Figure 42. Connection Diagram for Narrow and Standard
Connected Position of Recessed Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 Frame with Digitrip 520 and 520M. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Figure 15. Levering Position Indication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Figure 43. Connection Diagram for Narrow and Standard
Figure 16. Typical Fixed Magnum SB Circuit Breaker . . . . . 15 Frame with Digitrip 520MC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Figure 17. Typical Drawout Circuit Breaker Features Figure 44. Connection Diagram for Narrow and Standard
(Front and Rear Views) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Frame with Digitrip 1150. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Figure 18. Typical SBS/SBSE Fixed Circuit Breaker Features Figure 45. Connection Diagram for Standard SBSE Frame
(Front and Rear Views) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 with Digitrip 520 and 520M. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Figure 19. Typical Double-wide SBS/SBSE Standard Frame Figure 46. Connection Diagram for Standard SBSE Frame
Fixed Circuit Breaker Features (Front and Rear Views). . . . 18 with Digitrip 520MC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Figure 20. Typical Magnum SB Drawout Circuit Figure 47. Connection Diagram for Standard SBSE Frame
Breaker Front Cover. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 with Digitrip 1150. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Figure 21. Typical Magnum Construction (Right Side View). . 20 Figure 48. Connection Diagram for Double-wide Frame
(except SBSE) with Digitrip 520 and 520M with ABCABC
Figure 22. Features of Magnum Moving
Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Conductor Assembly. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Figure 49. Connection Diagram for Double-wide Frame
Figure 23. Narrow Frame (8-finger) Moving
(except SBSE) with Digitrip 520MC with ABCABC
Conductor Assembly. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Figure 24. SBSE Moving Contact Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . 21 Figure 50. Connection Diagram for Double-wide Frame (except
Figure 25. Standard Frame (12-finger) Moving Conductor SBSE) with Digitrip 1150 with ABCABC Configuration. . . . 38
Assembly. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 Figure 51. Connection Diagram for Double-wide Frame
Figure 26. Parital Cross-Sectional View (Shown in (except SBSE) with Digitrip 520 and 520M with AABBCC
Closed Position). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Figure 27. Typical Electrically Operated Drawout Circuit Figure 52. Connection Diagram for Double-wide Frame
Breaker with Front Cover Removed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 (except SBSE) with Digitrip 520MC with AABBCC
Figure 28. Circuit Breaker Closing Springs Being Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Manually Charged. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Figure 53. Connection Diagram for Double-wide Frame (except
Figure 29. Electrical Motor Operator to Charge Closing SBSE) with Digitrip 1150 with AABBCC Configuration. . . . 41
Spring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Figure 54. Connection Diagram for SBSE Double-wide Frame
Figure 30. Cross Section of Conductor and Arc with Digitrip 520 and 520M with ABCABC Configuration. . 42
Control System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 Figure 55. Connection Diagram for SBSE Double-wide Frame
Figure 31. Magnum Arc Plate Assembly. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 with Digitrip 520MC with ABCABC Configuration . . . . . . . 43
Figure 32. Integral Arc Runner as Viewed From Top Figure 56. Connection Diagram for SBSE Double-wide Frame
of Arc Chamber (Arc Chute Removed and Circuit with Digitrip 1150 with ABCABC Configuration. . . . . . . . . . 44
Breaker Closed). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24

EATON CORPORATION www.eaton.com 3

Instructional Leaflet IB2C12063H03
Effective March 2012
Figures Page
Figure 57. Connection Diagram for SBSE Double-wide Frame
with Digitrip 520 and 520M with AABBCC Configuration. . 45
Figure 58. Connection Diagram for SBSE Double-wide Frame
with Digitrip 520MC with AABBCC Configuration . . . . . . . 46
Figure 59. Connection Diagram for SBSE Double-wide Frame
with Digitrip 1150 with AABBCC Configuration. . . . . . . . . . 47
Figure. 60. Through-the-Window Electrical Accessories. . . 48
Figure 61. Shunt Trip with Cutoff Switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Figure 62. Shunt Trip Switch Installed. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Figure 63. Spring Release with Optional Latch Check Switch . . 49
Figure 64. Undervoltage Release Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49
Figure 65. Shunt Trip, Spring Release and Undervoltage
Release Installed. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Figure 66. Auxiliary Switch (2A/2B). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Figure 67. Mechanical Trip Indicator with Associated
Overcurrent Trip Switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Figure 68. Motor Operator Kit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Figure 69. Motor Operator Installed in Narrow Frame
Circuit Breaker. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Figure 70. Cover Mounted Key Lock and Operations Counter. . 51
Figure 71. Cassette Mounted Key Lock. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Figure 72. ON-OFF Pushbutton Lockable Cover Plate . . . . 52
Figure 73. Typical Safety Shutters in Closed Position . . . . . 53
Figure 74. Typical Safety Shutters in Open Position . . . . . . 53
Figure 75. Cell Switch (Drawout Position Indicator)
Unmounted . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Figure 76. Cell Switches Mounted on Cassette . . . . . . . . . 53
Figure 77. Door Escutcheon and Gasket. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Figure 78. IP54 Waterproof Cover. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Figure 79 Cassette-Mounted 2-Way Cable Interlock. . . . . . 54
Figure 80. Drawout Circuit Breaker in Cassette . . . . . . . . . 55
Figure 81. Drawout Circuit Breaker with Automatic
Primary Disconnects. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Figure 82. Typical Drawout Cassette Features . . . . . . . . . . 56
Figure 83. Typical Narrow Frame Cassette
(Horizontal Terminals) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Figure 84. Typical Basic Cassette (Without Stabs) . . . . . . . 57
Figure 85. Typical Standard Cassette (Vertical Terminals) . . 57
Figure 86. Typical Universal Cassette, 4-Pole
(Flat Terminal Pads). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Figure 87. Fixed Circuit Breaker with Available
Vertical Adaptor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Figure 88. Nameplate SB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Figure 89. Top Rear View of Circuit Breaker with One
Arc Chute Removed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
4 EATON CORPORATION www.eaton.com
Instructions for Installation, Operation and
Maintenance of Magnum SB Insulated Case
Low Voltage Power Circuit Breakers
Figures Page
Figure 90. Bottom View of Arc Chute. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Figure 91. Primary Contacts with Circuit Breaker Open
(Not Used for Contact Wear Inspection). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Figure 92. Contact Inspection Area with Circuit
Breaker Open . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Figure 93. Use of Contact Wear Indicator with Circuit
Breaker Closed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Figure 94. Magnum DS Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Figure 95. Magnum DS Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Figure 96. Magnum DS Lubrication (Not applicable
to Fixed-Mount Breakers) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Figure 97. Magnum DS Lubrication. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Figure 98. Magnum DS Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Figure 99. Magnum DS Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Figure 100. Magnum DS LubricationLevering-in
Mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Figure 101. Magnum DS LubricationLevering-in
Mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Figure 102. Trip Unit Rating Plug Location. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Figure 103. Current Sensor Cover in Place Over Sensors. . 67
Figure 104. One Current Sensor Shown Removed and
Disconnected. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Table Title Page
Table 1. Magnum SB Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Table 2. Basic Circuit Breaker Weights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Table 3. Rejection Interlock Pin Locations for Standard
and Double-wide Frames. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Table 4. Rejection Interlock Bracket Bolt Locations
for Narrow Frames. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Table 5. Magnum Digitrip Trip Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Table 6. Magnum SB Current Sensors and Matching
Rating Plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Table 7. Shunt Trip Ratings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Table 8. Spring Release Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Table 9. Auxiliary Switch, Overcurrent Trip Switch and
Cell Switch Contact Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Table 10. Undervoltage Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Table 11. Motor Operator. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Table 12. Inspection Frequency. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Table 13. Field Service Tool List. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Table 14. Magnum Breaker Torque List. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Table 15. Greases Used on Magnum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Table 16. Circuit Breaker Troubleshooting Guide. . . . . . . . . 68
Instructions for Installation, Operation and
Maintenance of Magnum SB Insulated Case
Low Voltage Power Circuit Breakers
Purpose
This instruction manual is expressly intended to cover the
installation, operation and maintenance of Magnum SB Power
Circuit Breakers. These circuit breakers may be supplied as
part of complete switchboard assemblies or as separate
components. This manual applies only to the circuit breaker and
(if drawout) its mating cassette. Magnum SB circuit breakers
may also be supplied as fixed mounted devices. In the case of
fixed versions of Magnum SB circuit breakers, certain sections
of this manual, referring to such items as position interlocks and
the drawout mechanism, will not apply.
Trip units associated with Magnum SB Power Circuit Breakers
will be addressed in a general manner in this manual. Specific
trip unit details and time-current characteristic curves are
covered in separate documents specific to the trip units.
Magnum SB and circuit breaker accessory items are discussed
briefly in this manual. Field installation instructions for such
items, however, are covered in individual instruction leaflets
specific to the accessory. This information is also available from
the Eaton website at www.EatonElectrical.com.
For application information, consult Eaton or see applicable
Product Guides, Technical Documents, Application Publications
and/or Industry Standards.
Safety
All safety codes, safety standards and/or regulations must be
strictly observed in the installation, operation and maintenance
of this equipment.
WARNING
THE WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS INCLUDED AS PART OF THE
PROCEDURAL STEPS IN THIS MANUAL ARE FOR PERSONNEL SAFETY
AND PROTECTION OF EQUIPMENT FROM DAMAGE. AN EXAMPLE
OF A TYPICAL WARNING LABEL HEADING IS SHOWN ABOVE TO
FAMILIARIZE PERSONNEL WITH THE STYLE OF PRESENTATION. THIS
WILL HELP TO INSURE THAT PERSONNEL ARE ALERT TO WARNINGS.
IN ADDITION, CAUTIONS ARE ALL UPPER CASE AND BOLDFACE.
Instructional Leaflet IB2C12063H03
Effective March 2012
Section 1: Introduction
General Information
The Magnum SB Power Circuit Breaker can be fixed or drawout
air circuit breaker utilizing an electronic tripping system. It
is designed for use in both switchboard and metal-enclosed
switchgear assemblies having maximum voltages of 635
volts ac. Magnum SB circuit breakers are available in three
physical frame sizes with continuous current ratings from
800 through 5000A. and interrupting capacities from 50 kA to
150 kA. The three physical frame sizes have common height
and depth dimensions, differing only in width (Figure 1). The
circuit breaker nameplate provides complete rating information.
All Magnum SB circuit breakers are 100 percent rated, UL
listed, and are built and tested in an ISO 9002 certified facility
to applicable NEMA, ANSI, IEEE and UL standards (Table 1,
Figures 2 and 3).
Magnum SB circuit breakers use a rigid frame housing of
engineered thermoset composite resins which has high
strength structural properties, excellent dielectric characteristics
and arc tracking resistance.
The drawout Magnum SB circuit breaker is a through-the-door
design having three breaker positions with the compartment
door closed (CONNECT, TEST, DISCONNECT) and one position
out of its compartment on extension rails (REMOVE). The
operating mechanism is a two-step stored energy mechanism,
either manually or electrically operated.
When withdrawn on captive compartment cassette extension
rails, Magnum SB circuit breakers can be inspected, accessory
items added, and minor maintenance performed. The inside of
the compartment can also be inspected with the circuit breaker
on its extension rails.
CAUTION
PLEASE READ AND UNDERSTAND THESE INSTRUCTIONS BEFORE
ATTEMPTING TO UNPACK, INSTALL, OPERATE OR MAINTAIN
THIS EQUIPMENT. STUDY THE BREAKER AND ITS MECHANISM
CAREFULLY BEFORE ATTEMPTING TO OPERATE IT ON AN ENERGIZED
CIRCUIT.
WARNING
MAGNUM SB CIRCUIT BREAKERS SHOULD NOT UNDER ANY
CIRCUMSTANCES BE APPLIED OUTSIDE THEIR NAMEPLATE
RATINGS. OPERATION OUTSIDE OF THESE RATINGS COULD RESULT
IN DEATH, BODILY INJURY OR PROPERTY DAMAGE.
EATON CORPORATION www.eaton.com 5
Instructional Leaflet IB2C12063H03 Instructions for Installation, Operation and
Effective March 2012 Maintenance of Magnum SB Insulated Case
Low Voltage Power Circuit Breakers

Double-wide Fixed SB
Standard Frame Drawout SB

Narrow Frame Fixed SB

Figure 1. Family of Magnum SB Low Voltage Power Fixed and Drawout Circuit Breakers (800-5000 Amperes)

Safety Features
Magnum SB circuit breakers and associated drawout
equipment are manufactured with built-in interlocks and
safety related features. They are provided to reduce hazards to
operating personnel and provide proper operating sequences.

MAGNUM SB
BREAKER
SAFETY
PRECAUTIONS

6 EATON CORPORATION www.eaton.com

Instructions for Installation, Operation and Instructional Leaflet IB2C12063H03
Maintenance of Magnum SB Insulated Case Effective March 2012
Low Voltage Power Circuit Breakers
Table 1. Magnum SB Ratings
Fixed
Interrupting Rating (kA) Short Instantaneous
Max Breaker @ Time Non-Adjustable
Amps Designation 635v. 508v. 254v. Rating (kA) Trip Setting
800 SBN-508 35 50 50 20 18 X In j
800 SBN-608 42 65 65 20 18 X In j
800 SBN-C08 65 100 100 20 18 X In j
800 SBS-608 65 65 65 20 18 X In j
800 SBS-C08 85 100 100 20 18 X In j
1200 SBN-512 35 50 50 25 18 X In j
1200 SBN-612 42 65 65 25 18 X In j
1200 SBN-C12 65 100 100 25 18 X In j
1200 SBS-612 65 65 65 25 18 X In j
1200 SBS-C12 85 100 100 25 18 X In j
1200 SBS-E12 - 150 200 30 30kA
1600 SBN-516 35 50 50 30 18 X In j
1600 SBN-616 42 65 65 30 18 X In j
1600 SBN-C16 65 100 100 30 18 X In j
1600 SBS-616 65 65 65 30 18 X In j
1600 SBS-C16 85 100 100 30 18 X In j A. Low voltage power circuit breaker family name
1600 SBS-E16 - 150 200 30 30kA B. Breaker family designation number
2000 SBN-620 65 65 65 35 18 X In j C. Breaker frame size in amperes
2000 SBN-C20 65 100 100 35 18 X In j D. Interrupting capacity rating
2000 SBS-620 65 65 65 35 18 X In j E. Factory Equipped Accessories
2000 SBS-C20 85 100 100 35 18 X In j
Figure 2. Typical Magnum SB Nameplate
2000 SBS-E20 - 150 200 30 30kA
2500 SBS-625 65 65 65 45 18 X In j
2500 SBS-C25 85 100 100 45 18 X In j WARNING
2500 SBS-E25 - 150 200 50 50kA MAGNUM SB CIRCUIT BREAKERS ARE ROBUST AND ARE PROVIDED
3000 SBS-630 65 65 65 50 18 X In j WITH SAFETY FEATURES. NEVERTHELESS, THE VOLTAGES,
CURRENTS AND POWER LEVELS AVAILABLE IN AND AROUND
3000 SBS-C30 85 100 100 50 18 X In j
THIS EQUIPMENT WHEN IT IS IN OPERATION ARE EXTREMELY
3000 SBS-E30 - 150 200 50 50kA DANGEROUS AND COULD BE FATAL. UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES
4000 SBS-840 85 100 100 72 18 X In j SHOULD INTERLOCKS AND OTHER SAFETY FEATURES BE MADE
INOPERATIVE, AS THIS MAY RESULT IN DEATH, BODILY INJURY OR
4000 SBS-C40 100 100 100 72 18 X In j
PROPERTY DAMAGE.
4000 SBS-E40 - 150 200 50 50kA
Safety Practices
4000 SBN-840 65 85 85 72k 18 X In j
4000 SBN-C40 65 100 100 72k 18 X In j To protect personnel associated with the installation, operation
and maintenance of this equipment, the following practices
5000 SBS-850 85 85 85 85 18 X In j
must be followed:
5000 SBS-C50 100 100 100 90 18 X In j
5000 SBS-E50 - 150 200 50 50kA

j In is defined by the current sensor and rating plug combination

k Short Time Rating at 635v is 65kA MAGNUM SB
BREAKER
SAFETY
PRECAUTIONS

EATON CORPORATION www.eaton.com 7

Instructional Leaflet IB2C12063H03 Instructions for Installation, Operation and
Effective March 2012 Maintenance of Magnum SB Insulated Case
Low Voltage Power Circuit Breakers

1. Only qualified electrical personnel familiar with the

equipment, its operation and the associated hazards should
be permitted to work on the equipment. Additionally, only
SBS C30
qualified personnel should be permitted to install or operate
the equipment. Circuit Breaker Interrupting Frame Size
Type Capacity
2. Always be certain that the primary and secondary circuits 08 - 800 Amps
are de-energized or the circuit breaker is removed to a safe SBS - Standard and 5 - 50,000 12 - 1200 Amps
work location before attempting any maintenance. Double Wide Frames 6 - 65,000 16 - 1600 Amps
3. For maximum safety, only insert a completely assembled SBN - Narrow Frame 8 - 85,000 20 - 2000 Amps
breaker into an energized cell. C - 100,000 25 - 2500 Amps
Frame
4. Always ensure that drawout circuit breakers are in one E - 150,000 30 - 3000 Amps
of their designed cell positions, such as Connect, Test, 40 - 4000 Amps
Disconnect or Remove. A circuit breaker permitted to remain 50 - 5000 Amps
in an intermediate position could result in control circuits
being improperly connected resulting in electrical failures. Figure 3. Typical Magnum SB Designation Example
Qualified Personnel
For the purpose of operating and maintaining low voltage Section 2: Receiving, Handling And
power circuit breakers, a person should not be considered
Installation
qualified if the individual is not thoroughly trained in the
operation of the circuit breaker and how it interfaces with the General Information
assembly in which it is used. In addition, the individual should
Magnum SB Power Circuit Breakers, when supplied as part
have knowledge of the connected loads.
of an assembly, may be shipped already installed in their
For the purpose of installing and inspecting circuit breakers respective breaker compartments. Receiving and handling of
and their associated assembly, a qualified person should also this equipment is addressed in an assembly instruction manual
be trained with respect to the hazards inherent to working supplied with the assembled equipment. This instruction
with electricity and the proper way to perform such work. The manual applies to only the circuit breakers.
individual should be able to deenergize, clear and tag circuits in
Suggested Tools
accordance with established safety practices.
A large number of different tools are not required to properly
Other Publications And Documentation
install and maintain Magnum SB circuit breakers. The following
In addition to this instruction manual, other printed information tools are, however, suggested:
and documentation is available and supplied as appropriate. Flat blade screwdriver
This additional information can include, but not necessarily be Phillips head screwdriver
limited to, an instruction manual for a specific electronic trip
3/8 socket (rachet) wrench
unit, instruction leaflets for accessory items, renewal parts
information, necessary dimensional drawings and a Product 10 mm socket
(application) Guide. Specific reference documents associated 17 mm socket
with Magnum SB circuit breakers are listed in a separate Secondary wiring removal tool
document entitled Engineering Data TD01301004E.

8 EATON CORPORATION www.eaton.com

Instructions for Installation, Operation and Instructional Leaflet IB2C12063H03
Maintenance of Magnum SB Insulated Case Effective March 2012
Low Voltage Power Circuit Breakers

Unpacking Circuit Breaker

Before beginning to unpack new Magnum SB circuit breakers,
read and understand these directions. Following the directions
will ensure that no damage is caused.
Shipping containers should be inspected for obvious signs
of rough handling and/or external damage incurred during
the transportation phase. Record any observed damage for
reporting to the transportation carrier and Eaton, once the
inspection is completed. All reports and claims should be as
specific as possible and include the order number and other
applicable nameplate information.
Shipping Clamp
Every effort is made to ensure that Magnum SB circuit
breakers arrive at their destination undamaged and ready for
installation. Care should be exercised, however, to protect the
breakers from impact at all times. Do not remove protective
packaging until the breakers are ready for inspection, testing
Figure 4. Shipping Clamps for Drawout Circuit Breaker
and/or installation.
When ready to inspect and install a Magnum SB circuit breaker, On fixed breakers, remove the lag screws passing through the
carefully remove the banding straps and lift off the cardboard mounting feet which hold the breaker to the pallet.
box. Remove any additional packing material and internally
packed documentation. The circuit breaker and/or cassette are Circuit breakers are designed to be easily lifted from the
mounted to a wooden shipping pallet. wooden pallet using an appropriate lifting yoke and overhead or
portable lifting device (Figure 5).
On drawout circuit breakers shipped without a cassette, two
shipping clamps hook into the breaker side plates and are held Storing Circuit Breaker
to the pallet with 4 lag screws (Figure 4). Remove the lag If it is necessary to store a circuit breaker before installation, do
screws and clamps. Save the screws and clamps for future so in its original shipping container. Keep the circuit breaker in a
shipment of the breaker. On empty cassettes, remove the 4 clean dry place. Ensure there is ample air circulation and heat,
or 5 lag screws and/or machine screws which pass through if necessary, to prevent condensation. It is very important that
the floorpan of the cassette holding it to the wooden pallet. the circuit breaker not be exposed to dirt or moisture.
On drawout breakers shipped in a cassette, first remove the
breaker from the cassette using the levering mechanism and CAUTION
drawout rails. After the breaker is removed the machine screws
A CIRCUIT BREAKER THAT HAS BEEN STORED FOR ANY LENGTH OF
passing through the floorpan can be removed. TIME SHOULD BE OPERATED A MINIMUM OF FIVE TIMES BEFORE IT
IS PLACED IN SERVICE.

EATON CORPORATION www.eaton.com 9

Instructional Leaflet IB2C12063H03 Instructions for Installation, Operation and
Effective March 2012 Maintenance of Magnum SB Insulated Case
Low Voltage Power Circuit Breakers

If the circuit breaker is to be lifted onto compartment extension

rails, follow the instructions on page 11 entitled Installing
Drawout Circuit Breaker.
Table 2. Basic Circuit Breaker Weights
Weights (lbs)
Breaker Fixed Drawout Universal Cassette
Model 3P 4P 3P 4P 3P 4P
SBN-508 95 120 107 136 61 70
SBN-608 95 120 107 136 61 70
SBN-C08 95 120 107 136 61 70
SBN-512 95 120 107 136 61 70
SBN-612 95 120 107 136 61 70
SBN-C12 95 120 107 136 61 70
SBN-516 95 120 107 136 61 70
SBN-616 95 120 107 136 61 70
SBN-C16 95 120 107 136 61 70
SBS-608 118 146 138 172 117 123
SBS-C08 118 146 138 172 117 123
SBS-612 118 146 138 172 117 123
SBS-C12 118 146 138 172 117 123
SBS-E12 118 146 138 172 117 123
SBS-616 118 146 138 172 117 123
SBN-620 104 131 120 153 61 70
SBN-C20 104 131 120 153 61 70
SBS-620 128 160 155 194 117 123
SBS-C20 128 160 155 194 117 123
SBS-E20 128 160 155 194 117 123
Figure 5. Magnum SB Circuit Breaker with Lifting Yoke Attached
SBS-625 150 190 189 240 123 150

Lifting Circuit Breaker SBS-C25 150 190 189 240 123 150
SBS-630 150 190 189 240 123 150
CAUTION SBS-C30 150 190 189 240 123 150
DO NOT ATTEMPT TO LIFT CIRCUIT BREAKERS WITH ORDINARY SBS-E25 237 319 303 366 199 250
CRANE HOOKS, ROPES, CHAINS OR OTHER SUCH DEVICES. FAILURE SBS-E30 237 319 303 366 199 250
TO FOLLOW THIS CAUTION COULD RESULT IN DAMAGE TO VITAL
SBS-840 237 319 303 366 199 250
PARTS SUCH AS ARC CHUTES, BARRIERS AND WIRING OR THE
ENTIRE CIRCUIT BREAKER. SBS-C40 237 319 303 366 199 250

To closely examine, install or just become more familiar with SBS-E40 237 319 303 366 199 250
the circuit breaker, carefully lift and place the circuit breaker on SBS-850 276 360 343 441 212 266
a solid work surface capable of handling the circuit breakers SBS-C50 276 360 343 441 212 266
weight (Table 2) or on the captive drawout extension rails of SBS-E50 276 360 343 441 212 266
the breaker compartment (Figure 5). This is accomplished by
SBN-840 177 225 214 271 106 125
using the appropriate lifting yoke and lifter. The lifting yoke
SBN-C40 177 225 214 271 106 125
consists of two steel hooks specially shaped to hook under
the integral molded lifting handles on both sides of the circuit
breaker (Figure 5). Every effort should be made during lifting to
minimize circuit breaker swing and tilt.

10 EATON CORPORATION www.eaton.com

Instructions for Installation, Operation and
Maintenance of Magnum SB Insulated Case
Low Voltage Power Circuit Breakers
Circuit Breaker Inspection
All circuit breakers, once removed from their shipping
containers, should be visually inspected for any obvious
damage.
The current rating of the rating plug installed in the trip unit
should match the current rating of the sensors mounted on the
lower primary stabs of the circuit break er. Check to make sure
that this match exists. The rating plug rating can be viewed
from the front of the circuit breaker (Figure 20). The sensor
rating can be viewed through the viewing windows at the rear
of the circuit breaker (Figure 6). Sensors and rating plugs can
be easily changed as described in Section 6.
Installing Drawout Circuit Breaker
In structures equipped for drawout circuit breakers, a bolted-
in cassette with movable extension rails supports the circuit
breaker (Figures 5 and 7). The extension rails must first be
pulled all the way out. Once the rails are fully extended, the
circuit breaker can be carefully placed on the extension rails.
CAUTION
IT IS IMPORTANT TO TAKE GREAT CARE WHEN PLACING A
DRAWOUT CIRCUIT BREAKER ON ITS EXTENSION RAILS. IF THE
CIRCUIT BREAKER IS NOT PROPERLY SEATED ON THE EXTENSION
RAILS, IT COULD FALL FROM THE RAILS CAUSING EQUIPMENT
DAMAGE AND/OR BODILY INJURY.
Figure 6. Rear View Showing Current Sensor Rating Through
Viewing Window
Instructional Leaflet IB2C12063H03
Effective March 2012
Carefully lower the circuit breaker down onto the extension
rails. Be certain that the circuit breakers four molded drawout
rail supports are fully seated in the extension rail cutouts on
both sides (Figure 7). Do not remove the lifting yoke from the
circuit breaker until it is properly seated on the rails.
Once the circuit breaker is on the extension rails and the lifting
yoke is removed, proceed with the rest of the circuit breaker
installation.
Rejection Interlocks
Within any one physical frame size Magnum type drawout
circuit breakers come in a variety of continuous current and
interruption ratings, some of which are incompatible with
others. Double wide circuit breakers also come with several
phase sequence options which are also incompatible. To
prevent the insertion of circuit breakers with (1) inadequate
interrupting capability, (2) with physically incompatible primary
disconnects or (3) with an incompatible phase sequence,
rejection interlock key plates are provided on both the circuit
breaker and cassette. The key plate on the circuit breaker is
pre-assembled at the factory; but the cassette-side rejection
plate and key pattern must be assembled and installed by the
switchboard builder.
Molded Rail
Supports
Extension Rail Cutout
Figure 7. One Side of Drawout Circuit Breaker Properly Seated on
Extension Rail
EATON CORPORATION www.eaton.com 11
Instructional Leaflet IB2C12063H03 Instructions for Installation, Operation and
Effective March 2012 Maintenance of Magnum SB Insulated Case
Low Voltage Power Circuit Breakers

Table 3. Rejection Interlock Pin Locations for Standard and

CAUTION Double-wide Frames
DO NOT DISABLE REJECTION INTERLOCKS. DOING SO AND USING Pin Locations
A LOWER CAPACITY CIRCUIT BREAKER IN AN INCOMPATIBLE Cell For 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
CASSETTE COULD RESULT IN AN ELECTRICAL FAULT WHICH COULD
SBS-508, 512, 516, 520 X X X
RESULT IN DEATH, BODILY INJURY AND/OR EQUIPMENT DAMAGE.
SBS-608, 612, 616, 620 X X X X
The rejection interlocks are steel pins in the floor of the circuit
SBS-C08, C12, C16, C20 X X X X X X
breaker cassette. As the circuit breaker is pushed into the
structure, the mating pins on the bottom of the circuit breaker SBS-525 X X X
move past a set of corresponding pins in the cassette, if SBS-625, 630, 632 X X X X
the circuit breaker and cassette are compatible. If the circuit SBS-C25, C30, C32 X X X X X X
breaker and the cassette are mismatched, the rejection pins X X X
SBS-840
will block the insertion of the circuit breaker into the cassette
SBS-84N X X X
before the levering-in mechanism is engaged.
SBS-C40 X X X X
Before attempting to push the circuit breaker into the
DISCONNECT position, compare the positioning of the SBS-C4N X X X X
rejection interlock pins in the cassette in keeping with those SBS-E40 X X X X X
outlined in Table 1 of IL2C113863 (for MDN/SBN breakers) SBS-E4N X X X X X
and/or Table 1 of IL2C15760 (for MDS/SBS breakers), and
SBS-850, 860 X X X
the information supplied on the circuit breakers nameplate.
SBS-85N, 86N X X X
Proceed if the circuit breaker and cassette are compatible.
SBS-C50, C60 X X X X

From Table 3, make a SBS-C5N, C6N X X X X

pin location comparison. SBS-E50, E60 X X X X X
Stop nuts should be SBS-E5N, E6N X X X X X
torqued to 8-10 Ft.-Lb.

Table 4. Rejection Interlock Bracket Bolt Locations for Narrow

Frames
Bracket Bolt Locations
Cell For A B C D E
SBN-5 X X
SBN-6 X X
SBN-C X X

Figure 8. Cassette Rejection Interlock Pin Positioning/Installation

for Standard and Double-wide Frames
From Table 4,
A make certain the
C two bolts are
in the correct
locations.
E

D B

Figure 9. Cassette Rejection Interlock Bracket Location/ Installation

for Narrow Frames

12 EATON CORPORATION www.eaton.com

Instructions for Installation, Operation and Instructional Leaflet IB2C12063H03
Maintenance of Magnum SB Insulated Case Effective March 2012
Low Voltage Power Circuit Breakers

Secondary
Compartment
Connection Not Made Rear of
Front Door
Compartment

Primary
Connections
Not Made

Circuit Breaker Out No Electrical Connections Made

of Compartment Breaker On Extension Rails
On Extension Rails Remove or Inspection Position

Figure 10. Remove Position

Secondary
Connection Not
Rear of
Made
Compartment
Compartment
Front Door

Circuit
Breaker Primary
Side View Connections
Not Made

Only Ground Connection Made

Breaker Still Behind Door
Typical Storage Position

Figure 11. Disconnect Position

Secondary
Connection Made Rear of
Compartment Compartment
Front Door

Circuit
Breaker
Primary
Side View
Connections
Not Made

Breaker and Trip Unit Testing

Primary Connection Not Made
Secondary and Ground Connections Made

Figure 12. Test Position

EATON CORPORATION www.eaton.com 13

Instructional Leaflet IB2C12063H03 Instructions for Installation, Operation and
Effective March 2012 Maintenance of Magnum SB Insulated Case
Low Voltage Power Circuit Breakers

Secondary
Connection Made Rear of
Compartment

Compartment
Front Door
Circuit
Breaker Primary
Side View Connections
Not Made

Full Breaker Operation

Primary, Secondary and Ground Connections Made
Fully Racked into Cassette (Compartment)

Figure 13. Connect Position

With the breaker solidly positioned on the cassettes extension

rails and the levering-in mechanism in the DISCONNECT
position, carefully and firmly push the circuit breaker into the
compartment as far as it will go. The outer (recessed) portion
of the circuit breaker face plate should align with the GREEN
target line (labelled DISC) on the inside top left wall of the
cassette (Figure 14)
Levering Circuit Breaker

CAUTION
DO NOT DISABLE REJECTION INTERLOCKS. DOING SO AND USING
A LOWER CAPACITY CIRCUIT BREAKER IN AN INCOMPATIBLE
CASSETTE COULD RESULT IN AN ELECTRICAL FAULT WHICH COULD
RESULT IN DEATH, BODILY INJURY AND/OR EQUIPMENT DAMAGE.

Figure 14. Cassette Label Showing Disconnected, Test and The circuit breaker is now ready to be levered. With the circuit
Connected Position of Recessed Cover breaker OPEN, the levering device access door can be raised.
The levering device is hand operated using a standard 3/8
Circuit Breaker Positioning square drive and ratchet, which is not provided (Figure 15). As
long as the access door is raised, the circuit breaker is held
Magnum SB drawout circuit breakers have four normal trip free. Begin by rotating the levering-in screw to the full
positions: counterclockwise (DISCONNECT) position.
REMOVE (Withdrawn) (Figure 10) Close the compartment door and begin levering the breaker
DISCONNECT (Figure 11) into its different positions using a clockwise ratcheting motion.
TEST (Figure 12) When the circuit breaker is levered fully to the DISCONNECT
or CONNECT position the levering shaft hits a hard stop;
CONNECT (Figure 13) do not exceed 25 ft.lb. of torque or the levering mechanism
The REMOVE position is a position outside the compartment may be damaged. The circuit breaker can be levered with the
on the cassettes drawout rails where the circuit breaker is not compartment door open or closed, but it is advisable to close
engaged with the levering mechanism. The DISCONNECT, TEST, the door prior to levering. The position of the circuit breaker
and CONNECT, positions are reached by means of the levering within its compartment is indicated by color coded position
mechanism. indicators (Red = Connect, Yellow = Test, Green = Disconnect)
(Figures 15 and 20). To remove the circuit breaker from its
MAGNUM compartment, follow the procedure just described using a
NORMAL counterclockwise ratcheting motion.
OPERATION

14 EATON CORPORATION www.eaton.com

Instructions for Installation, Operation and
Maintenance of Magnum SB Insulated Case
Low Voltage Power Circuit Breakers
CONNECT
TEST
DISCONNECT
Figure 15. Levering Position Indication
CAUTION
THE CIRCUIT BREAKER MECHANISM IS INTERLOCKED SUCH THAT
CHARGED CLOSING SPRINGS ARE AUTOMATICALLY DISCHARGED
IF THE CIRCUIT BREAKER IS LEVERED INTO OR OUT OF THE CELL.
DISCHARGE TAKES PLACE BETWEEN THE DISCONNECT AND TEST
POSITION.
Fixed Circuit Breaker
Magnum SB fixed type circuit breakers differ from the drawout
version in that it has no levering device, primary disconnects
and secondary contact connector (Figure 16). In addition,
a fixed circuit breaker does not have a standard feature to
hold the breaker in a trip free position. To ensure the proper
sequence of operation between two or more circuit breakers,
an optional key interlock is mounted through the front panel
(Figure 70).
Circuit breaker terminals have holes for making bolted
horizontal primary bus connections. Adapters are available
for making vertical primary bus connections. Secondary
connections can be made through standard terminal blocks or a
special connector compatible with the drawout circuit breakers
type secondary connector. Both secondary connection devices
are mounted at the top front of the circuit breaker.
Instructional Leaflet IB2C12063H03
Effective March 2012
Mounting Foot
Figure 16. Typical Fixed Magnum SB Circuit Breaker
The fixed circuit breaker frame has two mounting feet, one
on each side, to permit the fixed circuit breaker to be securely
mounted. Each mounting foot has two slotted mounting holes
which are used to bolt the circuit breaker securely in place.
Use either M10 or 3/8 bolts for this purpose. Refer to the
dimensional drawings referred to in Section 5 (Fixed Circuit
Breakers) for circuit breaker and bus stab dimensions.
CAUTION
REFER TO THE CIRCUIT BREAKER WEIGHTS IN TABLE 2.1 TO ENSURE
THAT THE PANEL ON WHICH A FIXED CIRCUIT BREAKER IS TO BE
MOUNTED IS CAPABLE OF SUPPORTING THE WEIGHT.
Circuit Breaker Operation
Circuit breakers should be operated manually and/or electrically
before they are put into service. This can be done during
the installation process or at some later date prior to start-
up. To check circuit breaker operation, follow the operational
procedures outlined in Section 3 for both manually operated
and electrically operated circuit breakers.
MAGNUM SB
OPERATOR
PRESTART
EATON CORPORATION www.eaton.com 15
Instructional Leaflet IB2C12063H03
Effective March 2012
Section 3: Circuit Breaker Description and
Operation
Introduction
Magnum SB circuit breakers are available in both drawout and
fixed mounting configurations (Figures 17 and 18). A majority
of features are common to all configurations, and will be
discussed in this section. The mounting features unique to the
drawout and fixed configurations will be covered individually in
Sections 4 and 5 respectively.
Controls and indicators for both drawout and fixed circuit
breakers are functionally grouped on the front of the circuit
breaker. The front escutcheon (faceplate) is common for all
Magnum frame sizes up through 5000 amperes.
1. Baffled Arc Chute Cover
2. Secondary Disconnects (Contacts)
3. Faceplate (Front Cover)
4. Drawout Rail Supports
5. Integral Lifting Handle
Figure 17. Typical Drawout Circuit Breaker Features (Front and Rear Views)
16 EATON CORPORATION www.eaton.com
Instructions for Installation, Operation and
Maintenance of Magnum SB Insulated Case
Low Voltage Power Circuit Breakers
Double Wide frame circuit breakers utilize six (or eight) sets of
rear primary connections; these circuit breakers are available
from the factory with several different phase sequences,
distinguishable by the sixth character in the model number.
The phase sequence is also labeled on the rear of the circuit
breaker (Figure 19). For drawout breakers, phase sequence
labels are also supplied with the cassette and must be applied
by the switchgear builder. Circuit breakers with different phase
sequences are not interchangeable. Drawout breakers with
differing phase sequence are prevented from insertion into the
cassette by properly assembled rejection key plates (Refer to
Rejection Interlocks on page 11).
MAGNUM PARTS
IDENTIFICATIONS
6. Primary Disconnect Finger Cluster
7. Arc Chamber
8. Primary Vertical Adapter
9. Sensor Rating Viewing Window
10. Levering Device Bearing Plate
11. Padlockable Levering Device Access Door
12. Circuit Breaker Nameplate
Instructions for Installation, Operation and Instructional Leaflet IB2C12063H03
Maintenance of Magnum SB Insulated Case MAGNUM PARTS Effective March 2012
Low Voltage Power Circuit Breakers IDENTIFICATIONS

6. Fixed Primary Terminal (with optional Vertical Adapter)

7. Arc Chamber
8. Sensor Rating Viewing Window
9. Mounting Foot
10. Circuit Breaker Nameplate

1. Baffled Arc Chute Cover

2. Secondary Contact Connector
3. Faceplate (Front Cover)
4. Integral Lifting Handle
5. Fixed Horizontal Primary Terminal

Figure 18. Typical SBS/SBSE Fixed Circuit Breaker Features (Front and Rear Views) (SBSE shown without required arc hood)

EATON CORPORATION www.eaton.com 17

Instructional Leaflet IB2C12063H03 Instructions for Installation, Operation and
Effective March 2012 MAGNUM PARTS Maintenance of Magnum SB Insulated Case
IDENTIFICATIONS Low Voltage Power Circuit Breakers

5. Fixed Vertical Primary Terminals with

Optional Vertical Adaptor
6. Arc Chamber
1. Baffled Arc Chute Cover
7. Mounting Foot
2. Secondary Contact Connector
8. Circuit Breaker Nameplate
3. Faceplate (Front Cover)
9. Phase Identification Labels
4. Integral Lifting Handle

Figure 19. Typical Double-wide SBS/SBSE Standard Frame Fixed Circuit Breaker Features (Front and Rear Views) (SBSE shown without
required arc hood)

18 EATON CORPORATION www.eaton.com

Instructions for Installation, Operation and Instructional Leaflet IB2C12063H03
Maintenance of Magnum SB Insulated Case MAGNUM PARTS Effective March 2012
Low Voltage Power Circuit Breakers IDENTIFICATIONS

1. Trip Flag (Pop Out Indicator) 7. Manual OFF Button (Push) 12. Color-Coded Breaker Position
2. Three Accessory Windows 8. Manual ON Button (Push) Indicator

3. Trip Unit 9. Manual Charge Handle 13. Nameplate

4. Rating Plug 10. Optional Operation Counter 14. Trip Unit Test Port

5. Contact Status (Open-Close) 11. Padlockable Levering Device 15. Trip Unit Cover with Two Mounting
Access Door for Drawout Breaker Screws (Mounting Screws will
6. Spring Status (Charged-Discharged) Accept Customer Supplied Lead
Security Meter Seals

Figure 20. Typical Magnum SB Drawout Circuit Breaker Front Cover

EATON CORPORATION www.eaton.com 19

Instructional Leaflet IB2C12063H03
Effective March 2012
Basic Circuit Breaker Assembly
Magnum SB circuit breakers use a rigid frame housing
construction of engineered thermoset composite resins. This
construction provides high strength structural properties,
excellent dielectric characteristics and resistance to arc
tracking.
The 3-piece construction approach provides support while
isolating and insulating power conductors (Figure 21):
1. A 2-piece engineered thermoset composite resin case
encloses current paths and arc chambers. The chambers
act to channel arc gases up and out of the circuit breaker
during interruption.
2. The operating mechanism sits on the front of the case
and is electrically isolated and insulated from current
contact structures. It is covered by an insulating front
cover.
Pole Units
A current carrying pole unit is individually enclosed and rigidly
supported by the case. The individual chambers provide for pole
unit isolation and insulation from one another. Each pole unit
has one primary contact assembly, which consists of a moving
portion and a fixed portion. The exact design configuration
depends upon the breakers frame size. Circuit breakers
with frame sizes of 4000 amperes and higher use two pole
units and arc chute assemblies connected mechanically and
electrically in parallel to form one phase.
(Front Cover) (Case)
Figure 21. Typical Magnum Construction (Right Side View)
20 EATON CORPORATION www.eaton.com
Instructions for Installation, Operation and
Maintenance of Magnum SB Insulated Case
Low Voltage Power Circuit Breakers
Primary Moving Contacts
Depending upon the frame size, each primary moving contact
assembly is comprised of multiple individual copper contact
fingers connected to the load conductor through flexible
braided connectors (Figure 22). Two flexible connectors are
used to connect each finger to the load conductor. The number
of fingers used depends upon the circuit breakers continuous
and short-circuit current ratings (Figures 23 and 25). On some
ratings fingers are removed and replaced with spacers.
The single contact finger performs both the main and arcing
contact functions on different parts of the same finger (Figure
22). A highly conductive alloy pad is part of the contact finger
and functions as the moving main contact, and is called the
Heel. The tip of the same contact finger functions as the
moving arcing contact, and is called the Toe.
In addition to the contact finger information given above,
SBSE utililizes an inner and outer carriage design to facilitate
a fast opening blow open contact structure (Figure 24). The
contact fingers mounted in the inner contact carrier can move
independently from both the outer carrier and the opening
mechanism in the breaker. This independence is the core design
feature of its fast opening blow open contact structure.
Single Contact
Finger Moving
Pivot Point Arcing
Contact Area
(Toe)
Moving Main
Contact Conductive
Pad (Heel)
Dual Flexible
Connections
Figure 22. Features of Magnum Moving Conductor Assembly
MAGNUM PARTS
IDENTIFICATIONS
Instructions for Installation, Operation and Instructional Leaflet IB2C12063H03
Maintenance of Magnum SB Insulated Case Effective March 2012
Low Voltage Power Circuit Breakers

Toe
(Arcing
Contact)

Heel Toe (Arcing

(Main Contact)
Contact)

Heel (Main
Contact)

Figure 23. Narrow Frame (8-finger) Moving Conductor Assembly Figure 25. Standard Frame (12-finger) Moving Conductor Assembly

Figure 24. SBSE Moving Contact Assembly

Primary Stationary Contacts

The primary stationary contact is a combination of two items
(Figure 26). One is a conductive pad mounted on the line
conductor which functions as the stationary main contact. The
other is an arc runner, also connected to the line conductor. The
integral arc runner serves a dual purpose:
Fixed arcing contact
Part of the arc chute

Figure 26. Partial Cross-Sectional View (Shown in Closed Position)

MAGNUM PARTS
IDENTIFICATIONS

EATON CORPORATION www.eaton.com 21

Instructional Leaflet IB2C12063H03 Instructions for Installation, Operation and
Effective March 2012 Maintenance of Magnum SB Insulated Case
Low Voltage Power Circuit Breakers

Operating Mechanism (Figure 20). Performing either operation is accomplished

The Magnum SB operating mechanism is based on the proven
cam and spring design of the DSII power circuit breaker. It is
easily accessed by removing four cover screws and the front
cover (Figure 27). The mechanism is a two-step stored energy
mechanism. Potential energy is stored to close the circuit
breaker. Sufficient energy to open the circuit breaker remains
available after a closing operation.
Manual Operation
On manually operated circuit breakers, the closing spring can
only be charged manually. To manually charge the spring, insert
one finger in the recess behind the charging handle and pull
out. This permits a gloved hand to grasp the handle and begin
charging (Figure 28). It takes from 5 to 7 downward strokes on
the charging handle to complete the manual charging process.
It is possible to manually recharge the spring immediately after
closing the circuit breaker and before it has been tripped open.
Standard manually operated circuit breakers are closed and
opened by hand using the Manual ON and Manual OFF
buttons respectively located on the front of the circuit breaker
by pressing and releasing the appropriate button. Access to
these pushbuttons can be limited by the use of an optional,
padlockable cover. In addition, complete access to the ON
button can be prevented with an optional prevent close cover.
The status of the springs and the primary contacts are always
indicated in an indicator window just above the pushbuttons.
Electrically operated optional devices are available to
automatically close or trip a manually operated circuit breaker.
An electrical spring release is available to close a manually
operated circuit breaker. Two optional devices, a shunt trip
and an undervoltage release, are available to automatically
trip (open) a manually operated circuit breaker. All of these UL
listed optional devices can be installed easily in the field. For
more details on these devices, refer to Accessory Devices on
page 48 of this manual.
An electrical operator which is used to charge the closing
spring automatically can be added to a manually operated
circuit breaker in the field (Figure 29). Manually operated circuit
breakers are pre-wired to accept this addition.

1. Secondary Wiring Points

2. Field Installable Accessories (3 maximum)
3. Trip Unit
4. Electric Charging Motor
5. Manual Charge Handle
6. Operations Counter (optional)
7. Padlockable Levering Device Access Door
8. Breaker Position Indicator

Figure 27. Typical Electrically Operated Drawout Circuit Breaker with Front Cover Removed
MAGNUM PARTS
IDENTIFICATIONS

22 EATON CORPORATION www.eaton.com

Instructions for Installation, Operation and Instructional Leaflet IB2C12063H03
Maintenance of Magnum SB Insulated Case Effective March 2012
Low Voltage Power Circuit Breakers

Electrical Motor
Figure 28. Circuit Breaker Closing Springs Being Manually Charged Operator

Electrical Operation Figure 29. Electrical Motor Operator to Charge Closing Spring

For electrically operated circuit breakers, the springs are

Arc Chambers
normally charged through the use of an electrical operator
(Figure 29). The springs can, however, be charged manually as The Magnum SB circuit breaker utilizes arc chambers to
just described in the previous paragraph (Figure 28). insulate and isolate individual poles from one another, from the
rest of the circuit breaker, and from operating personnel (Figure
Like the manually operated circuit breaker in the previous
17). Arc chambers are molded and integral parts of the circuit
paragraph, electrically operated circuit breakers can also be
breaker frame. Enclosed within each arc chamber is an arc
manually closed and opened through the use of the front
chute which mounts over each set of primary contacts.
mounted Manual ON and Manual OFF buttons.
After the main contacts part, any remaining current is driven to
An electrically operated circuit breaker from the factory is also
the arcing contacts (Figure 30). Magnetic action draws the arc
equipped as standard with a spring release to close the circuit
to the arc chute. As the arcing contacts separate, the moving
breaker electrically. An optional shunt trip and undervoltage
arcing contacts discharge into the arc chute plates while the
release are also available to trip (open) an electrically operated
integral arc runner also helps to draw the arc into the arc chute
circuit breaker. Refer to Accessory Devices on page 48 for
(Figure 32).
more details on both standard and optional devices.
Arc Chute
Anti-Pump Feature
The Magnum SB arc chute mounts down over the arcing
The Magnum SB circuit breaker has both mechanical and
contact. V-shaped arc chute plates attract the arc and interrupt
electrical anti-pump features. If the circuit breaker is closed
it. The top arc plate, which is a part of the arc chute itself, also
on a fault condition (and trips open while the CLOSE signal
helps to attract the arc away from the moving arcing contact
is maintained), using either the mechanical pushbutton or the
and up into the arc chutes V-shaped plates (Figure 31). Arc
spring release, it will not make subsequent attempts to close
chute components are assembled in an insulating jacket, which
until the close command is removed and reapplied. Note that
is removable from the top of the circuit breaker. Each arc chute
if the close signal is applied prematurely (before the breaker is
has a baffled top cover.
completely charged and latched), the close command will be
ignored until it is removed and reapplied. For electrical closing,
a Latch Check Switch (LCS) option is available (Refer to page
49 for details) which will block the application of the electrical
close command until the breaker is ready to close.

EATON CORPORATION www.eaton.com 23

Instructional Leaflet IB2C12063H03 Instructions for Installation, Operation and
Effective March 2012 Maintenance of Magnum SB Insulated Case
Low Voltage Power Circuit Breakers
Electronic Tripping System
The Magnum SB circuit breaker utilizes a three part tripping Top
system (Figure 33):
Microprocessor-based trip unit
Current Sensors
Trip Actuator
All three parts of the tripping system are discussed here,
except that the trip unit itself is not discussed in detail. For
detailed information pertaining to the different trip unit models
available with Magnum SB circuit breakers, refer to the specific
instruction leaflet dedicated to the trip units (IL70C1036 and
IL70C1037). V Shaped
Microprocessor-Based Trip Unit Plates
Magnum circuit breakers use any one of a family of Digitrip
RMS trip units whose main features are summarized in Table 5.
Model 520 is plug compatible and interchangeable in the field.

V Shaped
Plates

Top Plate for

Arcing Contact

Figure 31. Magnum Arc Plate Assembly

Integral Arc
Runner

Figure 30. Cross Section of Conductor and Arc Control System

Figure 32. Integral Arc Runner Viewed From Top of Arc Chamber
(Arc Chute Removed, Circuit Breaker Closed)

24 EATON CORPORATION www.eaton.com

Instructions for Installation, Operation and Instructional Leaflet IB2C12063H03
Maintenance of Magnum SB Insulated Case Effective March 2012
Low Voltage Power Circuit Breakers

Figure 33. Pictorial Diagram of Typical Current Sensing, Processing and Tripping System

The electronic trip units are self-powered. When the circuit Table 5. Magnum Digitrip Trip Units
breaker is closed, no external power is required to operate their Functions 520 520Mm 520MCm 1150m
protective systems. Current signal levels and the control power LSIG Protection Yes Yes Yes Yes
are derived from the current sensors integrally mounted in the
Disable (I) Yes Yes Yes Yes
circuit breaker.
GF Protection Yes Yes Yes Yes
A functional local test of a major portion of the trip units
GF Alarm No Yes Yes Yes
electronic circuitry and the circuit breakers mechanical tripping
Display No Yesj Yesj Yesk
action can be verified through the trip units test receptacle
(Figure 34). This is accomplished using a Digitrip (DS Type) Test Programmable No No No Yes
Kit which provides a secondary injection test that simulates Metering No Yesl Yesl Yes
the current sensors. A small hand held Magnum functional Test Power and Energy Values No No No Yes
Kit can also be used to check circuitry and mechanical tripping Power Quality No No No Yes
functions (Figure 35).
Communication No No Yes Yes
When the circuit breaker is shipped from the factory, the trip
units protective functions are normally set at minimum values.
j One-line, (four characters per line) LCD display.
For specific overload tripping characteristics and time/current
k Three-line, (eight characters per line) LED display.
curves to coordinate with a load or system, refer to the trip unit
l Phase, neutral, ground, and high load current only.
instruction book. m Available control voltages are 24/48Vdc, 125Vdc, 120Vac and 240Vac

EATON CORPORATION www.eaton.com 25

Instructional Leaflet IB2C12063H03 Instructions for Installation, Operation and
Effective March 2012 Maintenance of Magnum SB Insulated Case
Low Voltage Power Circuit Breakers
Rating Plug
Pop Out Trip
All Magnum SB circuit breaker trip units use a fixed type Flag
rating plug. The current rating of the rating plug must match
the current rating of the integrally mounted current sensors
(Figures 6 and 34 and Table 6). The rating plug performs
several functions: Auxiliary Power
1 It tells the trip unit what the rating is of the current sensors. Module Port
A label on the front of the rating plug clearly indicates that
the rating plug and sensors must have the same rating.
2 It determines the maximum instantaneous setting which is
a function of the current sensor rating.
Rating Plug
3 The National Electrical Code (NEC) requires that the
maximum ground fault pickup value not exceed 1200
amperes. A properly matched rating plug accomplishes this
requirement for higher ampere sensors by incorporating
circuitry to identify that level by sensor rating.
If the rating plug is removed from the trip unit, the circuit
breaker will trip if it is carrying current. Make certain the rating
plug is secured in position with its retaining screw. Do not
torque the retaining screw beyond 15 In-Oz.
Test
Refer to Table 6 for a tabulation of the available rating plugs. Receptacle
Current Sensors
Three toroidally wound current sensors are installed at the Figure 34. Digitrip RMS 1150 Programmable Trip Unit Installed in
Magnum SB Circuit Breaker
rear of the circuit breaker on the lower terminals (Figure 36).
The sensors produce an output current proportional to the load
current. Under preselected conditions of current magnitude
and time, the sensors furnish the trip unit with a signal and the
energy required to trip the circuit breaker.
Neutral current sensors are available for customer installation.
The additional sensor is not supplied with the circuit breaker
and must be ordered separately. They are wired to the trip unit
through the secondary contacts of the circuit breaker.
Refer to Table 6 for a tabulation of the available current sensor
ratings.

MAGNUM
TESTING
EQUIPMENT

Figure 35. Hand Held Tester

26 EATON CORPORATION www.eaton.com

Instructions for Installation, Operation and Instructional Leaflet IB2C12063H03
Maintenance of Magnum SB Insulated Case Effective March 2012
Low Voltage Power Circuit Breakers

will not prevent the breaker from being reclosed. The indicator
is reset manually by pushing it back in. If the indicator is not
reset the circuit breaker will operate normally, but future
mechanical trip indication will be lost.
An optional overcurrent trip switch (bell alarm) that operates
off the position of the mechanical trip indicator is also available.
The switch is reset when the trip indicator is reset.
On optional Digitrip models with LED cause-of-trip indicators,
these indicators should also be reset (by pushing momentarily)
after the cause of the fault has been diagnosed; this will
preserve the internal battery. On trip units equipped for
communication the LED reset function can be performed
remotely using INCOM commands.
Toroidal Making Current Release
Sensor All Magnum SB Double-wide circuit breaker trip units have a
making current release function. This safety feature prevents
the circuit breaker from being closed and latched on a
Figure 36. Replaceable Current Sensors Shown with Bottom faulted circuit. The non-adjustable release is preset at a peak
Adapters and Cover Plate Removed
instantaneous current of 25 x In; this corresponds to an rms
current of 11 x In with maximum asymmetry.
Table 6. Magnum SB Current Sensors and Matching Rating Plugs
The making current release is enabled only for the first 2
Current Rating in Amperes cycles following a circuit breaker closing operation. The making
current release will trip the circuit breaker instantaneously,
200 800 2500
release the mechanical (pop-out) indicator and flash the
250 1000 3000
instantaneous LED trip indicator, if so equipped.
300 1200 4000
Fixed Instantaneous Non-Adjustable Setting
400 1600 5000
600 2000
Magnum SB 800-3000 ampere breakers through 100kA AIC
rating have a fixed instantaneous non-adjustable setting. This
value is set at 18 x In symmetrical rms. In is defined by the
current sensor and rating plug combination. This setting is
Trip Actuator always active, regardless of the instantaneous setting.
The trip actuator is a small cylindrically shaped electromagnetic High Instantaneous Trip
device which acts mechanically to trip the circuit breaker
(Figure 33). In general, it is comprised of a permanent magnet, The high instantaneous trip option is installed on all SBSE
a spring loaded rod to produce the mechanical tripping, and breakers. On the Magnum SBSE standard frame circuit
a lever for resetting the actuator after tripping occurs. The breakers (800-2000A) this rating is set at 30kA. On the
electronic trip unit provides a pulse which counteracts the Magnum SBSE Double-wide frame circuit breakers (2500-
effect of the permanent magnet, allowing the spring loaded 5000A) this rating is set at 50kA. In general, the high
rod to act mechanically. The device is reset when the circuit instantaneous trip is comprised of three small air core sensors,
breaker opens. one in each phase, which produce a signal and transmits it
back to the trip unit when the rating of the circuit breaker is
Mechanical Trip Flag exceeded. The result is an instantaneous trip by the circuit
A red, pop out mechanical trip indicator is an optional Magnum breaker. This high instantaneous trip option permits the
SB feature. It is located above the trip unit on the breakers Magnum SBSE circuit breakers to be applied where a 150kA
front faceplate (Figure 34). It operates by releasing and fault is possible, while selectivity up to the high instantaneous
popping out any time the circuit breaker trips due to to an trip value is maintained.
overcurrent condition. Note that the mechanical trip indicator

EATON CORPORATION www.eaton.com 27

Instructional Leaflet IB2C12063H03
Effective March 2012
Voltage Taps
On circuit breakers with Digitrip 1150 trip units potential taps
are required to monitor the three phase voltages. Voltage taps
may be placed on either the line (top) or load (bottom) terminals
of the breaker at the factory. Figure 37 illustrates line-side
voltage taps.
Secondary Contacts And Connection Diagrams
A maximum of sixty secondary wiring connection points are
available on the standard frame circuit breaker (48 on narrow
frame), each dedicated to a specific function (Figure 38). The
wiring points are finger safe with no more than two wires per
terminal.
Instructions for Installation, Operation and
Maintenance of Magnum SB Insulated Case
Low Voltage Power Circuit Breakers
Up to two secondary contact plug-in connectors (AMP), each
with 30 secondary points, are mounted on the top rear portion
of the circuit breaker . The plug-in connectors are protected
by a molded hood (Figure 39). How many connectors are
mounted depends upon a number of considerations, such as
whether the circuit breaker is electrically or manually operated
and how many features are required. When the front cover
of the circuit breaker is removed, the top of each plug-in
connector is exposed. A label on each connector identifies the
wiring points.
Protective Hood

Figure 39. Secondary Connector Protective Hood

Figure 37. Line-Side Voltage Tap for 1150 Trip Unit

Labels Legend
OTS Overcurrent Trip Switch
UVR Undervoltage Release
ATR Automatic Trip Relay (520M and
1150 Trip Units Only)
INCOM PowerNet
Communications Network
A BUS (Future Use)
A/S Auxiliary Contacts
NEUTRAL Neutral Sensor Input
GF SGND Source Ground Input
ZONE Zone Interlocking
ST Shunt Trip
SR Spring Release
MOTOR Charging Motor
LCS Latch Check Switch

Figure 38. Top View Secondary Connectors

28 EATON CORPORATION www.eaton.com

Instructions for Installation, Operation and Instructional Leaflet IB2C12063H03
Maintenance of Magnum SB Insulated Case Effective March 2012
Low Voltage Power Circuit Breakers
Drawout type circuit breakers: Compatible secondary plug-
Closed Hinged Covers Terminal Blocks
in connectors are mounted on the top front portion of the
with Testing Holes
drawout cassette (Figure 40). These connectors match and plug
into the circuit breaker mounted connectors. Contact points
are wired from the cassettes plug-in connectors to cassette
mounted terminal blocks. The terminal blocks are also mounted
on the top front portion of the cassette. The secondary
terminals have finger-proof hinged covers with small holes for
probe testing.
Fixed type circuit breakers: There are two secondary
connection options:
(1) Without Terminal Block
(2) With Terminal Block
1 Without Terminal Block - If a terminal block for customer
use is not required, the circuit breaker is supplied with
both plug-in connectors (male and female) just described
in the two previous paragraphs. The plug-in connectors are
joined and attached to the top portion of the circuit breaker.
The customer can plug secondary wiring with crimpon
connectors into back of the plug-in connectors; subsequently
the connections to the circuit breaker can be quickly joined or
separated as required.
Figure 40. Typical Cassette Mounted Secondary Wiring
2 With Terminal Block - For those customers preferring to
wire to a terminal block, terminal blocks with finger-proof
hinged covers are added to the secondary configuration
just described for a fixed circuit breaker without a
terminal block. The terminal blocks are wired to the plug-in
connectors and also permanently attached to the upper rear
portion of the circuit breaker (Figures 18 and 19).
A standard tool is available from the plug-in connector
manufacturer (AMP) to facilitate the removal of secondary
wiring from a plug-in connector, or contact Cutler-Hammer
for assistance (Figure 41). The connector halves must be
separated to use this tool.
Connection Diagrams Figure 41. AMP Secondary Wiring Removal Tool
The connection diagrams for all Magnum SB circuit breakers
using Digitrip RMS trip units are shown in Figures 42 through
59.

BREAKER
MAGNUM SB
CONECTION
DIAGRAMS MAGNUM
SPECIAL TOOLS

EATON CORPORATION www.eaton.com 29

30
EATON CORPORATION www.eaton.com
Figure 42. Connection Diagram for Narrow and Standard Frame with Digitrip 520 and 520M
1, 2 & 3 (NA)
4. ALL CONTACTS SHOWN WITH BREAKER IN OPEN POSITION AND WITH SPRING NOT CHARGED AND WITH TRIP UNIT IN
NON-TRIPPED STATE (OTS SWITCHES).
5. THE SPRING RELEASE ACCESSORY CONSISTS OF A SR COIL AND A P.C. BOARD. THE PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD PROVIDES
A .20 SECOND PULSE FOR THE CLOSING OPERATION. VOLTAGE MUST BE REMOVED AND THEN REAPPLIED FOR SUBSEQUENT
OPERATION. AN OPTIONAL LATCH CHECK SWITCH (LCS) ACCESSORY MAY BE CONNECTED TO THE SPRING RELEASE. THE
(CLOSED) LCS DELAYS THE SPRING RELEASE PULSE UNTIL THE BREAKER MECHANISM IS READY TO CLOSE (CHARGED AND
RESET). (THIS WILL INSURE THAT THE LATCH WILL ALWAYS BE IN THE PROPER STATE BEFORE THE SPRING RELEASE PULSE IS
INITIATED). IF VOLTAGE IS MAINTAINED TO THE SPRING RELEASE, THE CLOSING PULSE WILL OCCUR WHEN THE MECHANISM
IS CHARGED AND RESET (LCS OPEN). VOLTAGE MUST BE REMOVED AND REAPPLIED TO THE SPRING RELEASE FOR SUBSE-
QUENT OPERATION.
6. TO PROVIDE SELECTED TIME DELAYS FOR SHORT TIME AND/OR GROUND TIME FUNCTIONS FOR TESTING OR NON-ZONE
INTERLOCKING APPLICATIONS, A JUMPER FROM B-8 TO B-9 IS REQUIRED.
7. ON THREE POLE BREAKERS ONLY, HAVING GROUND FAULT FUNCTIONALITY, A JUMPER INSTALLED FROM B-6 TO B-7 WILL
ENABLE SOURCE GROUND FAULT SENSING AND DISABLE RESIDUAL GROUND FAULT SENSING. INPUTS B-4 AND B-5 WILL BE
REASSIGNED FOR SOURCE GROUND SENSOR INPUTS.
8. (NA)
Effective March 2012
Instructional Leaflet IB2C12063H03
9. MOTOR OPERATOR SWITCH SHOWN WITH BREAKER CLOSING SPRING DISCHARGED.
10. ON 4-POLE BREAKERS, THE NEUTRAL CURRENT SENSOR IS THE SAME STYLE AND WIRED THE SAME AS THE PHASE SEN-
SORS AND IS LOCATED WITHIN THE BREAKER FRAME. THE SECONDARY CONTACTS B-4, B-5, ARE NOT WIRED OUT.
11. SECOND SHUNT TRIP MAY BE INSTALLED (USING A-7, A-8 CONTACTS) IN PLACE OF UVR. THIRD AUX SWITCH NOT AVAIL-
ABLE WITH SECOND SHUNT TRIP. SHUNT TRIP MAY BE STANDARD OR CONTINUOUS DUTY TYPE. SECONDARY WIRING IS
IDENTICAL.
12. ONLY ONE LATCH CHECK SWITCH MAY BE INSTALLED. USE OF CUSTOMER ACCESSIBLE LATCH CHECK SWITCH (B-28, B-29,
B-30) IN SERIES WITH SPRING RELEASE DEFEATS ANTI-PUMP FUNCTION AND IS NOT RECOMMENDED. SEE NOTE 5 FOR SPRING
RELEASE LATCH CHECK SWITCH.
13. THESE CONTACTS ARE PROVIDED FOR DIGITRIP 520M AS OPTIONAL ACCESSORY. THE CONTACTS ARE ASSIGNED FOR
GROUND ALARM ON GROUND TRIP FUNCTION FOR LSIG TRIP STYLE. HOWEVER, FOR A LSI STYLE TRIP UNIT, THE CONTACTS
ARE ASSIGNED AS A HIGH LOAD ALARM.
14. THE OTS (OVERCURRENT TRIP SWITCHES) WILL OPERATE DIRECTLY FROM THE DIGITRIP DRIVING THE TA (TRIP ACTUATOR)
TO TRIP THE CIRCUIT BREAKER. THE STANDARD OTS REQUIRES A MANUAL LOCAL RESET VIA RED BUTTON DEPRESSON. THE
AUTO RESET OTS DOES NOT REQUIRE MANUAL RESET, AND IF SO CONFIGURED, OCCUPIES THE MAKE-COM SECONDARY
TERMINALS A-4 AND A-5.
Low Voltage Power Circuit Breakers
Maintenance of Magnum SB Insulated Case
Instructions for Installation, Operation and

Figure 43. Connection Diagram for Narrow and Standard Frame with Digitrip 520MC
1. 4 WIRE CRIMP CONNECTION
2. (NA)
3. SOCKET USED WITH DIGITRIP 520M GROUND ALARM POWER SUPPLY MODULE WILL HANG UNCONNECTED IF DIGITRIP
220 OR 520 IS SUPPLIED.
4. ALL CONTACTS SHOWN WITH BREAKER IN OPEN POSITION AND WITH SPRING NOT CHARGED AND WITH TRIP UNIT IN
NON-TRIPPED STATE (OTS SWITCHES).
5. THE SPRING RELEASE ACCESSORY CONSISTS OF A SR COIL AND A P.C. BOARD. THE PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD PROVIDES
A .20 SECOND PULSE FOR THE CLOSING OPERATION. VOLTAGE MUST BE REMOVED AND THEN REAPPLIED FOR SUBSEQUENT
OPERATION. AN OPTIONAL LATCH CHECK SWITCH (LCS) ACCESSORY MAY BE CONNECTED TO THE SPRING RELEASE. THE
EATON CORPORATION www.eaton.com
(CLOSED) LCS DELAYS THE SPRING RELEASE PULSE UNTIL THE BREAKER MECHANISM IS READY TO CLOSE (CHARGED AND
RESET). (THIS WILL INSURE THAT THE LATCH WILL ALWAYS BE IN THE PROPER STATE BEFORE THE SPRING RELEASE PULSE IS
INITIATED). IF VOLTAGE IS MAINTAINED TO THE SPRING RELEASE, THE CLOSING PULSE WILL OCCUR WHEN THE MECHANISM
IS CHARGED AND RESET (LCS OPEN). VOLTAGE MUST BE REMOVED AND REAPPLIED TO THE SPRING RELEASE FOR SUBSE-
QUENT OPERATION.
6. TO PROVIDE SELECTED TIME DELAYS FOR SHORT TIME AND/OR GROUND TIME FUNCTIONS FOR TESTING OR NON-ZONE
INTERLOCKING APPLICATIONS, A JUMPER FROM B-8 TO B-9 IS REQUIRED.
7. ON THREE POLE BREAKERS ONLY, HAVING GROUND FAULT FUNCTIONALITY, A JUMPER INSTALLED FROM B-6 TO B-7 WILL
ENABLE SOURCE GROUND FAULT SENSING AND DISABLE RESIDUAL GROUND FAULT SENSING. INPUTS B-4 AND B-5 WILL BE
REASSIGNED FOR SOURCE GROUND SENSOR INPUTS.
31
Low Voltage Power Circuit Breakers
Instructions for Installation, Operation and
Maintenance of Magnum SB Insulated Case
8. (NA)
9. MOTOR OPERATOR SWITCH SHOWN WITH BREAKER CLOSING SPRING DISCHARGED.
10. ON 4-POLE BREAKERS, THE NEUTRAL CURRENT SENSOR IS THE SAME STYLE AND WIRED THE SAME AS THE PHASE SEN-
SORS AND IS LOCATED WITHIN THE BREAKER FRAME. THE SECONDARY CONTACTS B-4, B-5, ARE NOT WIRED OUT.
11. SECOND SHUNT TRIP MAY BE INSTALLED (USING A-7, A-8 CONTACTS) IN PLACE OF UVR. THIRD AUX SWITCH NOT AVAIL-
ABLE WITH SECOND SHUNT TRIP. SHUNT TRIP MAY BE STANDARD OR CONTINUOUS DUTY TYPE. SECONDARY WIRING IS
IDENTICAL.
12. ONLY ONE LATCH CHECK SWITCH MAY BE INSTALLED. USE OF CUSTOMER ACCESSIBLE LATCH CHECK SWITCH (B-28, B-29,
B-30) IN SERIES WITH SPRING RELEASE DEFEATS ANTI-PUMP FUNCTION AND IS NOT RECOMMENDED. SEE NOTE 5 FOR SPRING
RELEASE LATCH CHECK SWITCH.
13. THESE CONTACTS ARE PROVIDED FOR DIGITRIP 520MC AS STANDARD OR 520M AS OPTIONAL ACCESSORY. THE CONTACTS
ARE ASSIGNED FOR GROUND ALARM ON GROUND TRIP FUNCTION FOR LSIG TRIP STYLE. HOWEVER, FOR A LSI STYLE TRIP UNIT,
THE CONTACTS ARE ASSIGNED AS A HIGH LOAD ALARM.
14. THE OTS (OVERCURRENT TRIP SWITCHES) WILL OPERATE DIRECTLY FROM THE DIGITRIP DRIVING THE TA (TRIP ACTUATOR)
TO TRIP THE CIRCUIT BREAKER. THE STANDARD OTS REQUIRES A MANUAL LOCAL RESET VIA RED BUTTON DEPRESSION. THE
AUTO RESET OTS DOES NOT REQUIRED MANUAL RESET, AND IF SO CONFIGURED, OCCUPIES THE MAKE-COM SECONDARY
TERMINALS A-4 AND A-5.
15. CONNECTING A-12 TO B-7 VIA A REMOTE MAINTENANCE MODE SWITCH (GOLD CONTACTS) WILL ALSO ACTIVATE RELAY
CONTACT A-9.
Effective March 2012
Instructional Leaflet IB2C12063H03
32
EATON CORPORATION www.eaton.com
Figure 44. Connection Diagram for Narrow and Standard Frame with Digitrip 1150
1. (NA)
2. ALL CONTACTS SHOWN WITH BREAKER IN OPEN POSITION AND WITH TRIP UNIT IN NON-TRIPPED STATE (OTS SWITCHES)
AND SPRINGS NOT CHARGED.
3. THE SPRING RELEASE ACCESSORY CONSISTS OF A SR COIL AND A P.C. BOARD. THE PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD PROVIDES
A .20 SECOND PULSE FOR THE CLOSING OPERATION. VOLTAGE MUST BE REMOVED AND THEN REAPPLIED FOR SUBSEQUENT
OPERATION. AN OPTIONAL LATCH CHECK SWITCH (LCS) ACCESSORY MAY BE CONNECTED TO THE SPRING RELEASE. THE
(CLOSED) LCS DELAYS THE SPRING RELEASE PULSE UNTIL THE BREAKER MECHANISM IS READY TO CLOSE (CHARGED AND
RESET). (THIS WILL INSURE THAT THE LATCH WILL ALWAYS BE IN THE PROPER STATE BEFORE THE SPRING RELEASE PULSE IS
INITIATED). IF VOLTAGE IS MAINTAINED TO THE SPRING RELEASE, THE CLOSING PULSE WILL OCCUR WHEN THE MECHANISM
IS CHARGED AND RESET (LCS OPEN). VOLTAGE MUST BE REMOVED AND REAPPLIED TO THE SPRING RELEASE FOR SUBSE-
QUENT OPERATION.
4. TO PROVIDE SELECTED TIME DELAYS FOR SHORT TIME AND/OR GROUND TIME FUNCTIONS FOR TESTING OR NON-ZONE
INTERLOCKING APPLICATIONS, A JUMPER FROM B-8 TO B-9 IS REQUIRED.
5. ON THREE POLE BREAKERS ONLY, HAVING GROUND FAULT FUNCTIONALITY, A JUMPER INSTALLED FROM B-6 TO B-7 WILL
ENABLE SOURCE GROUND FAULT SENSING AND DISABLE RESIDUAL GROUND FAULT SENSING. INPUTS B-4 AND B-5 WILL BE
REASSIGNED FOR SOURCE GROUND SENSOR INPUTS.
Effective March 2012
Instructional Leaflet IB2C12063H03
6. NORMALLY OPENED CONTACT PROGRAMMED AS RELAY A. VIA DIGITRIP FRONT PANEL. (ALARM CONTACT). THIS CAN ALSO
BE ASSIGNED TO INDICATE MAINTENANCE MODE FEATURE IS IN USED.
7. NORMALLY CLOSED CONTACT PROGRAMMED AS RELAY B. VIA DIGITRIP FRONT PANEL. (BLOCK CLOSE CONTACT)
8. NORMALLY OPEN CONTACT PROGRAMMED AS RELAY C. VIA DIGITRIP FRONT PANEL. (LATCHING CONTACT)
9. (NA)
10. MOTOR OPERATOR SWITCH SHOWN WITH BREAKER CLOSING SPRING DISCHARGED.
11. ON 4-POLE BREAKERS, THE NEUTRAL CURRENT SENSOR IS THE SAME STYLE AND WIRED THE SAME AS THE PHASE SEN-
SORS AND IS LOCATED WITHIN THE BREAKER FRAME. THE SECONDARY CONTACTS B-4, B-5, ARE NOT WIRED OUT.
12. FOUR POINT SOCKET USED HERE.
13. SECOND SHUNT TRIP MAY BE INSTALLED (USING A-7, A-8 CONTACTS) IN PLACE OF UVR. THIRD AUX SWITCH NOT AVAIL-
ABLE WITH SECOND SHUNT TRIP.
14. ONLY ONE LATCH CHECK SWITCH MAY BE INSTALLED. USE OF CUSTOMER ACCESSIBLE LATCH CHECK SWITCH (B-29, B-30)
IN SERIES WITH SPRING RELEASE DEFEATS ANTI-PUMP FUNCTION AND IS NOT RECOMMENDED. SEE NOTE 3 FOR SPRING
RELEASE LATCH CHECK SWITCH.
15. THE OTS (OVERCURRENT TRIP SWITCHES) WILL OPERATE DIRECTLY FROM THE DIGITRIP DRIVING THE TA (TRIP ACTUATOR)
TO TRIP THE CIRCUIT BREAKER. THE OTS REQUIRES A MANUAL LOCAL RESET VIA RED BUTTON DEPRESSION.
Low Voltage Power Circuit Breakers
Maintenance of Magnum SB Insulated Case
Instructions for Installation, Operation and

Figure 45. Connection Diagram for Standard SBSE Frame with Digitrip 520 and 520M
1. 4 WIRE CRIMP CONNECTION.
2. 3 WIRE CRIMP IF HIGH INST TRIP MODULE IS SUPPLIED.
3. SOCKET USED WITH DIGITRIP 520M GROUND ALARM POWER SUPPLY MODULE WILL HANG UNCONNECTED IF DIGITRIP
220 OR 520 IS SUPPLIED.
4. ALL CONTACTS SHOWN WITH BREAKER IN OPEN POSITION AND WITH SPRING NOT CHARGED AND WITH TRIP UNIT IN
NON-TRIPPED STATE (OTS SWITCHES).
5. THE SPRING RELEASE ACCESSORY CONSISTS OF A SR COIL AND A P.C. BOARD. THE PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD PROVIDES
A .20 SECOND PULSE FOR THE CLOSING OPERATION. VOLTAGE MUST BE REMOVED AND THEN REAPPLIED FOR SUBSEQUENT
EATON CORPORATION www.eaton.com
OPERATION. AN OPTIONAL LATCH CHECK SWITCH (LCS) ACCESSORY MAY BE CONNECTED TO THE SPRING RELEASE. THE
(CLOSED) LCS DELAYS THE SPRING RELEASE PULSE UNTIL THE BREAKER MECHANISM IS READY TO CLOSE (CHARGED AND
RESET). (THIS WILL INSURE THAT THE LATCH WILL ALWAYS BE IN THE PROPER STATE BEFORE THE SPRING RELEASE PULSE IS
INITIATED). IF VOLTAGE IS MAINTAINED TO THE SPRING RELEASE, THE CLOSING PULSE WILL OCCUR WHEN THE MECHANISM
IS CHARGED AND RESET (LCS OPEN). VOLTAGE MUST BE REMOVED AND REAPPLIED TO THE SPRING RELEASE FOR SUBSE-
QUENT OPERATION.
6. TO PROVIDE SELECTED TIME DELAYS FOR SHORT TIME AND/OR GROUND TIME FUNCTIONS FOR TESTING OR NON-ZONE
INTERLOCKING APPLICATIONS, A JUMPER FROM B-8 TO B-9 IS REQUIRED.
7. ON THREE POLE BREAKERS ONLY, HAVING GROUND FAULT FUNCTIONALITY, A JUMPER INSTALLED FROM B-6 TO B-7
WILL ENABLE SOURCE GROUND FAULT SENSING AND DISABLE RESIDUAL GROUND FAULT SENSING. INPUTS B-4 AND B-5 WILL
BE REASSIGNED FOR SOURCE GROUND SENSOR INPUTS.
33
Low Voltage Power Circuit Breakers
Instructions for Installation, Operation and
Maintenance of Magnum SB Insulated Case
8. THIS LEAD SUPPLIED ON G62 STYLE HIGH INSTANTANEOUS TRIP MODULE ONLY.
9. MOTOR OPERATOR SWITCH SHOWN WITH BREAKER CLOSING SPRING DISCHARGED.
10. ON 4-POLE BREAKERS, THE NEUTRAL CURRENT SENSOR IS THE SAME STYLE AND WIRED THE SAME AS THE PHASE SEN-
SORS AND IS LOCATED WITHIN THE BREAKER FRAME. THE SECONDARY CONTACTS B-4, B-5, ARE NOT WIRED OUT.
11. SECOND SHUNT TRIP MAY BE INSTALLED (USING A-7, A-8 CONTACTS) IN PLACE OF UVR. THIRD AUX SWITCH NOT AVAIL-
ABLE WITH SECOND SHUNT TRIP. SHUNT TRIP MAY BE STANDARD OR CONTINUOUS DUTY TYPE. SECONDARY WIRING IS
IDENTICAL.
12. ONLY ONE LATCH CHECK SWITCH MAY BE INSTALLED. USE OF CUSTOMER ACCESSIBLE LATCH CHECK SWITCH (B-29, B-30)
IN SERIES WITH SPRING RELEASE DEFEATS ANTI-PUMP FUNCTION AND IS NOT RECOMMENDED. SEE NOTE 5 FOR SPRING
RELEASE LATCH CHECK SWITCH.
13. THESE CONTACTS ARE PROVIDED FOR DIGITRIP 520MC STANDARD OR 520M AS OPTIONAL ACCESSORY. THE CONTACTS
ARE ASSIGNED FOR GROUND ALARM ON GROUND TRIP FUNCTION FOR LSIG TRIP STYLE. HOWEVER, FOR A LSI STYLE TRIP UNIT,
THE CONTACTS ARE ASSIGNED AS A HIGH LOAD ALARM.
14. THE OTS (OVERCURRENT TRIP SWITCHES) WILL OPERATE DIRECTLY FROM THE DIGITRIP DRIVING THE TA (TRIP ACTUATOR)
TO TRIP THE CIRCUIT BREAKER. THE STANDARD OTS REQUIRES A MANUAL LOCAL RESET VIA RED BUTTON DEPRESSON. THE
AUTO RESET OTS DOES NOT REQUIRE MANUAL RESET, AND IF SO CONFIGURED, OCCUPIES THE MAKE-COM SECONDARY
TERMINALS A-4 AND A-5.
Effective March 2012
Instructional Leaflet IB2C12063H03
34
EATON CORPORATION www.eaton.com
Figure 46. Connection Diagram for Standard SBSE Frame with Digitrip 520MC
1. 4 WIRE CRIMP CONNECTION
2. 3 WIRE CRIMP IF HIGH INST. TRIP MODULE IS SUPPLIED.
3. SOCKET USED WITH DIGITRIP 520M GROUND ALARM POWER SUPPLY MODULE WILL HANG UNCONNECTED IF DIGITRIP
220 OR 520 IS SUPPLIED.
4. ALL CONTACTS SHOWN WITH BREAKER IN OPEN POSITION AND WITH SPRING NOT CHARGED AND WITH TRIP UNIT IN
NON-TRIPPED STATE (OTS SWITCHES).
5. THE SPRING RELEASE ACCESSORY CONSISTS OF A SR COIL AND A P.C. BOARD. THE PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD PROVIDES
A .20 SECOND PULSE FOR THE CLOSING OPERATION. VOLTAGE MUST BE REMOVED AND THEN REAPPLIED FOR SUBSEQUENT
OPERATION. AN OPTIONAL LATCH CHECK SWITCH (LCS) ACCESSORY MAY BE CONNECTED TO THE SPRING RELEASE. THE
(CLOSED) LCS DELAYS THE SPRING RELEASE PULSE UNTIL THE BREAKER MECHANISM IS READY TO CLOSE (CHARGED AND
RESET). (THIS WILL INSURE THAT THE LATCH WILL ALWAYS BE IN THE PROPER STATE BEFORE THE SPRING RELEASE PULSE IS
INITIATED). IF VOLTAGE IS MAINTAINED TO THE SPRING RELEASE, THE CLOSING PULSE WILL OCCUR WHEN THE MECHANISM
IS CHARGED AND RESET (LCS OPEN). VOLTAGE MUST BE REMOVED AND REAPPLIED TO THE SPRING RELEASE FOR SUBSE-
QUENT OPERATION.
6. TO PROVIDE SELECTED TIME DELAYS FOR SHORT TIME AND/OR GROUND TIME FUNCTIONS FOR TESTING OR NON-ZONE
INTERLOCKING APPLICATIONS, A JUMPER FROM B-8 TO B-9 IS REQUIRED.
7. ON THREE POLE BREAKERS ONLY, HAVING GROUND FAULT FUNCTIONALITY, A JUMPER INSTALLED FROM B-6 TO B-7 WILL
ENABLE SOURCE GROUND FAULT SENSING AND DISABLE RESIDUAL GROUND FAULT SENSING. INPUTS B-4 AND B-5 WILL BE
Effective March 2012
Instructional Leaflet IB2C12063H03
REASSIGNED FOR SOURCE GROUND SENSOR INPUTS.
8. THIS LEAD SUPPLIED ON G62 STYLE HIGH INSTANTANEOUS TRIP MODULE ONLY.
9. MOTOR OPERATOR SWITCH SHOWN WITH BREAKER CLOSING SPRING DISCHARGED.
10. ON 4-POLE BREAKERS, THE NEUTRAL CURRENT SENSOR IS THE SAME STYLE AND WIRED THE SAME AS THE PHASE SENSORS
AND IS LOCATED WITHIN THE BREAKER FRAME. THE SECONDARY CONTACTS B-4, B-5, ARE NOT WIRED OUT.
11. SECOND SHUNT TRIP MAY BE INSTALLED (USING A-7, A-8 CONTACTS) IN PLACE OF UVR. THIRD AUX SWITCH NOT AVAILABLE
WITH SECOND SHUNT TRIP. SHUNT TRIP MAY BE STANDARD OR CONTINUOUS DUTY TYPE. SECONDARY WIRING IS IDENTICAL.
12. ONLY ONE LATCH CHECK SWITCH MAY BE INSTALLED. USE OF CUSTOMER ACCESSIBLE LATCH CHECK SWITCH (B-28, B-29,
B-30) IN SERIES WITH SPRING RELEASE DEFEATS ANTI-PUMP FUNCTION AND IS NOT RECOMMENDED. SEE NOTE 5 FOR SPRING
RELEASE LATCH CHECK SWITCH.
13. THESE CONTACTS ARE PROVIDED FOR DIGITRIP 520MC AS STANDARD OR 520M AS OPTIONAL ACCESSORY. THE CONTACTS
ARE ASSIGNED FOR GROUND ALARM ON GROUND TRIP FUNCTION FOR LSIG TRIP STYLE. HOWEVER, FOR A LSI STYLE TRIP UNIT,
THE CONTACTS ARE ASSIGNED AS A HIGH LOAD ALARM.
14. THE OTS (OVERCURRENT TRIP SWITCHES) WILL OPERATE DIRECTLY FROM THE DIGITRIP DRIVING THE TA (TRIP ACTUATOR) TO
TRIP THE CIRCUIT BREAKER. THE OTS REQUIRES A MANUAL LOCAL RESET VIA RED BUTTON DEPRESSION. THE AUTO RESET OTS
DOES NOT REQUIRE MANUAL RESET, AND IF SO CONFIGURED, OCCUPIES THE MAKE-COM SECONDARY TERMINALS A-4 AND A-5.
15. CONNECTING A-12 TO B-7 VIA A REMOTE MAINTENANCE MODE SWITCH (GOLD CONTACTS) WILL ALSO ACTIVATE RELAY A-9.
Low Voltage Power Circuit Breakers
Maintenance of Magnum SB Insulated Case
Instructions for Installation, Operation and

Figure 47. Connection Diagram for Standard SBSE Frame with Digitrip 1150
1. 3 WIRE CRIMP IF HIGH INST. TRIP MODULE IS SUPPLIED.
2. ALL CONTACTS SHOWN WITH BREAKER IN OPEN POSITION AND WITH TRIP UNIT IN NON-TRIPPED STATE (OTS SWITCHES)
AND SPRINGS NOT CHARGED.
3. THE SPRING RELEASE ACCESSORY CONSISTS OF A SR COIL AND A P.C. BOARD. THE PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD PROVIDES
A .20 SECOND PULSE FOR THE CLOSING OPERATION. VOLTAGE MUST BE REMOVED AND THEN REAPPLIED FOR SUBSEQUENT
OPERATION. AN OPTIONAL LATCH CHECK SWITCH (LCS) ACCESSORY MAY BE CONNECTED TO THE SPRING RELEASE. THE
EATON CORPORATION www.eaton.com
(CLOSED) LCS DELAYS THE SPRING RELEASE PULSE UNTIL THE BREAKER MECHANISM IS READY TO CLOSE (CHARGED AND
RESET). (THIS WILL INSURE THAT THE LATCH WILL ALWAYS BE IN THE PROPER STATE BEFORE THE SPRING RELEASE PULSE IS
INITIATED). IF VOLTAGE IS MAINTAINED TO THE SPRING RELEASE, THE CLOSING PULSE WILL OCCUR WHEN THE MECHANISM
IS CHARGED AND RESET (LCS OPEN). VOLTAGE MUST BE REMOVED AND REAPPLIED TO THE SPRING RELEASE FOR SUBSE-
QUENT OPERATION.
4. TO PROVIDE SELECTED TIME DELAYS FOR SHORT TIME AND/OR GROUND TIME FUNCTIONS FOR TESTING OR NON-ZONE
INTERLOCKING APPLICATIONS, A JUMPER FROM B-8 TO B-9 IS REQUIRED.
5. ON THREE POLE BREAKERS ONLY, HAVING GROUND FAULT FUNCTIONALITY, A JUMPER INSTALLED FROM B-6 TO B-7 WILL
ENABLE SOURCE GROUND FAULT SENSING AND DISABLE RESIDUAL GROUND FAULT SENSING. INPUTS B-4 AND B-5 WILL BE
REASSIGNED FOR SOURCE GROUND SENSOR INPUTS.
6. NORMALLY OPENED CONTACT PROGRAMMED AS RELAY A VIA DIGITRIP FRONT PANEL. (ALARM CONTACT). THIS CAN ALSO
35
Low Voltage Power Circuit Breakers
Instructions for Installation, Operation and
Maintenance of Magnum SB Insulated Case
BE ASSIGNED TO INDICATE MAINTENANCE MODE FEATURE IS IN USED.
7. NORMALLY CLOSED CONTACT PROGRAMMED AS RELAY B VIA DIGITRIP FRONT PANEL. (BLOCK CLOSE CONTACT)
8. NORMALLY OPEN CONTACT PROGRAMMED AS RELAY C VIA DIGITRIP FRONT PANEL. (LATCHING CONTACT)
9.THIS LEAD SUPPLIED ON G62 STYLE HIGH INSTANTANEOUS TRIP MODULE ONLY.
10. MOTOR OPERATOR SWITCH SHOWN WITH BREAKER CLOSING SPRING DISCHARGED.
11. ON 4-POLE BREAKERS, THE NEUTRAL CURRENT SENSOR IS THE SAME STYLE AND WIRED THE SAME AS THE PHASE SENSORS
AND IS LOCATED WITHIN THE BREAKER FRAME. THE SECONDARY CONTACTS B-4, B-5, ARE NOT WIRED OUT.
12. FOUR POINT SOCKET USED HERE.
13. SECOND SHUNT TRIP MAY BE INSTALLED (USING A-7, A-8 CONTACTS) IN PLACE OF UVR. THIRD AUX SWITCH NOT AVAILABLE
WITH SECOND SHUNT TRIP.
14. ONLY ONE LATCH CHECK SWITCH MAY BE INSTALLED. USE OF CUSTOMER ACCESSIBLE LATCH CHECK SWITCH (B-29, B-30) IN
SERIES WITH SPRING RELEASE DEFEATS ANTI-PUMP FUNCTION AND IS NOT RECOMMENDED. SEE NOTE 3 FOR SPRING RELEASE
LATCH CHECK SWITCH.
15. THE OTS (OVERCURRENT TRIP SWITCHES) WILL OPERATE DIRECTLY FROM THE DIGITRIP DRIVING THE TA (TRIP ACTUATOR) TO
TRIP THE CIRCUIT BREAKER. THE OTS REQUIRES A MANUAL LOCAL RESET VIA RED BUTTON DEPRESSION.
16. FOR CIRCUIT BREAKERS BUILT AFTER JULY 2006 AND DITRIP 1150 UNITS OF FIRMWARE REV 20decimal OR GREATER, THE
MAINTENANCE MODE FEATURE (ARMS) IS SUPPLIED. THE REVERSE POWER DESELECTION IS FRONT PANEL PROGRAMMABLE ONLY.
Effective March 2012
Instructional Leaflet IB2C12063H03
36
EATON CORPORATION www.eaton.com
1. 4 WIRE CRIMP CONNECTION
2. 3 WIRE CRIMP IF HIGH INST TRIP MODULE IS SUPPLIED.
3. SOCKET USED WITH DIGITRIP 520M GROUND ALARM POWER SUPPLY MODULE WILL HANG UNCONNECTED IF DIGITRIP
220 OR 520 IS SUPPLIED.
4. ALL CONTACTS SHOWN WITH BREAKER IN OPEN POSITION AND WITH SPRING NOT CHARGED AND WITH TRIP UNIT IN
NON-TRIPPED STATE (OTS SWITCHES).
5. THE SPRING RELEASE ACCESSORY CONSISTS OF A SR COIL AND A P.C. BOARD. THE PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD PROVIDES
A .20 SECOND PULSE FOR THE CLOSING OPERATION. VOLTAGE MUST BE REMOVED AND THEN REAPPLIED FOR SUBSEQUENT
OPERATION. AN OPTIONAL SR-LATCH CHECK SWITCH (LCS) ACCESSORY MAY BE CONNECTED TO THE SPRING RELEASE. THE
(CLOSED) LCS DELAYS THE SPRING RELEASE PULSE UNTIL THE BREAKER MECHANISM IS READY TO CLOSE (CHARGED AND
RESET). (THIS WILL INSURE THAT THE LATCH WILL ALWAYS BE IN THE PROPER STATE BEFORE THE SPRING RELEASE PULSE IS
INITIATED). IF VOLTAGE IS MAINTAINED TO THE SPRING RELEASE, THE CLOSING PULSE WILL OCCUR WHEN THE MECHANISM
IS CHARGED AND RESET (LCS OPEN). VOLTAGE MUST BE REMOVED AND REAPPLIED TO THE SPRING RELEASE FOR SUBSE-
Figure 48. Connection Diagram for Double-wide Frame (except SBSE) with Digitrip 520 and 520M with ABCABC Configuration
QUENT OPERATION.
6. TO PROVIDE SELECTED TIME DELAYS FOR SHORT TIME AND/OR GROUND TIME FUNCTIONS FOR TESTING OR NON-ZONE
INTERLOCKING APPLICATIONS, A JUMPER FROM B-8 TO B-9 IS REQUIRED.
7. ON THREE POLE BREAKERS ONLY, HAVING GROUND FAULT FUNCTIONALITY, A JUMPER INSTALLED FROM B-6 TO B-7 WILL
ENABLE SOURCE GROUND FAULT SENSING AND DISABLE RESIDUAL GROUND FAULT SENSING. INPUTS B-4 AND B-5 WILL BE
Effective March 2012
Instructional Leaflet IB2C12063H03
REASSIGNED FOR SOURCE GROUND SENSOR INPUTS.
8. THIS LEAD SUPPLIED ON G62 STYLE HIGH INSTANTANEOUS TRIP MODULE ONLY.
9. MOTOR OPERATOR SWITCH SHOWN WITH BREAKER CLOSING SPRING DISCHARGED.
10. ON 4-POLE BREAKERS, THE NEUTRAL CURRENT SENSOR IS THE SAME STYLE AND WIRED THE SAME AS THE PHASE SENSORS
AND IS LOCATED WITHIN THE BREAKER FRAME. THE SECONDARY CONTACTS B-4, B-5, ARE NOT WIRED OUT.
11. SECOND SHUNT TRIP MAY BE INSTALLED (USING A-7, A-8 CONTACTS) IN PLACE OF UVR. THIRD AUX SWITCH NOT AVAILABLE
WITH SECOND SHUNT TRIP. SHUNT TRIP MAY BE STANDARD OR CONTINUOUS DUTY TYPE. SECONDARY WIRING IS IDENTICAL.
12. ONLY ONE LATCH CHECK SWITCH MAY BE INSTALLED. USE OF CUSTOMER ACCESSIBLE LATCH CHECK SWITCH (B-29, B-30) IN
SERIES WITH SPRING RELEASE DEFEATS ANTI-PUMP FUNCTION AND IS NOT RECOMMENDED. SEE NOTE 3 FOR SPRING RELEASE
LATCH CHECK SWITCH.
13. THESE CONTACTS ARE PROVIDED FOR DIGITRIP 520MC AS STANDARD OR 520M AS OPTIONAL ACCESSORY. THE CONTACTS
ARE ASSIGNED FOR GROUND ALARM OR GROUND TRIP FUNCTIONS FOR LSIG TRIP STYLE. HOWEVER FOR A LSI STYLE TRIP UNIT,
THE CONTACTS ARE ASSIGNED AS A HIGH LOAD ALARM.
14. THE OTS (OVERCURRENT TRIP SWITCHES) WILL OPERATE DIRECTLY FROM THE DIGITRIP DRIVING THE TA (TRIP ACTUATOR) TO
TRIP THE CIRCUIT BREAKER. THE OTS REQUIRES A MANUAL LOCAL RESET VIA RED BUTTON DEPRESSION. THE AUTO RESET OTS
DOES NOT REQUIRE MANUAL RESET, AND IF SO CONFIGURED, OCCUPIES THE MAKE-COM SECONDARY TERMINALS A-4 AND A-5.
15. THE HIGH INSTANTANEOUS MODULE IS SUPPLIED ON MDSX/SPSE BREAKERS AND IS OPTIONAL ON OTHERS. THE MODULE
PROVIDES 50KA HIGH INSTANTANEOUS TRIP.
Low Voltage Power Circuit Breakers
Maintenance of Magnum SB Insulated Case
Instructions for Installation, Operation and

1. 4 WIRE CRIMP CONNECTION
2. 3 WIRE CRIMPIF HIGH INST. TRIP MODULE IS SUPPLIED.
3. SOCKET USED WITH DIGITRIP 520M GROUND ALARM POWER SUPPLY MODULE WILL HANG UNCONNECTED IF DIGITRIP
220 OR 520 IS SUPPLIED.
4. ALL CONTACTS SHOWN WITH BREAKER IN OPEN POSITION AND WITH SPRING NOT CHARGED AND WITH TRIP UNIT IN
NON-TRIPPED STATE (OTS SWITCHES).
5. THE SPRING RELEASE ACCESSORY CONSISTS OF A SR COIL AND A P.C. BOARD. THE PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD PROVIDES
A .20 SECOND PULSE FOR THE CLOSING OPERATION. VOLTAGE MUST BE REMOVED AND THEN REAPPLIED FOR SUBSEQUENT
EATON CORPORATION www.eaton.com
OPERATION. AN OPTIONAL SR-LATCH CHECK SWITCH (LCS) ACCESSORY MAY BE CONNECTED TO THE SPRING RELEASE. THE
Figure 49. Connection Diagram for Double-wide Frame (except SBSE) with Digitrip 520MC with ABCABC Configuration
(CLOSED) LCS DELAYS THE SPRING RELEASE PULSE UNTIL THE BREAKER MECHANISM IS READY TO CLOSE (CHARGED AND
RESET). (THIS WILL INSURE THAT THE LATCH WILL ALWAYS BE IN THE PROPER STATE BEFORE THE SPRING RELEASE PULSE IS
INITIATED). IF VOLTAGE IS MAINTAINED TO THE SPRING RELEASE, THE CLOSING PULSE WILL OCCUR WHEN THE MECHANISM
IS CHARGED AND RESET (LCS OPEN). VOLTAGE MUST BE REMOVED AND REAPPLIED TO THE SPRING RELEASE FOR SUBSE-
QUENT OPERATION.
6. TO PROVIDE SELECTED TIME DELAYS FOR SHORT TIME AND/OR GROUND TIME FUNCTIONS FOR TESTING OR NON-ZONE
INTERLOCKING APPLICATIONS, A JUMPER FROM B-8 TO B-9 IS REQUIRED.
7. ON THREE POLE BREAKERS ONLY, HAVING GROUND FAULT FUNCTIONALITY, A JUMPER INSTALLED FROM B-6 TO B-7 WILL
ENABLE SOURCE GROUND FAULT SENSING AND DISABLE RESIDUAL GROUND FAULT SENSING. INPUTS B-4 AND B-5 WILL BE
REASSIGNED FOR SOURCE GROUND SENSOR INPUTS.
37
Low Voltage Power Circuit Breakers
Instructions for Installation, Operation and
Maintenance of Magnum SB Insulated Case
8. THIS LEAD SUPPLIED ON G62 STYLE HIGH INSTANTANEOUS TRIP MODULE ONLY.
9. MOTOR OPERATOR SWITCH SHOWN WITH BREAKER CLOSING SPRING DISCHARGED.
10. ON 4-POLE BREAKERS, THE NEUTRAL CURRENT SENSOR IS THE SAME STYLE AND WIRED THE SAME AS THE PHASE SENSORS
AND IS LOCATED WITHIN THE BREAKER FRAME. THE SECONDARY CONTACTS B-4, B-5, ARE NOT WIRED OUT.
11. SECOND SHUNT TRIP MAY BE INSTALLED (USING A-7, A-8 CONTACTS) IN PLACE OF UVR. THIRD AUX SWITCH NOT AVAILABLE
WITH SECOND SHUNT TRIP. SHUNT TRIP MAY BE STANDARD OR CONTINUOUS DUTY TYPE. SECONDARY WIRING IS IDENTICAL.
12. ONLY ONE LATCH CHECK SWITCH MAY BE INSTALLED. USE OF CUSTOMER ACCESSIBLE LATCH CHECK SWITCH (B-29, B-30) IN
SERIES WITH SPRING RELEASE DEFEATS ANTI-PUMP FUNCTION AND IS NOT RECOMMENDED. SEE NOTE 5 FOR SPRING RELEASE
LATCH CHECK SWITCH.
13. THESE CONTACTS ARE PROVIDED FOR DIGITRIP 520MC AS STANDARD. THE CONTACTS ARE ASSIGNED FOR GROUND ALARM
ON GROUND TRIP FUNCTIONS FOR LSIG TRIP STYLE. HOWEVER, FOR A LSI STYLE TRIP UNIT, THE CONTACTS ARE ASSIGNED AS A
HIGH LOAD ALARM.
14. THE OTS (OVERCURRENT TRIP SWITCHES) WILL OPERATE DIRECTLY FROM THE DIGITRIP DRIVING THE TA (TRIP ACTUATOR) TO
TRIP THE CIRCUIT BREAKER. THE OTS REQUIRES A MANUAL LOCAL RESET VIA RED BUTTON DEPRESSION. THE AUTO RESET OTS
DOES NOT REQUIRE MANUAL RESET, AND IF SO CONFIGURED, OCCUPIES THE MAKE-COM SECONDARY TERMINALS A-4 AND A-5.
15. CONNECTING A-12 TO B-7 VIA A REMOTE MAINTENANCE MODE SWITCH (GOLD CONTACTS) WILL ALSO ACTIVATE RELAY
CONTACT A-9.
16. THE HIGH INSTANTANEOUS MODULE IS SUPPLIED ON MDSX/SPSE BREAKERS AND IS OPTIONAL ON OTHERS. THE MODULE
PROVIDES 50KA HIGH INSTANTANEOUS TRIP.
Effective March 2012
Instructional Leaflet IB2C12063H03
38
EATON CORPORATION www.eaton.com
1. ON THREE POLE BREAKERS ONLY (NOT EIGHT PHYSICAL POLES), HAVING GROUND FAULT FUNCTIONALITY, A JUMPER
INSTALLED FROM B-6 TO B-7 WILL ENABLE SOURCE GROUND FAULT SENSING AND DISABLE RESIDUAL GROUND FAULT SENS-
ING. INPUTS B-4 AND B-5 WILL BE REASSIGNED FOR SOURCE GROUND SENSOR INPUTS.
2. ALL CONTACTS SHOWN WITH BREAKER IN OPEN POSITION AND WITH TRIP UNIT IN NON-TRIPPED STATE (OTS SWITCHES)
AND SPRING NOT CHARGED.
3. THE SPRING RELEASE ACCESSORY CONSISTS OF A SR COIL AND A P.C. BOARD. THE PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD PROVIDES
A .20 SECOND PULSE FOR THE CLOSING OPERATION. VOLTAGE MUST BE REMOVED AND THEN REAPPLIED FOR SUBSEQUENT
OPERATION. AN OPTIONAL SR-LATCH CHECK SWITCH (LCS) ACCESSORY MAY BE CONNECTED TO THE SPRING RELEASE. THE
Figure 50. Connection Diagram for Double-wide Frame (except SBSE) with Digitrip 1150 with ABCABC Configuration
(CLOSED) LCS DELAYS THE SPRING RELEASE PULSE UNTIL THE BREAKER MECHANISM IS READY TO CLOSE (CHARGED AND
RESET). (THIS WILL INSURE THAT THE LATCH WILL ALWAYS BE IN THE PROPER STATE BEFORE THE SPRING RELEASE PULSE IS
INITIATED). IF VOLTAGE IS MAINTAINED TO THE SPRING RELEASE, THE CLOSING PULSE WILL OCCUR WHEN THE MECHANISM
IS CHARGED AND RESET (LCS OPEN). VOLTAGE MUST BE REMOVED AND REAPPLIED TO THE SPRING RELEASE FOR SUBSE-
QUENT OPERATION.
4. TO PROVIDE SELECTED TIME DELAYS FOR SHORT TIME AND/OR GROUND TIME FUNCTIONS FOR TESTING OR NON-ZONE
INTERLOCKING APPLICATIONS, A JUMPER FROM B-8 TO B-9 IS REQUIRED.
5. 3 WIRE CRIMP IF HIGH INST TRIP MODULE IS SUPPLIED.
6. NORMALLY OPENED CONTACT PROGRAMMED AS RELAY A. VIA DIGITRIP FRONT PANEL. (ALARM CONTACT). THIS CAN ALSO
BE ASSIGNED TO INDICATE MAINTENANCE MODE FEATURE IN USE.
7. NORMALLY CLOSED CONTACT PROGRAMMED AS RELAY B. VIA DIGITRIP FRONT PANEL. (BLOCK CLOSE CONTACT)
Effective March 2012
Instructional Leaflet IB2C12063H03
8. NORMALLY OPEN CONTACT PROGRAMMED AS RELAY C. VIA DIGITRIP FRONT PANEL. (LATCHING CONTACT)
9. ON 4-POLE BREAKERS (ACTUALLY 8 PHYSICAL POLES), THE NEUTRAL CURRENT SENSORS ARE LOCATED WITHIN THE BREAKER
FRAME. THE SECONDARY CONTACTS B-4, B-5, ARE NOT WIRED OUT.
10. MOTOR OPERATOR SWITCH SHOWN WITH BREAKER CLOSING SPRING DISCHARGED.
11. FOUR POINT SOCKET USED HERE.
12. SECOND SHUNT TRIP MAY BE INSTALLED (USING A-7, A-8 CONTACTS) IN PLACE OF UVR. THIRD AUX SWITCH NOT AVAILABLE
WITH SECOND SHUNT TRIP. SHUNT TRIP MAY BE STANDARD OR CONTINUOUS DUTY TYPE . SECONDARY WIRING IS IDENTICAL.
13. ONLY ONE LATCH CHECK SWITCH MAY BE INSTALLED. USE OF CUSTOMER ACCESSIBLE LATCH CHECK SWITCH (B-29, B-30) IN
SERIES WITH SPRING RELEASE DEFEATS ANTI-PUMP FUNCTION AND IS NOT RECOMMENDED. SEE NOTE 3 FOR SPRING RELEASE
LATCH CHECK SWITCH.
14. THE OTS (OVERCURRENT TRIP SWITCHES) WILL OPERATE DIRECTLY FROM THE DIGITRIP DRIVING THE TA (TRIP ACTUATOR) TO
TRIP THE CIRCUIT BREAKER. THE STANDARD OTS REQUIRES A MANUAL LOCAL RESET VIA RED BUTTON DEPRESSION. THE AUTO
RESET OTS DOES NOT REQUIRE MANUAL RESET AND IF SO CONFIGURED, OCCUPIES THE MAKE-COM SECONDARY TERMINALS
A-4 AND A-5.
15. FOR CIRCUIT BREAKERS BUILT AFTER JULY 2006 AND DIGITRIP 1150 UNITS OF FIRMWARE REV 20decimal OR GREATER, THE
MAINTENANCE MODE FEATURE (ARMS) IS SUPPLIED. THE REVERSE POWER DESELECTION IS FRONT PANEL PROGRAMMABLE
ONLY.
16. THE HIGH INSTANTANEOUS MODULE IS SUPPLIED ON MDSX/SPSE BREAKERS AND IS OPTIONAL ON OTHERS. THE MODULE
PROVIDES 50KA HIGH INSTANTANEOUS TRIP.
Low Voltage Power Circuit Breakers
Maintenance of Magnum SB Insulated Case
Instructions for Installation, Operation and

1. 4 WIRE CRIMP CONNECTION
2. 3 WIRE CRIMP IF HIGH INST TRIP MODULE IS SUPPLIED.
3. SOCKET USED WITH DIGITRIP 520M GROUND ALARM POWER SUPPLY MODULE WILL HANG UNCONNECTED IF DIGITRIP
220 OR 520 IS SUPPLIED.
4. ALL CONTACTS SHOWN WITH BREAKER IN OPEN POSITION AND WITH SPRING NOT CHARGED AND WITH TRIP UNIT IN
NON-TRIPPED STATE (OTS SWITCHES).
5. THE SPRING RELEASE ACCESSORY CONSISTS OF A SR COIL AND A P.C. BOARD. THE PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD PROVIDES
A .20 SECOND PULSE FOR THE CLOSING OPERATION. VOLTAGE MUST BE REMOVED AND THEN REAPPLIED FOR SUBSEQUENT
OPERATION. AN OPTIONAL LATCH CHECK SWITCH (LCS) ACCESSORY MAY BE CONNECTED TO THE SPRING RELEASE. THE
EATON CORPORATION www.eaton.com
(CLOSED) LCS DELAYS THE SPRING RELEASE PULSE UNTIL THE BREAKER MECHANISM IS READY TO CLOSE (CHARGED AND
RESET). (THIS WILL INSURE THAT THE LATCH WILL ALWAYS BE IN THE PROPER STATE BEFORE THE SPRING RELEASE PULSE IS
INITIATED). IF VOLTAGE IS MAINTAINED TO THE SPRING RELEASE, THE CLOSING PULSE WILL OCCUR WHEN THE MECHANISM
IS CHARGED AND RESET (LCS OPEN). VOLTAGE MUST BE REMOVED AND REAPPLIED TO THE SPRING RELEASE FOR SUBSE-
QUENT OPERATION.
Figure 51. Connection Diagram for Double-wide Frame (except SBSE) with Digitrip 520 and 520M with AABBCC Configuration
6. TO PROVIDE SELECTED TIME DELAYS FOR SHORT TIME AND/OR GROUND TIME FUNCTIONS FOR TESTING OR NON-ZONE
INTERLOCKING APPLICATIONS, A JUMPER FROM B-8 TO B-9 IS REQUIRED.
7. ON THREE POLE BREAKERS ONLY, HAVING GROUND FAULT FUNCTIONALITY, A JUMPER INSTALLED FROM B-6 TO B-7 WILL
ENABLE SOURCE GROUND FAULT SENSING AND DISABLE RESIDUAL GROUND FAULT SENSING. INPUTS B-4 AND B-5 WILL BE
REASSIGNED FOR SOURCE GROUND SENSOR INPUTS.
39
Low Voltage Power Circuit Breakers
Instructions for Installation, Operation and
Maintenance of Magnum SB Insulated Case
8. THIS LEAD SUPPLIED ON G62 STYLE HIGH INSTANTANEOUS TRIP MODULE ONLY.
9. MOTOR OPERATOR SWITCH SHOWN WITH BREAKER CLOSING SPRING DISCHARGED.
10. ON 4-POLE BREAKERS, THE NEUTRAL CURRENT SENSOR IS THE SAME STYLE AND WIRED THE SAME AS THE PHASE SENSORS
AND IS LOCATED WITHIN THE BREAKER FRAME. THE SECONDARY CONTACTS B-4, B-5, ARE NOT WIRED OUT.
11. SECOND SHUNT TRIP MAY BE INSTALLED (USING A-7, A-8 CONTACTS) IN PLACE OF UVR. THIRD AUX SWITCH NOT AVAILABLE
WITH SECOND SHUNT TRIP. SHUNT TRIP MAY BE STANDARD OR CONTINUOUS DUTY. SECONDARY WIRING IS IDENTICAL.
12. ONLY ONE LATCH CHECK SWITCH MAY BE INSTALLED. USE OF CUSTOMER ACCESSIBLE LATCH CHECK SWITCH (B-29, B-30) IN
SERIES WITH SPRING RELEASE DEFEATS ANTI-PUMP FUNCTION AND IS NOT RECOMMENDED. SEE NOTE 5 FOR SPRING RELEASE
LATCH CHECK SWITCH.
13. THESE CONTACTS ARE PROVIDED FOR DIGITRIP 520MC AS STANDARD 0R 520M AS OPTIONAL ACCESSORY. THE CONTACTS
ARE ASSIGNED FOR GROUND ALARM ON GROUND TRIP FUNCTION FOR LSIG TRIP STYLE. HOWEVER, FOR AN LSI STYLE TRIP UNIT,
THE CONTACTS ARE ASSIGNED AS A HIGH LOAD ALARM.
14. THE OTS (OVERCURRENT TRIP SWITCHES) WILL OPERATE DIRECTLY FROM THE DIGITRIP DRIVING THE TA (TRIP ACTUATOR) TO
TRIP THE CIRCUIT BREAKER. THE STANDARD OTS REQUIRES A MANUAL LOCAL RESET VIA RED BUTTON DEPRESSION. THE AUTO
RESET OTS DOES NOT REQUIRE MANUAL RESET AND IF SO CONFIGURED, OCCUPIES THE MAKE-COM SECONDARY TERMINALS
A-4 AND A-5.
15. THE HIGH INSTANTANEOUS MODULE IS SUPPLIED ON MDSX/SPSE BREAKERS AND IS OPTIONAL ON OTHERS. THE MODULE
PROVIDES 50KA HIGH INSTANTANEOUS TRIP.
Effective March 2012
Instructional Leaflet IB2C12063H03
40
EATON CORPORATION www.eaton.com
1. 4 WIRE CRIMP CONNECTION
2. 3 WIRE CRIMPIF HIGH INST. TRIP MODULE IS SUPPLIED.
3. SOCKET USED WITH DIGITRIP 520M GROUND ALARM POWER SUPPLY MODULE WILL HANG UNCONNECTED IF DIGITRIP
220 OR 520 IS SUPPLIED.
4. ALL CONTACTS SHOWN WITH BREAKER IN OPEN POSITION AND WITH SPRING NOT CHARGED AND WITH TRIP UNIT IN
NON-TRIPPED STATE (OTS SWITCHES).
5. THE SPRING RELEASE ACCESSORY CONSISTS OF A SR COIL AND A P.C. BOARD. THE PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD PROVIDES
A .20 SECOND PULSE FOR THE CLOSING OPERATION. VOLTAGE MUST BE REMOVED AND THEN REAPPLIED FOR SUBSEQUENT
OPERATION. AN OPTIONAL LATCH CHECK SWITCH (LCS) ACCESSORY MAY BE CONNECTED TO THE SPRING RELEASE. THE
(CLOSED) LCS DELAYS THE SPRING RELEASE PULSE UNTIL THE BREAKER MECHANISM IS READY TO CLOSE (CHARGED AND
Figure 52. Connection Diagram for Double-wide Frame (except SBSE) with Digitrip 520MC with AABBCC Configuration
RESET). (THIS WILL INSURE THAT THE LATCH WILL ALWAYS BE IN THE PROPER STATE BEFORE THE SPRING RELEASE PULSE IS
INITIATED). IF VOLTAGE IS MAINTAINED TO THE SPRING RELEASE, THE CLOSING PULSE WILL OCCUR WHEN THE MECHANISM
IS CHARGED AND RESET (LCS OPEN). VOLTAGE MUST BE REMOVED AND REAPPLIED TO THE SPRING RELEASE FOR SUBSE-
QUENT OPERATION.
6. TO PROVIDE SELECTED TIME DELAYS FOR SHORT TIME AND/OR GROUND TIME FUNCTIONS FOR TESTING OR NON-ZONE
INTERLOCKING APPLICATIONS, A JUMPER FROM B-8 TO B-9 IS REQUIRED.
7. ON THREE POLE BREAKERS ONLY, HAVING GROUND FAULT FUNCTIONALITY, A JUMPER INSTALLED FROM B-6 TO B-7 WILL
ENABLE SOURCE GROUND FAULT SENSING AND DISABLE RESIDUAL GROUND FAULT SENSING. INPUTS B-4 AND B-5 WILL BE
REASSIGNED FOR SOURCE GROUND SENSOR INPUTS.
Effective March 2012
Instructional Leaflet IB2C12063H03
8. THIS LEAD SUPPLIED ON G62 STYLE HIGH INSTANTANEOUS TRIP MODULE ONLY.
9. MOTOR OPERATOR SWITCH SHOWN WITH BREAKER CLOSING SPRING DISCHARGED.
10. ON 4-POLE BREAKERS, THE NEUTRAL CURRENT SENSOR IS THE SAME STYLE AND WIRED THE SAME AS THE PHASE SENSORS
AND IS LOCATED WITHIN THE BREAKER FRAME. THE SECONDARY CONTACTS B-4, B-5, ARE NOT WIRED OUT.
11. SECOND SHUNT TRIP MAY BE INSTALLED (USING A-7, A-8 CONTACTS) IN PLACE OF UVR. THIRD AUX SWITCH NOT AVAILABLE
WITH SECOND SHUNT TRIP. SHUNT TRIP MAY BE STANDARD OR CONTINUOUS DUTY TYPE. SECONDARY WIRING IS IDENTICAL.
12. ONLY ONE LATCH CHECK SWITCH MAY BE INSTALLED. USE OF CUSTOMER ACCESSIBLE LATCH CHECK SWITCH (B-29, B-30) IN
SERIES WITH SPRING RELEASE DEFEATS ANTI-PUMP FUNCTION AND IS NOT RECOMMENDED. SEE NOTE 5 FOR SPRING RELEASE
LATCH CHECK SWITCH.
13. THESE CONTACTS ARE PROVIDED FOR DIGITRIP 520MC AS STANDARD. THE CONTACTS ARE ASSIGNED FOR GROUND ALARM
ON GROUND TRIP FUNCTION FOR LSIG TRIP STYLE. HOWEVER, FOR A LSI STYLE TRIP UNIT, THE CONTACTS ARE ASSIGNED AS A
HIGH LOAD ALARM.
14. THE OTS (OVERCURRENT TRIP SWITCHES) WILL OPERATE DIRECTLY FROM THE DIGITRIP DRIVING THE TA (TRIP ACTUATOR) TO
TRIP THE CIRCUIT BREAKER. THE OTS REQUIRES A MANUAL LOCAL RESET VIA RED BUTTON DEPRESSION. THE AUTO RESET OTS
DOES NOT REQUIRE MANUAL RESET, AND IF SO CONFIGURED, OCCUPIES THE MAKE-COM SECONDARY TERMINALS A-4 AND A-5.
15. CONNECTING A-12 TO B-7 VIA A REMOTE MAINTENANCE MODE SWITCH (GOLD CONTACTS) WILL ALSO ACTIVATE RELAY
CONTACT A-9.
16. THE HIGH INSTANTANEOUS MODULE IS SUPPLIED ON MDSX/SPSE BREAKERS AND IS OPTIONAL ON OTHERS. THE MODULE
PROVIDES 50KA HIGH INSTANTANEOUS TRIP.
Low Voltage Power Circuit Breakers
Maintenance of Magnum SB Insulated Case
Instructions for Installation, Operation and

1. ON THREE POLE BREAKERS ONLY (NOT EIGHT PHYSICAL POLES), HAVING GROUND FAULT FUNCTIONALITY, A JUMPER
INSTALLED FROM B-6 TO B-7 WILL ENABLE SOURCE GROUND FAULT SENSING AND DISABLE RESIDUAL GROUND FAULT SENS-
ING. INPUTS B-4 AND B-5 WILL BE REASSIGNED FOR SOURCE GROUND SENSOR INPUTS.
2. ALL AUX SWITCH CONTACTS SHOWN WITH BREAKER IN OPEN POSITION AND WITH TRIP UNIT IN NON-TRIPPED STATE
(OTS SWITCHES) AND SPRING NOT CHARGED.
3. THE SPRING RELEASE ACCESSORY CONSISTS OF A SR COIL AND A P.C. BOARD. THE PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD PROVIDES
A .20 SECOND PULSE FOR THE CLOSING OPERATION. VOLTAGE MUST BE REMOVED AND THEN REAPPLIED FOR SUBSEQUENT
OPERATION. AN OPTIONAL LATCH CHECK SWITCH (LCS) ACCESSORY MAY BE CONNECTED TO THE SPRING RELEASE. THE
Figure 53. Connection Diagram for Double-wide Frame (except SBSE) with Digitrip 1150 with AABBCC Configuration
(CLOSED) LCS DELAYS THE SPRING RELEASE PULSE UNTIL THE BREAKER MECHANISM IS READY TO CLOSE (CHARGED AND
EATON CORPORATION www.eaton.com
RESET). (THIS WILL INSURE THAT THE LATCH WILL ALWAYS BE IN THE PROPER STATE BEFORE THE SPRING RELEASE PULSE IS
INITIATED). IF VOLTAGE IS MAINTAINED TO THE SPRING RELEASE, THE CLOSING PULSE WILL OCCUR WHEN THE MECHANISM
IS CHARGED AND RESET (LCS OPEN). VOLTAGE MUST BE REMOVED AND REAPPLIED TO THE SPRING RELEASE FOR SUBSE-
QUENT OPERATION.
4. TO PROVIDE SELECTED TIME DELAYS FOR SHORT TIME AND/OR GROUND TIME FUNCTIONS FOR TESTING OR NON-ZONE
INTERLOCKING APPLICATIONS, A JUMPER FROM B-8 TO B-9 IS REQUIRED.
5. 3 WIRE CRIMP IF HIGH INST TRIP MODULE IS SUPPLIED.
6. NORMALLY OPENED CONTACT PROGRAMMED AS RELAY A. VIA DIGITRIP FRONT PANEL. (ALARM CONTACT). THIS CAN ALSO
BE ASSIGNED TO INDICATE MAINTENANCE MODE FEATURE IN USE.
7. NORMALLY CLOSED CONTACT PROGRAMMED AS RELAY B. VIA DIGITRIP FRONT PANEL. (BLOCK CLOSE CONTACT)
41
Low Voltage Power Circuit Breakers
Instructions for Installation, Operation and
Maintenance of Magnum SB Insulated Case
8. NORMALLY OPEN CONTACT PROGRAMMED AS RELAY C. VIA DIGITRIP FRONT PANEL. (LATCHING CONTACT)
9. ON 4-POLE BREAKERS (ACTUALLY 8 PHYSICAL POLES), THE NEUTRAL CURRENT SENSORS ARE LOCATED WITHIN THE BREAKER
FRAME. THE SECONDARY CONTACTS B-4, B-5, ARE NOT WIRED OUT.
10. MOTOR OPERATOR SWITCH SHOWN WITH BREAKER CLOSING SPRING DISCHARGED.
11. FOUR POINT SOCKET USED HERE.
12. SECOND SHUNT TRIP MAY BE INSTALLED (USING A-7, A-8 CONTACTS) IN PLACE OF UVR. THIRD AUX SWITCH NOT AVAILABLE
WITH SECOND SHUNT TRIP. SHUNT TRIP MAY BE STANDARD OR CONTINUOUS DUTY TYPE. WIRING IS IDENTICAL.
13. ONLY ONE LATCH CHECK SWITCH MAY BE INSTALLED. USE OF CUSTOMER ACCESSIBLE LATCH CHECK SWITCH (B-29, B-30) IN
SERIES WITH SPRING RELEASE DEFEATS ANTI-PUMP FUNCTION AND IS NOT RECOMMENDED. SEE NOTE 3 FOR SPRING RELEASE
LATCH CHECK SWITCH.
14. THE OTS (OVERCURRENT TRIP SWITCHES) WILL OPERATE DIRECTLY FROM THE DIGITRIP DRIVING THE TA (TRIP ACTUATOR) TO
TRIP THE CIRCUIT BREAKER. THE STANDARD OTS REQUIRES A MANUAL LOCAL RESET VIA RED BUTTON DEPRESSION. THE AUTO
RESET OTS DOES NOT REQUIRE MANUAL RESET, AND IF SO CONFIGURED, OCCUPIES THE MAKE-COM SECONDARY TERMINALS
A-4 AND A-5.
15. FOR CIRCUIT BREAKERS BUILT AFTER JULY 2006 AND DIGITRIP 1150 UNITS OF FIRMWARE REV 20decimal OR GREATER, THE
MAINTENANCE MODE FEATURE (ARMS) IS SUPPLIED. THE REVERSE POWER DESELECTION IS FRONT PANEL PROGRAMMABLE
ONLY.
16. THE HIGH INSTANTANEOUS MODULE IS SUPPLIED ON MDSX/SPSE BREAKERS AND IS OPTIONAL ON OTHERS. THE MODULE
PROVIDES 50KA HIGH INSTANTANEOUS TRIP.
Effective March 2012
Instructional Leaflet IB2C12063H03
42
EATON CORPORATION www.eaton.com
1. 4 WIRE CRIMP CONNECTION
2. 3 WIRE CRIMPIF HIGH INST. TRIP MODULE IS SUPPLIED.
3. SOCKET USED WITH DIGITRIP 520M GROUND ALARM POWER SUPPLY MODULE WILL HANG UNCONNECTED IF DIGITRIP
220 OR 520 IS SUPPLIED.
4. ALL CONTACTS SHOWN WITH BREAKER IN OPEN POSITION AND WITH SPRING NOT CHARGED AND WITH TRIP UNIT IN
NON-TRIPPED STATE (OTS SWITCHES).
5. THE SPRING RELEASE ACCESSORY CONSISTS OF A SR COIL AND A P.C. BOARD. THE PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD PROVIDES
A .20 SECOND PULSE FOR THE CLOSING OPERATION. VOLTAGE MUST BE REMOVED AND THEN REAPPLIED FOR SUBSEQUENT
OPERATION. AN OPTIONAL LATCH CHECK SWITCH (LCS) ACCESSORY MAY BE CONNECTED TO THE SPRING RELEASE. THE
Figure 54. Connection Diagram for SBSE Double-wide Frame with Digitrip 520 and 520M with ABCABC Configuration
(CLOSED) LCS DELAYS THE SPRING RELEASE PULSE UNTIL THE BREAKER MECHANISM IS READY TO CLOSE (CHARGED AND
RESET). (THIS WILL INSURE THAT THE LATCH WILL ALWAYS BE IN THE PROPER STATE BEFORE THE SPRING RELEASE PULSE IS
INITIATED). IF VOLTAGE IS MAINTAINED TO THE SPRING RELEASE, THE CLOSING PULSE WILL OCCUR WHEN THE MECHANISM
IS CHARGED AND RESET (LCS OPEN). VOLTAGE MUST BE REMOVED AND REAPPLIED TO THE SPRING RELEASE FOR SUBSE-
QUENT OPERATION.
6. TO PROVIDE SELECTED TIME DELAYS FOR SHORT TIME AND/OR GROUND TIME FUNCTIONS FOR TESTING OR NON-ZONE
INTERLOCKING APPLICATIONS, A JUMPER FROM B-8 TO B-9 IS REQUIRED.
7. ON THREE POLE BREAKERS ONLY, HAVING GROUND FAULT FUNCTIONALITY, A JUMPER INSTALLED FROM B-6 TO B-7 WILL
ENABLE SOURCE GROUND FAULT SENSING AND DISABLE RESIDUAL GROUND FAULT SENSING. INPUTS B-4 AND B-5 WILL BE
REASSIGNED FOR SOURCE GROUND SENSOR INPUTS.
Effective March 2012
Instructional Leaflet IB2C12063H03
8. THIS LEAD SUPPLIED ON G62 STYLE HIGH INSTANTANEOUS TRIP MODULE ONLY.
9. MOTOR OPERATOR SWITCH SHOWN WITH BREAKER CLOSING SPRING DISCHARGED.
10. ON 4-POLE BREAKERS, THE NEUTRAL CURRENT SENSOR IS THE SAME STYLE AND WIRED THE SAME AS THE PHASE SENSORS
AND IS LOCATED WITHIN THE BREAKER FRAME. THE SECONDARY CONTACTS B-4, B-5, ARE NOT WIRED OUT.
11. SECOND SHUNT TRIP MAY BE INSTALLED (USING A-7, A-8 CONTACTS) IN PLACE OF UVR. THIRD AUX SWITCH NOT AVAILABLE
WITH SECOND SHUNT TRIP. SHUNT TRIP MAY BE STANDARD OR CONTINUOUS DUTY TYPE. SECONDARY WIRING IS IDENTICAL.
12. ONLY ONE LATCH CHECK SWITCH MAY BE INSTALLED. USE OF CUSTOMER ACCESSIBLE LATCH CHECK SWITCH (B-29, B-30) IN
SERIES WITH SPRING RELEASE DEFEATS ANTI-PUMP FUNCTION AND IS NOT RECOMMENDED. SEE NOTE 5 FOR SPRING RELEASE
LATCH CHECK SWITCH.
13. THESE CONTACTS ARE PROVIDED FOR DIGITRIP 520MC AS STANDARD OR 520M AS OPTIONAL ACCESSORY. THE CONTACTS
ARE ASSIGNED FOR GROUND ALARM ON GROUND TRIP FUNCTION FOR LSIG TRIP STYLE. HOWEVER, FOR A LSI STYLE TRIP UNIT,
THE CONTACTS ARE ASSIGNED AS A HIGH LOAD ALARM.
14. THE OTS (OVERCURRENT TRIP SWITCHES) WILL OPERATE DIRECTLY FROM THE DIGITRIP DRIVING THE TA (TRIP ACTUATOR) TO
TRIP THE CIRCUIT BREAKER. THE OTS REQUIRES A MANUAL LOCAL RESET VIA RED BUTTON DEPRESSION. THE AUTO RESET OTS
DOES NOT REQUIRE MANUAL RESET, AND IF SO CONFIGURED, OCCUPIES THE MAKE-COM SECONDARY TERMINALS A-4 AND A-5.
15. THE HIGH INSTANTANEOUS MODULE IS SUPPLIED ON MDSX/SPSE BREAKERS AND IS OPTIONAL ON OTHERS. THE MODULE
PROVIDES 50KA HIGH INSTANTANEOUS TRIP.
Low Voltage Power Circuit Breakers
Maintenance of Magnum SB Insulated Case
Instructions for Installation, Operation and

1. 4 WIRE CRIMP CONNECTION
2. 3 WIRE CRIMP IF HIGH INST. TRIP MODULE IS SUPPLIED.
3. SOCKET USED WITH DIGITRIP 520M GROUND ALARM POWER SUPPLY MODULE WILL HANG UNCONNECTED IF DIGITRIP
220 OR 520 IS SUPPLIED.
Figure 55. Connection Diagram for SBSE Double-wide Frame with Digitrip 520MC with ABCABC Configuration
4. ALL CONTACTS SHOWN WITH BREAKER IN OPEN POSITION AND WITH SPRING NOT CHARGED AND WITH TRIP UNIT IN
NON-TRIPPED STATE (OTS SWITCHES).
5. THE SPRING RELEASE ACCESSORY CONSISTS OF A SR COIL AND A P.C. BOARD. THE PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD PROVIDES
A .20 SECOND PULSE FOR THE CLOSING OPERATION. VOLTAGE MUST BE REMOVED AND THEN REAPPLIED FOR SUBSEQUENT
EATON CORPORATION www.eaton.com
OPERATION. AN OPTIONAL SR-LATCH CHECK SWITCH (LCS) ACCESSORY MAY BE CONNECTED TO THE SPRING RELEASE. THE
(CLOSED) LCS DELAYS THE SPRING RELEASE PULSE UNTIL THE BREAKER MECHANISM IS READY TO CLOSE (CHARGED AND
RESET). (THIS WILL INSURE THAT THE LATCH WILL ALWAYS BE IN THE PROPER STATE BEFORE THE SPRING RELEASE PULSE IS
INITIATED). IF VOLTAGE IS MAINTAINED TO THE SPRING RELEASE, THE CLOSING PULSE WILL OCCUR WHEN THE MECHANISM
IS CHARGED AND RESET (LCS OPEN). VOLTAGE MUST BE REMOVED AND REAPPLIED TO THE SPRING RELEASE FOR SUBSE-
QUENT OPERATION.
6. TO PROVIDE SELECTED TIME DELAYS FOR SHORT TIME AND/OR GROUND TIME FUNCTIONS FOR TESTING OR NON-ZONE
INTERLOCKING APPLICATIONS, A JUMPER FROM B-8 TO B-9 IS REQUIRED.
7. ON THREE POLE BREAKERS ONLY, HAVING GROUND FAULT FUNCTIONALITY, A JUMPER INSTALLED FROM B-6 TO B-7 WILL
ENABLE SOURCE GROUND FAULT SENSING AND DISABLE RESIDUAL GROUND FAULT SENSING. INPUTS B-4 AND B-5 WILL BE
REASSIGNED FOR SOURCE GROUND SENSOR INPUTS.
43
Low Voltage Power Circuit Breakers
Instructions for Installation, Operation and
Maintenance of Magnum SB Insulated Case
8. THIS LEAD SUPPLIED ON G62 STYLE HIGH INSTANTANEOUS TRIP MODULE ONLY.
9. MOTOR OPERATOR SWITCH SHOWN WITH BREAKER CLOSING SPRING DISCHARGED.
10. ON 4-POLE BREAKERS, THE NEUTRAL CURRENT SENSOR IS THE SAME STYLE AND WIRED THE SAME AS THE PHASE SENSORS
AND IS LOCATED WITHIN THE BREAKER FRAME. THE SECONDARY CONTACTS B-4, B-5, ARE NOT WIRED OUT.
11. SECOND SHUNT TRIP MAY BE INSTALLED (USING A-7, A-8 CONTACTS) IN PLACE OF UVR. THIRD AUX SWITCH NOT AVAILABLE
WITH SECOND SHUNT TRIP. SHUNT TRIP MAY BE STANDARD OR CONTINUOUS DUTY TYPE. SECONDARY WIRING IS IDENTICAL.
12. ONLY ONE LATCH CHECK SWITCH MAY BE INSTALLED. USE OF CUSTOMER ACCESSIBLE LATCH CHECK SWITCH (B-29, B-30) IN
SERIES WITH SPRING RELEASE DEFEATS ANTI-PUMP FUNCTION AND IS NOT RECOMMENDED. SEE NOTE 5 FOR SPRING RELEASE
LATCH CHECK SWITCH.
13. THESE CONTACTS ARE PROVIDED FOR DIGITRIP 520MC AS STANDARD. THE CONTACTS ARE ASSIGNED FOR GROUND ALARM
ON GROUND TRIP FUNCTION FOR LSIG TRIP STYLE. HOWEVER, FOR A LSI STYLE TRIP UNIT, THE CONTACTS ARE ASSIGNED AS A
HIGH LOAD ALARM.
14. THE OTS (OVERCURRENT TRIP SWITCHES) WILL OPERATE DIRECTLY FROM THE DIGITRIP DRIVING THE TA (TRIP ACTUATOR) TO
TRIP THE CIRCUIT BREAKER. THE OTS REQUIRES A MANUAL LOCAL RESET VIA RED BUTTON DEPRESSION. THE AUTO RESET OTS
DOES NOT REQUIRE MANUAL RESET, AND IF SO CONFIGURED, OCCUPIES THE MAKE-COM SECONDARY TERMINALS A-4 AND A-5.
15. CONNECTING A-12 TO B-7 VIA A REMOTE MAINTENANCE MODE SWITCH (GOLD CONTACTS) WILL ALSO ACTIVATE RELAY
CONTACT A-9.
16. THE HIGH INSTANTANEOUS MODULE IS SUPPLIED ON MDSX/SPSE BREAKERS AND IS OPTIONAL ON OTHERS. THE MODULE
PROVIDES 50KA HIGH INSTANTANEOUS TRIP.
Effective March 2012
Instructional Leaflet IB2C12063H03
44
EATON CORPORATION www.eaton.com
1. ON THREE POLE BREAKERS ONLY (NOT EIGHT PHYSICAL POLES), HAVING GROUND FAULT FUNCTIONALITY, A JUMPER
INSTALLED FROM B-6 TO B-7 WILL ENABLE SOURCE GROUND FAULT SENSING AND DISABLE RESIDUAL GROUND FAULT SENS-
ING. INPUTS B-4 AND B-5 WILL BE REASSIGNED FOR SOURCE GROUND SENSOR INPUTS.
2. ALL CONTACTS SHOWN WITH BREAKER IN OPEN POSITION AND WITH TRIP UNIT IN NON-TRIPPED STATE (OTS SWITCHES)
Figure 56. Connection Diagram for SBSE Double-wide Frame with Digitrip 1150 with ABCABC Configuration
AND SPRING NOT CHARGED.
3. THE SPRING RELEASE ACCESSORY CONSISTS OF A SR COIL AND A P.C. BOARD. THE PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD PROVIDES
A .20 SECOND PULSE FOR THE CLOSING OPERATION. VOLTAGE MUST BE REMOVED AND THEN REAPPLIED FOR SUBSEQUENT
OPERATION. AN OPTIONAL SR-LATCH CHECK SWITCH (LCS) ACCESSORY MAY BE CONNECTED TO THE SPRING RELEASE. THE
(CLOSED) LCS DELAYS THE SPRING RELEASE PULSE UNTIL THE BREAKER MECHANISM IS READY TO CLOSE (CHARGED AND
RESET). (THIS WILL INSURE THAT THE LATCH WILL ALWAYS BE IN THE PROPER STATE BEFORE THE SPRING RELEASE PULSE IS
INITIATED). IF VOLTAGE IS MAINTAINED TO THE SPRING RELEASE, THE CLOSING PULSE WILL OCCUR WHEN THE MECHANISM
IS CHARGED AND RESET (LCS OPEN). VOLTAGE MUST BE REMOVED AND REAPPLIED TO THE SPRING RELEASE FOR SUBSE-
QUENT OPERATION.
4. TO PROVIDE SELECTED TIME DELAYS FOR SHORT TIME AND/OR GROUND TIME FUNCTIONS FOR TESTING OR NON-ZONE
INTERLOCKING APPLICATIONS, A JUMPER FROM B-8 TO B-9 IS REQUIRED.
5. 3 WIRE CRIMP IF HIGH INST TRIP MODULE IS SUPPLIED.
6. NORMALLY OPENED CONTACT PROGRAMMED AS RELAY A. VIA DIGITRIP FRONT PANEL. (ALARM CONTACT). THIS CAN ALSO
BE ASSIGNED TO INDICATE MAINTENANCE MODE FEATURE IN USE.
7. NORMALLY CLOSED CONTACT PROGRAMMED AS RELAY B. VIA DIGITRIP FRONT PANEL. (BLOCK CLOSE CONTACT)
Effective March 2012
Instructional Leaflet IB2C12063H03
8. NORMALLY OPEN CONTACT PROGRAMMED AS RELAY C. VIA DIGITRIP FRONT PANEL. (LATCHING CONTACT)
9. ON 4-POLE BREAKERS (ACTUALLY 8 PHYSICAL POLES), THE NEUTRAL CURRENT SENSORS ARE LOCATED WITHIN THE BREAKER
FRAME. THE SECONDARY CONTACTS B-4, B-5, ARE NOT WIRED OUT.
10. MOTOR OPERATOR SWITCH SHOWN WITH BREAKER CLOSING SPRING DISCHARGED.
11. FOUR POINT SOCKET USED HERE.
12. SECOND SHUNT TRIP MAY BE INSTALLED (USING A-7, A-8 CONTACTS) IN PLACE OF UVR. THIRD AUX SWITCH NOT AVAILABLE
WITH SECOND SHUNT TRIP. SHUNT TRIP MAY BE STANDARD OR CONTINUOUS DUTY TYPE. SECONDARY WIRING IS IDENTICAL.
13. ONLY ONE LATCH CHECK SWITCH MAY BE INSTALLED. USE OF CUSTOMER ACCESSIBLE LATCH CHECK SWITCH (B-29, B-30) IN
SERIES WITH SPRING RELEASE DEFEATS ANTI-PUMP FUNCTION AND IS NOT RECOMMENDED. SEE NOTE 3 FOR SPRING RELEASE
LATCH CHECK SWITCH.
14. THE OTS (OVERCURRENT TRIP SWITCHES) WILL OPERATE DIRECTLY FROM THE DIGITRIP DRIVING THE TA (TRIP ACTUATOR) TO
TRIP THE CIRCUIT BREAKER. THE OTS REQUIRES A MANUAL LOCAL RESET VIA RED BUTTON DEPRESSION. THE AUTO RESET OTS
DOES NOT REQUIRE MANUAL RESET, AND IF SO CONFIGURED, OCCUPIES THE MAKE-COM SECONDARY TERMINALS A-4 AND A-5.
15. FOR CIRCUIT BREAKERS BUILT AFTER JULY 2006 AND DIGITRIP 1150 UNITS OF FIRMWARE REV 20decimal OR GREATER, THE
MAINTENANCE MODE FEATURE (ARMS) IS SUPPLIED. THE REVERSE POWER DESELECTIONS FRONT PANEL PROGRAMMABLE ONLY.
16. THE HIGH INSTANTANEOUS MODULE IS SUPPLIED ON MDSX/SPSE BREAKERS AND IS OPTIONAL ON OTHERS. THE MODULE
PROVIDES 50KA HIGH INSTANTANEOUS TRIP.
Low Voltage Power Circuit Breakers
Maintenance of Magnum SB Insulated Case
Instructions for Installation, Operation and

1. 4 WIRE CRIMP CONNECTION
2. 3 WIRE CRIMP IF HIGH INST. TRIP MODULE IS SUPPLIED.
3. SOCKET USED WITH DIGITRIP 520M GROUND ALARM POWER SUPPLY MODULE WILL HANG UNCONNECTED IF DIGITRIP
220 OR 520 IS SUPPLIED.
4. ALL CONTACTS SHOWN WITH BREAKER IN OPEN POSITION AND WITH SPRING NOT CHARGED AND WITH TRIP UNIT IN
NON-TRIPPED STATE (OTS SWITCHES).
5. THE SPRING RELEASE ACCESSORY CONSISTS OF A SR COIL AND A P.C. BOARD. THE PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD PROVIDES
A .20 SECOND PULSE FOR THE CLOSING OPERATION. VOLTAGE MUST BE REMOVED AND THEN REAPPLIED FOR SUBSEQUENT
OPERATION. AN OPTIONAL LATCH CHECK SWITCH (LCS) ACCESSORY MAY BE CONNECTED TO THE SPRING RELEASE. THE
Figure 57. Connection Diagram for SBSE Double-wide Frame with Digitrip 520 and 520M with AABBCC Configuration
EATON CORPORATION www.eaton.com
(CLOSED) LCS DELAYS THE SPRING RELEASE PULSE UNTIL THE BREAKER MECHANISM IS READY TO CLOSE (CHARGED AND
RESET). (THIS WILL INSURE THAT THE LATCH WILL ALWAYS BE IN THE PROPER STATE BEFORE THE SPRING RELEASE PULSE IS
INITIATED). IF VOLTAGE IS MAINTAINED TO THE SPRING RELEASE, THE CLOSING PULSE WILL OCCUR WHEN THE MECHANISM
IS CHARGED AND RESET (LCS OPEN). VOLTAGE MUST BE REMOVED AND REAPPLIED TO THE SPRING RELEASE FOR SUBSE-
QUENT OPERATION.
6. TO PROVIDE SELECTED TIME DELAYS FOR SHORT TIME AND/OR GROUND TIME FUNCTIONS FOR TESTING OR NON-ZONE
INTERLOCKING APPLICATIONS, A JUMPER FROM B-8 TO B-9 IS REQUIRED.
7. ON THREE POLE BREAKERS ONLY, HAVING GROUND FAULT FUNCTIONALITY, A JUMPER INSTALLED FROM B-6 TO B-7 WILL
ENABLE SOURCE GROUND FAULT SENSING AND DISABLE RESIDUAL GROUND FAULT SENSING. INPUTS B-4 AND B-5 WILL BE
REASSIGNED FOR SOURCE GROUND SENSOR INPUTS.
45
Low Voltage Power Circuit Breakers
Instructions for Installation, Operation and
Maintenance of Magnum SB Insulated Case
8. THIS LEAD SUPPLIED ON G62 STYLE HIGH INSTANTANEOUS TRIP MODULE ONLY.
9. MOTOR OPERATOR SWITCH SHOWN WITH BREAKER CLOSING SPRING DISCHARGED.
10. ON 4-POLE BREAKERS, THE NEUTRAL CURRENT SENSOR IS THE SAME STYLE AND WIRED THE SAME AS THE PHASE SENSORS
AND IS LOCATED WITHIN THE BREAKER FRAME. THE SECONDARY CONTACTS B-4, B-5, ARE NOT WIRED OUT.
11. SECOND SHUNT TRIP MAY BE INSTALLED (USING A-7, A-8 CONTACTS) IN PLACE OF UVR. THIRD AUX SWITCH NOT AVAILABLE
WITH SECOND SHUNT TRIP. SHUNT TRIP MAY BE STANDARD OR CONTINUOUS DUTY TYPE. SECONDARY WIRING IS IDENTICAL.
12. ONLY ONE LATCH CHECK SWITCH MAY BE INSTALLED. USE OF CUSTOMER ACCESSIBLE LATCH CHECK SWITCH (B-29, B-30) IN
SERIES WITH SPRING RELEASE DEFEATS ANTI-PUMP FUNCTION AND IS NOT RECOMMENDED. SEE NOTE 5 FOR SPRING RELEASE
LATCH CHECK SWITCH.
13. THESE CONTACTS ARE PROVIDED FOR DIGITRIP 520MC AS STANDARD OR 520M AS OPTIONAL ACCESSORY. THE CONTACTS
ARE ASSIGNED FOR GROUND ALARM ON GROUND TRIP FUNCTION FOR LSIG TRIP STYLE. HOWEVER, FOR A LSI STYLE TRIP UNIT,
THE CONTACTS ARE ASSIGNED AS A HIGH LOAD ALARM.
14. THE OTS (OVERCURRENT TRIP SWITCHES) WILL OPERATE DIRECTLY FROM THE DIGITRIP DRIVING THE TA (TRIP ACTUATOR) TO
TRIP THE CIRCUIT BREAKER. THE OTS REQUIRES A MANUAL LOCAL RESET VIA RED BUTTON DEPRESSION. THE AUTO RESET OTS
DOES NOT REQUIRE MANUAL RESET, AND IF SO CONFIGURED, OCCUPIES THE MAKE-COM SECONDARY TERMINALS A-4 AND A-5.
15. THE HIGH INSTANTANEOUS MODULE IS SUPPLIED ON MDSX/SPSE BREAKERS AND IS OPTIONAL ON OTHERS. THE MODULE
PROVIDES 50KA HIGH INSTANTANEOUS TRIP.
Effective March 2012
Instructional Leaflet IB2C12063H03
46
EATON CORPORATION www.eaton.com
1. 4 WIRE CRIMP CONNECTION
2. 3 WIRE CRIMPIF HIGH INST. TRIP MODULE IS SUPPLIED.
3. SOCKET USED WITH DIGITRIP 520M GROUND ALARM POWER SUPPLY MODULE WILL HANG UNCONNECTED IF DIGITRIP
220 OR 520 IS SUPPLIED.
4. ALL CONTACTS SHOWN WITH BREAKER IN OPEN POSITION AND WITH SPRING NOT CHARGED AND WITH TRIP UNIT IN
Figure 58. Connection Diagram for SBSE Double-wide Frame with Digitrip 520MC with AABBCC Configuration
NON-TRIPPED STATE (OTS SWITCHES).
5. THE SPRING RELEASE ACCESSORY CONSISTS OF A SR COIL AND A P.C. BOARD. THE PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD PROVIDES
A .20 SECOND PULSE FOR THE CLOSING OPERATION. VOLTAGE MUST BE REMOVED AND THEN REAPPLIED FOR SUBSEQUENT
OPERATION. AN OPTIONAL LATCH CHECK SWITCH (LCS) ACCESSORY MAY BE CONNECTED TO THE SPRING RELEASE. THE
(CLOSED) LCS DELAYS THE SPRING RELEASE PULSE UNTIL THE BREAKER MECHANISM IS READY TO CLOSE (CHARGED AND
RESET). (THIS WILL INSURE THAT THE LATCH WILL ALWAYS BE IN THE PROPER STATE BEFORE THE SPRING RELEASE PULSE IS
INITIATED). IF VOLTAGE IS MAINTAINED TO THE SPRING RELEASE, THE CLOSING PULSE WILL OCCUR WHEN THE MECHANISM
IS CHARGED AND RESET (LCS OPEN). VOLTAGE MUST BE REMOVED AND REAPPLIED TO THE SPRING RELEASE FOR SUBSE-
QUENT OPERATION.
6. TO PROVIDE SELECTED TIME DELAYS FOR SHORT TIME AND/OR GROUND TIME FUNCTIONS FOR TESTING OR NON-ZONE
INTERLOCKING APPLICATIONS, A JUMPER FROM B-8 TO B-9 IS REQUIRED.
7. ON THREE POLE BREAKERS ONLY, HAVING GROUND FAULT FUNCTIONALITY, A JUMPER INSTALLED FROM B-6 TO B-7 WILL
ENABLE SOURCE GROUND FAULT SENSING AND DISABLE RESIDUAL GROUND FAULT SENSING. INPUTS B-4 AND B-5 WILL BE
REASSIGNED FOR SOURCE GROUND SENSOR INPUTS.
Effective March 2012
Instructional Leaflet IB2C12063H03
8. THIS LEAD SUPPLIED ON G62 STYLE HIGH INSTANTANEOUS TRIP MODULE ONLY.
9. MOTOR OPERATOR SWITCH SHOWN WITH BREAKER CLOSING SPRING DISCHARGED.
10. ON 4-POLE BREAKERS, THE NEUTRAL CURRENT SENSOR IS THE SAME STYLE AND WIRED THE SAME AS THE PHASE SENSORS
AND IS LOCATED WITHIN THE BREAKER FRAME. THE SECONDARY CONTACTS B-4, B-5, ARE NOT WIRED OUT.
11. SECOND SHUNT TRIP MAY BE INSTALLED (USING A-7, A-8 CONTACTS) IN PLACE OF UVR. THIRD AUX SWITCH NOT AVAILABLE
WITH SECOND SHUNT TRIP. SHUNT TRIP MAY BE STANDARD OR CONTINUOUS DUTY TYPE. SECONDARY WIRING IS IDENTICAL.
12. ONLY ONE LATCH CHECK SWITCH MAY BE INSTALLED. USE OF CUSTOMER ACCESSIBLE LATCH CHECK SWITCH (B-29, B-30) IN
SERIES WITH SPRING RELEASE DEFEATS ANTI-PUMP FUNCTION AND IS NOT RECOMMENDED. SEE NOTE 5 FOR SPRING RELEASE
LATCH CHECK SWITCH.
13. THESE CONTACTS ARE PROVIDED FOR DIGITRIP 520MC AS STANDARD. THE CONTACTS ARE ASSIGNED FOR GROUND ALARM
ON GROUND TRIP FUNCTION FOR LSIG TRIP STYLE. HOWEVER, FOR A LSI STYLE TRIP UNIT, THE CONTACTS ARE ASSIGNED AS A
HIGH LOAD ALARM.
14. THE OTS (OVERCURRENT TRIP SWITCHES) WILL OPERATE DIRECTLY FROM THE DIGITRIP DRIVING THE TA (TRIP ACTUATOR) TO
TRIP THE CIRCUIT BREAKER. THE OTS REQUIRES A MANUAL LOCAL RESET VIA RED BUTTON DEPRESSION. THE AUTO RESET OTS
DOES NOT REQUIRE MANUAL RESET, AND IF SO CONFIGURED, OCCUPIES THE MAKE-COM SECONDARY TERMINALS A-4 AND A-5.
15. CONNECTING A-12 TO B-7 VIA A REMOTE MAINTENANCE MODE SWITCH (GOLD CONTACTS) WILL ALSO ACTIVATE RELAY
CONTACT A-9.
16. THE HIGH INSTANTANEOUS MODULE IS SUPPLIED ON MDSX/SPSE BREAKERS AND IS OPTIONAL ON OTHERS. THE MODULE
PROVIDES 50KA HIGH INSTANTANEOUS TRIP.
Low Voltage Power Circuit Breakers
Maintenance of Magnum SB Insulated Case
Instructions for Installation, Operation and

1. ON THREE POLE BREAKERS ONLY (NOT EIGHT PHYSICAL POLES), HAVING GROUND FAULT FUNCTIONALITY, A JUMPER
INSTALLED FROM B-6 TO B-7 WILL ENABLE SOURCE GROUND FAULT SENSING AND DISABLE RESIDUAL GROUND FAULT SENS-
ING. INPUTS B-4 AND B-5 WILL BE REASSIGNED FOR SOURCE GROUND SENSOR INPUTS.
Figure 59. Connection Diagram for SBSE Double-wide Frame with Digitrip 1150 with AABBCC Configuration
2. ALL AUX. SWITCH CONTACTS SHOWN WITH BREAKER IN OPEN POSITION AND WITH TRIP UNIT IN NON-TRIPPED STATE
(OTS SWITCHES) AND SPRING NOT CHARGED.
3. THE SPRING RELEASE ACCESSORY CONSISTS OF A SR COIL AND A P.C. BOARD. THE PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD PROVIDES
A .20 SECOND PULSE FOR THE CLOSING OPERATION. VOLTAGE MUST BE REMOVED AND THEN REAPPLIED FOR SUBSEQUENT
OPERATION. AN OPTIONAL LATCH CHECK SWITCH (LCS) ACCESSORY MAY BE CONNECTED TO THE SPRING RELEASE. THE
EATON CORPORATION www.eaton.com
(CLOSED) LCS DELAYS THE SPRING RELEASE PULSE UNTIL THE BREAKER MECHANISM IS READY TO CLOSE (CHARGED AND
RESET). (THIS WILL INSURE THAT THE LATCH WILL ALWAYS BE IN THE PROPER STATE BEFORE THE SPRING RELEASE PULSE IS
INITIATED). IF VOLTAGE IS MAINTAINED TO THE SPRING RELEASE, THE CLOSING PULSE WILL OCCUR WHEN THE MECHANISM
IS CHARGED AND RESET (LCS OPEN). VOLTAGE MUST BE REMOVED AND REAPPLIED TO THE SPRING RELEASE FOR SUBSE-
QUENT OPERATION.
4. TO PROVIDE SELECTED TIME DELAYS FOR SHORT TIME AND/OR GROUND TIME FUNCTIONS FOR TESTING OR NON-ZONE
INTERLOCKING APPLICATIONS, A JUMPER FROM B-8 TO B-9 IS REQUIRED.
5. 3 WIRE CRIMP IF HIGH INST TRIP MODULE IS SUPPLIED.
6. NORMALLY OPENED CONTACT PROGRAMMED AS RELAY A. VIA DIGITRIP FRONT PANEL. (ALARM CONTACT). THIS CAN ALSO
BE ASSIGNED TO INDICATE MAINTENANCE MODE FEATURE IN USE.
7. NORMALLY CLOSED CONTACT PROGRAMMED AS RELAY B. VIA DIGITRIP FRONT PANEL. (BLOCK CLOSE CONTACT)
47
Low Voltage Power Circuit Breakers
Instructions for Installation, Operation and
Maintenance of Magnum SB Insulated Case
8. NORMALLY OPEN CONTACT PROGRAMMED AS RELAY C. VIA DIGITRIP FRONT PANEL. (LATCHING CONTACT)
9. ON 4-POLE BREAKERS (ACTUALLY 8 PHYSICAL POLES), THE NEUTRAL CURRENT SENSORS ARE LOCATED WITHIN THE BREAKER
FRAME. THE SECONDARY CONTACTS B-4, B-5, ARE NOT WIRED OUT.
10. MOTOR OPERATOR SWITCH SHOWN WITH BREAKER CLOSING SPRING DISCHARGED.
11. FOUR POINT SOCKET USED HERE.
12. SECOND SHUNT TRIP MAY BE INSTALLED (USING A-7, A-8 CONTACTS) IN PLACE OF UVR. THIRD AUX SWITCH NOT AVAILABLE
WITH SECOND SHUNT TRIP. SHUNT TRIP MAY BE STANDARD OR CONTINUOUS DUTY TYPE. SECONDARY WIRING IS IDENTICAL.
13. ONLY ONE LATCH CHECK SWITCH MAY BE INSTALLED. USE OF CUSTOMER ACCESSIBLE LATCH CHECK SWITCH (B-29, B-30) IN
SERIES WITH SPRING RELEASE DEFEATS ANTI-PUMP FUNCTION AND IS NOT RECOMMENDED. SEE NOTE 3 FOR SPRING RELEASE
LATCH CHECK SWITCH.
14. THE OTS (OVERCURRENT TRIP SWITCHES) WILL OPERATE DIRECTLY FROM THE DIGITRIP DRIVING THE TA (TRIP ACTUATOR) TO
TRIP THE CIRCUIT BREAKER. THE OTS REQUIRES A MANUAL LOCAL RESET VIA RED BUTTON DEPRESSION. THE AUTO RESET OTS
DOES NOT REQUIRE MANUAL RESET, AND IF SO CONFIGURED, OCCUPIES THE MAKE-COM SECONDARY TERMINALS A-4 AND A-5.
15. FOR CIRCUIT BREAKERS BUILT AFTER JULY 2006 AND DIGITRIP 1150 UNITS OF FIRMWARE REV 20decimal OR GREATER, THE
MAINTENANCE MODE FEATURE (ARMS) IS SUPPLIED. THE REVERSE POWER DESELECTIONS FRONT PANEL PROGRAMMABLE ONLY.
16. THE HIGH INSTANTANEOUS MODULE IS SUPPLIED ON MDSX/SPSE BREAKERS AND IS OPTIONAL ON OTHERS. THE MODULE
PROVIDES 50KA HIGH INSTANTANEOUS TRIP.
Effective March 2012
Instructional Leaflet IB2C12063H03
Instructional Leaflet IB2C12063H03 Instructions for Installation, Operation and
Effective March 2012 Maintenance of Magnum SB Insulated Case
Low Voltage Power Circuit Breakers

Accessory Devices
Accessory Viewing Windows
A variety of accessory devices are available for use with
Magnum SB circuit breakers. Unless otherwise stated, they are
all considered optional devices in the sense that they are not
provided as standard on a manually operated circuit breaker.
Available accessories are identified here and discussed in
general terms. For more detailed information and/or installation
instructions, refer to individual instruction leaflets dedicated to
the accessories.
Magnum SB circuit breaker accessories are designed to fit all
frame sizes. The accessories fall into one of three categories:
Plug-in electrical
Internal electrical Figure 60. Through-the-Window Electrical Accessories
Mechanical
Plug-In Electrical Accessories
There are four Magnum SB Plug-In electrical accessories. Three
can be viewed for identification by name and rating through
viewing windows located in the right front of the circuit
breaker (Figure 60). All four are plug-in type and can be factory
installed or field installed using a UL listed kit.
The four Plug-In accessories are:
Shunt Trip (ST)
Spring Release (SR)
Undervoltage Release (UVR)
Auxiliary Switch
Shunt Trip
The shunt trip is an optional device on circuit breakers (Figures
61 and 62). It opens the circuit breaker instantaneously when
Figure 61. Shunt Trip with Cutoff Switch
its coil is energized by a voltage input (Table 7). A total of two
shunt trips can be mounted on a Magnum circuit breaker.
Table 7. Shunt Trip Ratings
Operational
Control Voltage Range Inrush Power j Opening
Voltages 70-110% Consumption Time (ms)
24 Vdc 17-26 Vdc 250 W 35
48 Vdc 34-53 Vdc 250 W 35
110-125 Vdc 77-138 Vdc 450 W 35
220-250 Vdc 154-275 Vdc 450 W 35
110-127 Vac 77-140 Vac 450 VA 35
208-240 Vac 146-264 Vac 450 VA 35

j Required for less than 35 ms

Figure 62. Shunt Trip Switch Installed

48 EATON CORPORATION www.eaton.com

Instructions for Installation, Operation and Instructional Leaflet IB2C12063H03
Maintenance of Magnum SB Insulated Case Effective March 2012
Low Voltage Power Circuit Breakers

Spring Release Undervoltage Release

The spring release is an optional device (Figure 63). It remotely The undervoltage release is an optional device on both
closes the circuit breaker when the coil is energized by a manually and electrically operated circuit breakers (Figure
voltage input (Table 8). The closing spring must be fully charged 64). It opens the circuit breaker when its supply voltage falls
and the trip latch reset (not held in the tripped position) for the to between 35-60% of rated voltage. If the release is not
SR to operate. If these two conditions are not met the close energized to 85% of its supply voltage, the circuit breaker
signal will be ignored until it is removed and re-applied. cannot be closed electrically or manually (Table 10).
An optional Latch Check Switch (LCS) can be installed to Auxiliary Switch
indicate when the circuit breaker is ready to close. Two versions
An auxiliary switch is an optional device providing remote
of the LCS are available.
electrical indication if the circuit breaker is open or closed
The Latch Check Switch wired to the Spring Release will not (Figure 66). Up to 3 auxiliary switches can be mounted in the
permit activation of the Spring Release until the circuit breaker circuit breaker. Each switch has 2 normally open (a) and
is fully charged and the trip latch is reset (Figure 63). If power 2 normally closed (b) contacts for a total of 12 available
is applied and maintained to the Spring Release, an activation contacts (Table 9).
will occur when the circuit breaker is ready to close.
The Latch Check Switch for Remote Indication consists of 1
Form C contact wired to the circuit breaker secondary contacts
for integration into external control schemes. Note that wiring
the LCS for Remote Indication directly in series with the SR
accessory is not recommended as this will override the anti-
pump feature of the electrical charging/closing system.

Figure 64. Undervoltage Release

Figure 63. Spring Release with Optional Latch Switch

Table 8. Spring Release Ratings

Operational
Control Voltage Range Inrush Power j Closing
Voltages 70-110% Consumption Time (ms)
24 Vdc 17-26 Vdc 250 W 40
48 Vdc 34-53 Vdc 250 W 40
110-125 Vdc 77-138 Vdc 450 W 40
220-250 Vdc 154-275 Vdc 450 W 40
110-127 Vac 77-140 Vac 450 VA 40
208-240 Vac 146-264 Vac 450 VA 40

Figure 65. Shunt Trip, Spring Release and Undervoltage Release

j Required for less than 200 ms Installed

EATON CORPORATION www.eaton.com 49

Instructional Leaflet IB2C12063H03 Instructions for Installation, Operation and
Effective March 2012 Maintenance of Magnum SB Insulated Case
Low Voltage Power Circuit Breakers

Figure 66. Auxiliary Switch (2A/2B)

Table 9. Auxiliary Switch, Overcurrent Trip Switch and Cell Switch

Contact Ratings Figure 67. Mechanical Trip Indicator with Associated Overcurrent
Trip Switch
Contact Rating
Control Inductive Load
Voltages (amperes) Internal Electrical Accessories
250 Vac 10 Other electrical accessories are mounted inside the circuit
125 Vdc 0.5 breaker. They can be factory or site installed. There are two
250 Vdc 0.25 different internally mounted accessories:
Overcurrent Trip Switch (Bell Alarm)
Motor Operator
Table 10. Undervoltage Release
Overcurrent Trip Switch (Bell Alarm)
Operational Dropout j k
Control Voltage Range Volts Inrush/Continuous Opening An overcurrent trip switch (bell alarm) is an optional device
Voltages 85-110% 30-60% Power Consumption Time (ms) (Figure 67). It provides an electrical indication when a
24 Vdc j 20-26 Vdc 7-14 Vdc 250 W/18 W 70 circuit breaker trips as a result of the trip unit reacting to an
32 Vdc j 27-35 Vdc 10-19 Vdc 275 W/15 W 70 overcurrent condition. Opening as a result of a circuit breakers
48 Vdc j 41-53 Vdc 14-29 Vdc 275 W/18 W 70
manual open button, shunt trip or undervoltage release
does not cause the overcurrent trip switch to operate. The
110-125 Vdc j 94-138 Vdc 33-75 Vdc 450 W/10 W 70
overcurrent trip switch has (2a 2b) Form C contacts (Table 9).
220-250 Vdc j 187-275 Vdc 66-150 Vdc 450 W/10 W 70
110-127 Vac k 94-140 Vac 33-76 Vac 450 VA/10 VA 70
208-240 Vac k 177-264 Vac 62-144 Vac 400 VA/10 VA 70
380-415 Vac k 323-457 Vac 114-249 Vac 480 VA/10 VA 70
480 Vac k 408-528 Vac 144-288 Vac 400 VA/10 VA 70
600 Vac k 510-660 Vac 180-360 Vac 400 VA/10 VA 70

j Required for 200 ms

k Required for 400 ms

50 EATON CORPORATION www.eaton.com

Instructions for Installation, Operation and Instructional Leaflet IB2C12063H03
Maintenance of Magnum SB Insulated Case Effective March 2012
Low Voltage Power Circuit Breakers
The status of the contacts changes when the trip indicator
pops out. This permits the switch to be used as an alarm or in
conjunction with a spring release to block a subsequent remote
electrical closing signal.
Motor Operator
A Motor operator is an electric motor assembly internally
mounted in the circuit breaker (Figures 68 and 69). It charges
the closing springs electrically for remote or local operation.
The motor operator can be factory or site installed (Table 11).
To convert a manually operated circuit breaker to an electrically
operated circuit breaker, a UL listed motor operator kit is
available.
Table 11. Motor Operator
Operational Maximum
Voltage Running Typical Power Charging
Control j Range Current Inrush Consumption Time
Voltages 85-110% (A. avg.) Current (watts or VA) (seconds)
24 Vdc 20-26 12.0 300% of Running 300 5
48 Vdc 41-53 5.0 500% of Running 250 5
Figure 69. Motor Operator Installed in Narrow Frame Circuit
110-125 Vdc 94-138 2.0 600% of Running 250 5 Breaker
220-250 Vdc 187-225 1.0 600% of Running 250 5
110-127 Vac 94-140 2.0 600% of Running 250 5 Operations
208-240 Vac 177-264 1.0 600% of Running 250 5
Counter

j AC voltages are 50/60Hz

OFF
Key Lock

Figure 70. Cover Mounted Key Lock and Operations Counter

Figure 68. Motor Operator Kit

EATON CORPORATION www.eaton.com 51

Instructional Leaflet IB2C12063H03 Instructions for Installation, Operation and
Effective March 2012 Maintenance of Magnum SB Insulated Case
Low Voltage Power Circuit Breakers

Mechanical Accessories
There are eight optional mechanical type accessories:
Operations Counter
Off Key Lock
Cassette Lock
Pushbutton Cover
Prevent Close Cover
Cassette Safety Shutters
Cassette Cell Switch
Door Escutcheon
Waterproof Cover
Mechanical Interlock
Operations Counter
The operations counter is a mechanical device used to provide
a record of the number of circuit operations. It is mounted in
the lower right portion of the circuit breaker and can be viewed
Figure 71. Cassette Mounted Key Lock
through the front cover (Figure 70).
Off Key Lock Up to three lock cylinders can be installed on one cassette.
The off key lock secures the circuit breaker in the OFF Eaton supplies the lock provisions only. The customer is
position. It is mounted in the lower right portion of the circuit responsible for the locks, which can be Kirk, Castell, Ronis or
breaker and can be viewed through the front cover (Figure 70). CES.
The customer supplies the key lock. The provisions available are Pushbutton Cover
for Kirk, Castell, Ronis or CES.
Padlockable covers are available to limit access to the ON
Cassette Lock and OFF pushbuttons (Figure 72). They can be installed with
A cassette mounted lock can be used in conjunction with either or both pushbutton covers in place.
different interlocking schemes (such as main-tie-main) (Figure Prevent Close Cover
71). The lock holds the circuit breaker trip-free in the connected
position, preventing it from being closed. All access to the ON pushbutton can be prevented by adding
the fixed Prevent Close Cover to the pushbutton cover.
Lockout Cover
When padlocked, it maintains the OFF button in the actuated
position which prevents closure of the breaker.

Figure 72. ON-OFF Pushbutton Lockable Cover Plate

52 EATON CORPORATION www.eaton.com

Instructions for Installation, Operation and Instructional Leaflet IB2C12063H03
Maintenance of Magnum SB Insulated Case Effective March 2012
Low Voltage Power Circuit Breakers

Cassette Safety Shutters Door Escutcheon

Automatically operated insulating type safety shutters are The door escutcheon is a molded frame used to seal the space
available for use with the drawout cassette. When the drawout between the circuit breaker and the compartment door cutout.
circuit breaker is levered from the CONNECT position, the It is supplied with a mounting gasket (Figure 77).
shutters automatically close to cover the fixed primary contacts
(Figure 73). When the circuit breaker is levered into the
cassette, the shutters automatically open permitting primary
connections to be made (Figure 74).

Figure 75. Cell Switch (Drawout Position Indicator) Unmounted

Figure 73. Typical Safety Shutters in Closed Position

Figure 76. Cell Switches Mounted on Cassette

Figure 74. Typical Safety Shutters in Open Position

Cassette Cell Switch

The cassette cell switch is a compartment position switch for
drawout circuit breakers. It is available in a 2a2b or 4a4b con-
tact configuration, and mounts on the right side of the cassette
(Figure 75 and 76). Refer to Table 9 for cell switch contact
information. The cell switch changes status between the TEST
and CONNECT positions. Figure 77. Door Escutcheon and Gasket

EATON CORPORATION www.eaton.com 53

Instructional Leaflet IB2C12063H03 Instructions for Installation, Operation and
Effective March 2012 Maintenance of Magnum SB Insulated Case
Low Voltage Power Circuit Breakers

Figure 78. IP54 Waterproof Cover

IP54 Waterproof Cover

A hinged dome shaped waterproof cover attaches to the metal
compartment door to provide waterproof protection for the
circuit breaker (Figure 78).
Mechanical Interlock
A family of mechanical interlocks are available to interlock
the closing of two or three Magnum SB circuit breakers. The
mechanical interlock holds one or more circuit breakers tripped
(prevents closure) when others are closed. A lever assembly is
mounted on each breaker which interfaces with the pole shaft
and the tripper bar. The lever assemblies are interconnected
with either cables or rods, depending upon the relative
orientation of the breakers. Rods can be used only when the
circuit breakers to be interlocked are vertically stacked. Cables
can be used for any orientation of the breakers. Mechanical
interlocks are available for both fixed and drawout circuit
breakers and in both 2-way and 3-way versions. An illustration
Figure 79. Cassette-Mounted 2-Way Cable Interlock
of a 2-way cable interlock mounted on two drawout circuit
breakers is shown in Figure 79.

54 EATON CORPORATION www.eaton.com

Instructions for Installation, Operation and
Maintenance of Magnum SB Insulated Case
Low Voltage Power Circuit Breakers
Section 4: Drawout Circuit Breaker And
Cassette
General
Section 3 discussed topics and features common to all
Magnum SB circuit breakers, no matter what the mounting
configuration or type. In this section, features unique to
the drawout type circuit breaker and drawout cassette, not
covered elsewhere, are discussed. Drawings and dimensions
associated with all circuit breakers, drawout cassettes and
any appropriate primary bus connections can be found in a
separate document entitled Engineering Data TD01301004E.
The installation and levering of a drawout circuit breaker were
discussed in Section 2. If necessary, review that information,
since it will not be repeated here.
Figure 80. Drawout Circuit Breaker in Cassette
Instructional Leaflet IB2C12063H03
Effective March 2012
Drawout Cassette
A drawout circuit breaker is used in combination with a fixed
drawout cassette (Figures 80 and 82). The drawout circuit
breaker is equipped with automatic primary disconnects
(Figure 81). The cassette provides all of the necessary
interfaces to the drawout circuit breaker including automatic
primary and secondary connections. For the narrow frame
circuit breaker a single cassette style using horizontal stabs
and horizontal customer bus bar terminals is available (Figure
83). For the standard and double-wide circuit breakers three
cassette styles, all with vertical stabs, are available: basic,
standard, and universal. The standard cassette supplies vertical
stab/terminals only (Figure 85). The basic cassette omits the
copper stab/terminals so that these pieces can be integrated
with vertical bus bars provided by the switchgear builder
(Figure 84). The universal cassette provides a set of flat pad
terminals on the rear of the cassette that can be adapted to
vertical, horizontal or front connection (Figures 86). Mounting
locations for cell (TOC) switches, safety shutters, mechanical
interlocks and key interlocks are provided on the cassette.
Figure 81. Drawout Circuit Breaker with Automatic Primary
Disconnects
EATON CORPORATION www.eaton.com 55
Instructional Leaflet IB2C12063H03 Instructions for Installation, Operation and
Effective March 2012 Maintenance of Magnum SB Insulated Case
Low Voltage Power Circuit Breakers

1. Extension Rails 5. Arc Hood

2. Extension Rail Cutout 6. Optional Cell (TOC) Switch Mounting
3. Secondary Plug-in Connectors 7. Optional Key Interlock Mounting Location
4. Secondary Terminal Blocks 8. Grounding Bar

Figure 82. Typical Drawout Cassette Features

56 EATON CORPORATION www.eaton.com

Instructions for Installation, Operation and Instructional Leaflet IB2C12063H03
Maintenance of Magnum SB Insulated Case Effective March 2012
Low Voltage Power Circuit Breakers

Drawout Circuit Breaker Dimensions Drawout Cassette Dimensions

The Magnum SB drawout circuit breaker connects to the fixed
primary stabs of the drawout cassette through the primary
finger clusters attached to the rear of the circuit breaker. Three
different frame sizes cover all Magnum SB circuit breakers from
an overall dimensional standpoint. Circuit breaker drawings can
be found in Engineering Data TD01301004E.
Cassette drawings provide all the dimensional information
required for all mounting configurations and can also be found
in Engineering Data TD01301004E. Review carefully for a
specific installation.

Figure 85. Typical Standard Cassette (Vertical Terminals)

Figure 83. Typical Narrow Frame Cassette (Horizontal Terminals)

Figure 84. Typical Basic Cassette (Without Stabs)

Figure 86. Typical Universal Cassette, 4-Pole (Flat Terminal Pads)

EATON CORPORATION www.eaton.com 57

Instructional Leaflet IB2C12063H03 Instructions for Installation, Operation and
Effective March 2012 Maintenance of Magnum SB Insulated Case
Low Voltage Power Circuit Breakers

Section 5: Fixed Circuit Breaker

General
Section 3 discussed topics and features common to all
Magnum SB circuit breakers, no matter what the mounting
configuration or type. In this section, features unique to Optional
the fixed configuration not covered elsewhere are covered. Vertical
Horizontal Adaptor
Drawings and dimensions associated with all fixed circuit
Connection
breakers and any appropriate primary bus connections can
be found in a separate document entitled Engineering Data
TD01301004E. The installation of a fixed circuit breaker was
discussed in Section 2. If necessary, review that information,
since it will not be repeated here.

WARNING
FAILURE TO COMPLY WITH INSTALLATION OF THE FIXED MOUNTED
SBSE ARC HOOD ASSEMBLY COULD RESULT IN EQUIPMENT
DAMAGE, BODILY INJURY OR EVEN DEATH.
The SBSE fixed mounted breaker is shipped with a factory
installed arc hood assembly. This assembly is required to be
installed on the top of the breaker prior to the unit being placed
in service.
Figure 87. Fixed Circuit Breaker with Available Vertical Adaptor
Fixed Circuit Breaker Dimensions
The standard fixed circuit breaker is supplied with horizontally
mounted primary connections (Figure 87). Optional vertical
primary adaptors are available for different bus configurations.
Refer to Engineering Data TD01301004E for fixed circuit breaker
dimensions, vertical adaptor dimensions and vertical adaptor
assembly details.

58 EATON CORPORATION www.eaton.com

Instructions for Installation, Operation and
Maintenance of Magnum SB Insulated Case
Low Voltage Power Circuit Breakers
Section 6: Inspection And Maintenance
General
WARNING
FAILURE TO INSPECT, CLEAN AND MAINTAIN CIRCUIT BREAKERS
CAN REDUCE EQUIPMENT LIFE OR CAUSE THE EQUIPMENT NOT
TO OPERATE PROPERLY UNDER FAULT CONDITIONS. THIS COULD
RESULT IN EQUIPMENT DAMAGE, BODILY INJURY OR EVEN DEATH.
WARNING
INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES SHOULD BE
CARRIED OUT ONLY BY PERSONNEL FAMILIAR WITH THE HAZARDS
ASSOCIATED WITH WORKING ON POWER CIRCUIT BREAKERS.
ADDITIONALLY, THEY SHOULD BECOME FAMILIAR WITH THE
SPECIFICS ASSOCIATED WITH TYPE MAGNUM DS CIRCUIT
BREAKERS AS PRESENTED IN THIS INSTRUCTION BOOK.
Magnum circuit breakers are Top of the Line equipment. This
means they are manufactured under a high degree of qual-
ity control, with the best available materials and with a high
degree of tooling for accuracy and parts interchangeability.
Design tests and actual installation experience show them to
have durability well beyond minimum standards requirements.
However, because of the variability of application conditions
and the great dependence placed upon these circuit breakers
for protection and the assurance of service continuity, inspec-
tion and maintenance activities should take place on a regularly
scheduled basis.
Since maintenance of these circuit breakers consists mainly of
keeping them clean, the frequency of scheduled inspection and
maintenance depends to some degree on the cleanliness of
the surroundings. Cleaning and preventive measures are a part
of any good maintenance program. Plant operating and local
conditions can vary to such an extent that the actual schedule
should be tailored to the conditions. When the equipment is
subject to a clean and dry environment, cleaning is not required
as frequently as when the environment is humid with a signifi-
cant amount of dust and other foreign matter.
It is recommended that maintenance record sheets be com-
pleted for the equipment. Careful and accurate documentation
of all maintenance activities provides a valuable historical refer-
ence on equipment condition over time.
MAGNUM SB
MAINTENANCE
Instructional Leaflet IB2C12063H03
Effective March 2012
General Cleaning Recommendations
Circuit breaker cleaning activities should be a part of an overall
activity that includes the assembly in which the circuit breaker
is installed. Loose dust and dirt can be removed from external
surfaces using an industrial quality vacuum cleaner and/or lint
free cloth. Unless otherwise indicated, never use high pres-
sure blowing air, since dirt or foreign objects can be driven into
areas, such as the breaker mechanism, where additional fric-
tion sources could create problems. Never use a wire brush to
clean any part of the circuit breaker.
When To Inspect
Do not wait for specific scheduled periods to visually inspect
the equipment, if there are earlier opportunities. If possible,
make a visual inspection each time a circuit breaker compart-
ment door is opened, and especially when a circuit breaker is
withdrawn on its compartment extension rails. This preventive
measure could help to avoid future problems.
Industry standards for this type of equipment recommend a
general inspection and lubrication after the number of opera-
tions listed in Table 12 of this section. This should also be
conducted at the end of the first six months of service, if the
number of operations has not been reached.
Table 12. Inspection Frequency
Intervalj
Breaker Frame Size (Breaker Cycles)
800 amperes and below 1750
Between 800 and 3000 amperes 500
3000 amperes and above 250
j Breaker Cycle = one no load open/close operation
After the first inspection, inspect at least once a year. If these
recommended inspections show no maintenance require-
ments, the period may be extended to a more economical
point. Conversely, if the recommended inspection shows, for
instance, a heavy accumulation of dirt or other foreign mat-
ter that might cause mechanical, insulation or other electrical
damage, the inspection and maintenance interval should be
decreased.
EATON CORPORATION www.eaton.com 59
Instructional Leaflet IB2C12063H03 Instructions for Installation, Operation and
Effective March 2012 MAGNUM SB Maintenance of Magnum SB Insulated Case
PREVENTIVE Low Voltage Power Circuit Breakers
MAINTENANCE MAGNUM
What To Inspect Functional Field Testing
TESTING
What to inspect and to what extent is dictated by the nature of
the maintenance function. Routine inspections require one type NOTICE
of observation. Inspections following a known high level fault BEFORE DOING ANY WORK ON DRAWOUT TYPE CIRCUIT BREAKERS,
require more detailed inspections. MAKE SURE THE BREAKER IS LEVERED OUT TO THE TEST OR
DISCONNECT POSITION. DURING THE LEVERING OUT AND LEVERING
A drawout type circuit breaker should first be withdrawn from IN OF THE CIRCUIT BREAKER, BE AWARE OF ANY SIGNS THAT
its compartment onto the compatments extension rails. When WOULD INDICATE THAT THE LEVERING PROCESS IS NOT WORKING
the inspection is complete, the circuit breaker can be levered PROPERLY. IF WORKING ON A FIXED CIRCUIT BREAKER, BUS
to the TEST position to check the electrical operations of the SYSTEMS SHOULD BE DE-ENERGIZED FOR CONVENIENCE AND
circuit breaker. SAFETY. THE CIRCUIT BREAKER SHOULD BE SWITCHED TO THE OFF
POSITION AND THE MECHANISM SPRINGS DISCHARGED.
During the levering out and levering in of the circuit breaker, be
aware for any signs that would indicate that this process is not Eaton Cutler-Hammer recommends that the following func-
working properly. tional tests be performed on Magnum circuit breakers as part
of any maintenance procedure. The circuit breaker should be
During the inspection of fixed type circuit breakers, bus sys- removed from service and Cutler-Hammer notified if the circuit
tems supplying the fixed circuit breakers should be de-ener- breaker fails to perform any of these tests successfully. Please
gized for convenience and safety. be prepared to provide the number of operations the circuit
For functional testing of the trip unit, refer to the separate breaker has to date as well as the following nameplate informa-
detailed instruction book dedicated to the trip unit. tion (Figure 88):
Once the circuit breaker has been cleaned as described on
the previous page, visually inspect it for any signs of damage,
missing or loose parts and unusual wear. Be especially alert for
foreign matter that must be removed. On drawout circuit break-
ers, inspect the primary disconnect finger clusters for signs
of wear and erosion. Make appropriate corrections to anything
found out of order.
Table 13. Field Service Tool List
Tool Description Where Used
10 mm 1/4-inch drive socket All 6 mm bolts
1/4-inch universal Mechanism mounting
1/4-inch 6-inch drive extension As needed
10 mm combination wrench Primary disconnects
1/4-inch drive ratchet As needed
3/8-inch drive ratchet As needed
3/8-inch 17 mm socket Load conductors
3/8-inch 6-inch extension Levering-in
17 mm combination wrench Load conductors
3/8 drive 8 mm or 5/16 long ball driver Line conductor/arc runner
AMP extraction tool #305183 Secondary contacts
AMP extraction tool #455822-2 Current sensors/shunt trip
#3 Posi-drive screwdriver Levering-in A. Low voltage power circuit breaker family name
#2 Philips screwdriver As needed B. Breaker family designation number
#1 Philips screwdriver As needed C. Breaker frame size in amperes
Long (8-inch) 3/16-inch straight blade Motor operator installation
screwdriver D. Interrupting capacity rating
7/16-inch combination or adj. wrench Motor operator stand-off installation E. Factory Equipped Accessories
1/4-inch straight blade screwdriver Rating plug
Pocket size, straight blade screwdriver Trip unit setting Figure 88. SB Nameplate
Eaton test kit and adapter Digitrip trip unit

It will also be necessary to have a full compliment of standard

field service tools available including, pliers, cutters, soldering
tools, multi-meter, and so on.

60 EATON CORPORATION www.eaton.com

Instructions for Installation, Operation and
Maintenance of Magnum SB Insulated Case
Low Voltage Power Circuit Breakers
Manual Operation Functional Test
Charge the breaker mechanism springs either using the charg-
ing handle or the motor operator. Press the ON pushbutton
to close the breaker manually and verify closing by noting the
state of the indicating flag. Charge the breaker mechanism
springs either using the charging handle or the motor operator.
If using the motor operator, disconnect power to it to prevent
automatic recharging. Press the OFF pushbutton to manually
open the breaker. Press the ON pushbutton to manually close
the breaker. Is the breaker closed? Press the OFF pushbutton
to manually open the breaker. Is the breaker open? Repeat this
entire described test procedure three times.
Electrical Operation Functional Test
This test procedure is based on the assumption that the
breaker is equipped with optional shunt trip, UVR, and/or spring
release accessories. If one accessory is missing, substitute the
manual button to replace the accessorys function.
Charge the breaker mechanism springs either using the charg-
ing handle or the motor operator. Close the breaker by apply-
ing rated voltage to the spring release accessory and verify
closing by noting the state of the indicating flag. Charge the
breaker mechanism springs either using the charging handle
or the motor operator. If using the motor operator, disconnect
power to it to prevent automatic recharging. Open the breaker
by applying rated voltage to the shunt trip accessory or remov-
ing power from undervoltage release. Close the breaker using
the spring release accessory. Is the breaker closed? Open the
breaker using the shunt trip or undervoltage release. Is the
breaker open? Repeat this entire described test procedure
three times.
Trip Unit Overload Functional Test
An overload simulation for trip unit functional testing can be
achieved by using one of the following test methods:
1. Hand-Held Functional Test Kit: Catalog Ordering Number
MTST230V.
2. Simulation Test Kit: Catalog Ordering Number MTK2000.
3. Digitrip 1150 models include an integral functional tester
(see corresponding instruction manual for Magnum 1150 trip
units).
Charge the breaker mechanism springs either using the charg-
ing handle or the motor operator. Press the ON pushbutton
to close the breaker manually and verify closing by noting the
state of the indicating flag. Charge the breaker mechanism
springs either using the charging handle or the motor operator.
MAGNUM
TESTING
EQUIPMENT
Instructional Leaflet IB2C12063H03
Effective March 2012
MAGNUM
TESTING
If using the motor operator, disconnect power to it to prevent
automatic recharging. Trip the breaker with a trip unit test.
Verify that the trip indicator pop out button (if so equipped) is
out and then reset it. Press the ON pushbutton to manu-
ally close the breaker. Is the breaker closed? Trip the breaker
with a trip unit test. Verify that the trip indicator pop out button
(if so equipped) is out and then reset it. Repeat this entire
described test procedure three times. Reset the blinking red
cause of trip LED on the trip unit by pressing the Reset/Battery
Test pushbutton.
Arc Chute Inspection
When a circuit breaker experiences a high level fault or during
regularly scheduled maintenance periods, the circuit breakers
arc chutes and arc chambers should be inspected for any kind
of damage or dirt. Be especially alert for signs of significant
erosion of the V-shaped plates inside the arc chute.
Arc chutes fit inside the arc chambers and down over a the pri-
mary contacts. Each arc chute is held in place by either 1 (SB)
or 4 (SBSE) top inserted screws (Figure 89 shows SBS). Begin
by removing the arc chute screws and all three arc chutes.
Turn each arc chute upside down to visually inspect the inside
(Figure 90).
Since the arc chutes are removed, this is an ideal time to
inspect primary contacts for wear using the circuit breakers
contact wear indicators. The details associated with primary
contact inspection are presented in the next paragraph.
Arc Chute Baffled Cover
Removed
Arc Chamber
Figure 89. Top Rear View of Circuit Breaker with One Arc Chute
Removed
EATON CORPORATION www.eaton.com 61
Instructional Leaflet IB2C12063H03 Instructions for Installation, Operation and
Effective March 2012 Maintenance of Magnum SB Insulated Case
Low Voltage Power Circuit Breakers

WARNING
ARC CHUTES MUST ALWAYS BE SECURED PROPERLY IN PLACE
BEFORE A CIRCUIT BREAKER IS INSTALLED IN A CIRCUIT BREAKER
COMPARTMENT. FAILURE TO DO THIS COULD RESULTS IN
EQUIPMENT DAMAGE, BODILY INJURY OR EVEN DEATH.
When the inspections are complete, position each arc chute
down over its respective set of primary contacts, and secure
in place with the screw removed earlier. Torque the arc chute
screws to 35 to 45 in-lb.
Primary Contact Inspection
With the arc chutes removed, visually inspect each primary
contact structure for signs of wear and/or damage. The primary
Alternating V contacts with the circuit breaker open can be viewed by
Shaped Plates looking directly down into the arc chamber (Figure 91 and 92).
A contact wear indicator is provided for each primary contact
and indicates whether or not the contact should be replaced.
Inspection of the contacts using the contact wear indicators is
conducted only with the circuit breaker closed (Figures 93).

Figure 90. Bottom View of Arc Chute

Figure 92. Contact Inspection Area with Circuit Breaker Open

Figure 91. Primary Contacts with Circuit Breaker Open (Not Used NOTICE
for Contact Wear Inspection)
WHEN MAKING A CONTACT WEAR INSPECTION, ALWAYS MAKE
THE INSPECTION BY LOOKING STRAIGHT DOWN INTO THE ARC
CHAMBER FOR THE PROPER PERSPECTIVE. VIEWING THE CONTACT
WEAR AREA FROM AN ANGLE COULD DISTORT THE VIEW.

62 EATON CORPORATION www.eaton.com

Instructions for Installation, Operation and Instructional Leaflet IB2C12063H03
Maintenance of Magnum SB Insulated Case Effective March 2012
Low Voltage Power Circuit Breakers

The contact wear indicator is the relative position of the indi-
vidual contact fingers to a narrow, side-to-side ledge inside
the arc chamber. The ledge is actually part of the arc chamber.
When the circuit breaker is closed and the contacts are in good
condition, the narrow ledge is covered by the back end of the
contacts (Figure 93). If the back end of the contacts do not
totally cover the ledge, the contacts should be replaced.
WARNING
ARC CHUTES MUST ALWAYS BE SECURED PROPERLY IN PLACE
BEFORE A CIRCUIT BREAKER IS INSTALLED IN A CIRCUIT BREAKER
COMPARTMENT. FAILURE TO DO THIS COULD RESULTS IN
EQUIPMENT DAMAGE, BODILY INJURY OR EVEN DEATH.
Once the inspection is complete, be sure the arc chutes are
properly replaced as previously described on this page.

Figure 93. Use of Contact Wear Indicator with Circuit Breaker Closed

Breaker Frame Inspection

The breaker frame and wiring should be inspected for nicked
wires, for cracks in plastic parts, and for loose screws. Screws
or bolts should be tightened to levels outlined in Table 14.
Loose screws inserted into plastic parts will require thread-lock-
ing compound (such as Loctite 242). All nicked wiring should be
replaced.

EATON CORPORATION www.eaton.com 63

Instructional Leaflet IB2C12063H03 Instructions for Installation, Operation and
Effective March 2012 Maintenance of Magnum SB Insulated Case
Low Voltage Power Circuit Breakers
Table 14. Magnum Breaker Torque List
Opening
Subassembly lb-in Nm Spring
Arc chute 35-45 3.95-5.08 Trip Latch Tip Pivot
Front cover 25-35 2.82-3.95 and Radius
Rating plug Hand tight Hand tight
Rear housing 75-85 8.47-9.60
All Pole
Line conductor (internal) 100-150 11.30-16.95 Shaft
Load conductor (internal) 100-150 11.30-16.95 Bearing
Points
Levering-in to mech bolt Hand tight Hand tight
All Pole
Motor operator 75-85 8.47-9.60 Drive Arms
Poleshaft bearing plates 110-130 12.43-14.69 and Pivots
Current sensor cover screws 18-22 2.03-2.49
Fixed mount feet bolts 75-85 8.47-9.60
Primary disconnect 75-85 8.47-9.60 Trip Latch Axle and Bushings (Not
Visible but Directly Behind This
Trip unit mounting deck 75-85 8.47-9.60 Part). Note: Bushings Must be
Main Drive
Trip unit mounting plate 18-22 2.03-2.49 Loose in Sidesheet.
Pin and Pivot
Secondary bracket 75-85 8.47-9.60
Reject bracket 75-85 8.47-9.60 Figure 94. Magnum DS Lubrication
Mechanism mounting 75-85 8.47-9.60
Terminal adapters 444-516 50.17-58.30

Breaker Mechanism Inspection

Torque values of mechanism and motor mounting hardware Backcatch to
Pole Shaft
should be inspected for accuracy. Refer to Table 14 for the Both Sides
correct values. Next, inspect all sliding rolling parts for clean
and adequate lubrication. Refer to Table 15 and Figure 94
through Figure 101.

Table 15. Greases Used on Magnum

Grease Type Description
MagnalubeT-G
Eaton standards #53701AI Inside
Backcatch
Color Green Pivot
Manufactured by Saunders Enterprises Inc.
11-51 44th Road, Long Island City, New York 11101
Phone (718) 729-1000
Figure 95. Magnum DS Lubrication
Fax (718) 729-2690
www.magnalube.com
MolykoteT
Eaton Standards #53701QB
Color Black
Manufactured by Dow Corning Corporation
Midland, Michigan 48686-0994
(989) 636-1000
www.dowcorning.com/content/molykote/

64 EATON CORPORATION www.eaton.com

Instructions for Installation, Operation and Instructional Leaflet IB2C12063H03
Maintenance of Magnum SB Insulated Case Effective March 2012
Low Voltage Power Circuit Breakers

Swing Arm
Pad

Swing Arm
Path

Lev-in Door
Lev-in Door Indexer
Interlock

Figure 98. Magnum DS Lubrication

Figure 96. Magnum DS Lubrication (Not applicable to Fixed-
Mount Breakers)

Figure 99. Magnum DS Lubrication

Figure 97. Magnum DS Lubrication

EATON CORPORATION www.eaton.com 65

Instructional Leaflet IB2C12063H03 Instructions for Installation, Operation and
Effective March 2012 Maintenance of Magnum SB Insulated Case
Low Voltage Power Circuit Breakers

To remove the rating plug from the trip unit, open the small
rating plug door located on the right side of the trip unit (Figure
102). The trip units battery cavity is also located behind this
door. Use a 1/8 wide screwdriver to remove the M4 screw
holding the rating plug in position. Pull the door to release the
rating plug from the trip unit.

Figure 100. Magnum DS LubricationLevering-in Mechanism

Figure 102. Trip Unit Rating Plug Location

To install a new rating plug, insert the rating plug into the cavity
where the other rating plug was removed. Make sure the three
pins on the rating plug are aligned with the sockets in the
cavity. The rating plug should fit with a slight insertion force.
Figure 101. Magnum DS LubricationLevering-in Mechanism
CAUTION
Circuit Breaker Modifications And Changes TO PREVENT DAMAGE TO THE RATING PLUG, DO NOT FORCE IT INTO
THE MOUNTING CAVITY.
The topics discussed here will relate to those actions that can
be taken in the field to change, update, maintain or repair a Use the same 1/8 screwdriver to tighten the M4 screw and
Magnum SB circuit breaker. This information does not, however, secure the rating plug in the trip unit. The maximum torque on
include most accessory devices. Their installation is covered by the mounting screw is 15 in-oz. Close the rating plug door.
separate instruction leaflets dedicated to the individual devices.
The tasks described here do not, under ordinary circumstances,
require any assistance beyond the appropriate instructional
material. If further assistance is required, however, contact your
Eaton representative.
Rating Plug Replacement
NNote If a rating plug is not installed in the trip unit, the trip
unit will trip when energized. Also remember that the trip units
rating plug and the circuit breakers current sensors must have
matching ratings.

BREAKER
MAGNUM SB
REMOVAL AND
REPLACEMENT
INSTRUCTIONS
66 EATON CORPORATION www.eaton.com
Instructions for Installation, Operation and
Maintenance of Magnum SB Insulated Case
BREAKER MAGNUM REPLACEMENT
Low Voltage Power Circuit Breakers
INSTRUCTIONS
Current Sensor Replacement
NOTICE
REMEMBER THAT THE TRIP UNITS RATING PLUG AND THE CIRCUIT
BREAKERS CURRENT SENSORS MUST HAVE MATCHING RATINGS.
The three current sensors are installed at the rear of the circuit
breaker on the lower terminals. A cover with sensor rating
viewing windows covers the sensors and is held in place
with screws (Figure 103). Remove the cover by removing the
screws.
Current Sensor
Cover
Figure 103. Current Sensor Cover in Place Over Sensors
If the circuit breaker is a drawout configuration, the lower
primary disconnect finger clusters and the vertical adaptors
must first be removed from frame sizes up to 3000A. On the
3000A frame, both the upper and lower primary disconnects
and vertical adaptors must be removed. Each primary
disconnect finger cluster is removed by loosening the two hex-
head bolts with a 10 mm wrench. These bolts do not have to be
completely removed to slide the primary disconnects off of the
terminals. Remove the vertical adaptors next from the circuit
breaker terminals by removing the two or three 10 mm bolts
holding them in place (Figure 104).
Instructional Leaflet IB2C12063H03
Effective March 2012
The current sensors are removed by pulling them off of the
terminals and unplugging the wiring plugs from the sensors
(Figure 104).
Install new current sensors by connecting the wiring plugs
to the sensors and sliding the sensors over the terminals.
Reinstall the cover over the sensors and secure in place with
the screws previously removed.
Reinstall the previously removed vertical adaptors to the
terminals using the removed hardware and 40 ft-lb of tightening
torque. Make sure the vertical adaptors are square to the
rear housing. Slip the primary disconnects on to the vertical
adaptors. Make sure the primary disconnects are fully inserted
on to the vertical adaptors. Tighten the two retention bolts to
40 in-oz of torque. Properly engaged and secured retention
bolts should engage the slots or holes in the vertical adaptors.
Vertical
Adaptor
Current
Sensor
Wiring Plug
Figure 104. One Current Sensor Shown Removed and
Disconnected
EATON CORPORATION www.eaton.com 67
Instructional Leaflet IB2C12063H03 Instructions for Installation, Operation and
Effective March 2012 Maintenance of Magnum SB Insulated Case
Low Voltage Power Circuit Breakers

Section 7: Troubleshooting Circuit breaker makes Closing spring not fully Charge spring manually; check
no attempt to close with charged (check SPRING voltage to electrical operator;
Introduction either local (manual) or CHARGED indicator) replace electrical operator if
remote controls; springs faulty
Table 16 will help to determine the probable causes of simple do not discharge
Unplug undervoltage release
circuit breaker problems and possible corrective actions. If equipped with
undervoltage release, from mounting deck and retry
Possible problems associated with the electronic trip unit closing operation; if OK, check
undervoltage release is
are covered in companion publications, IL70C1037H05 and not energized or is faulty voltage supply to undervoltage
IL70C1036H06. If the problem cannot be resolved with the release (>85%); replace
undervoltage release if faulty
aid of one or both of these guides, contact the Cutler-Hammer Circuit breaker locked in
service center for more in-depth assistance. OPEN position
Check reason for lock
Table 16. Circuit Breaker Troubleshooting Guide Drawout position
interlock is operating; Make sure that circuit breaker
Symptom Probable Cause Corrective Actions levering screw is at a position that permits
The circuit breaker trips open Rating plug not installed Install rating plug that closure; door is open check that
(red fault trip indicator button and load current through corresponds to current sensors shutter (door) over the levering
Circuit breaker screw is fully closed
is out and/or fault indicator LED the breaker interlocked with another
is lighted) when closed on a circuit breaker or device Check for presence of an
Repeated closing on
load current Wait for circuit breaker (and interlocking scheme (cable
transient (in-rush) current
loads) to cool before re-closing interlock or key interlock);
with thermal memory
active check to see if interlocked
Use status and fault indicators circuit breaker is CLOSED
An overload or fault to help locate and remove
current condition Circuit breaker cannot be closed Spring release (closing) Check power supply voltage;
overload or fault condition
remotely (can be closed locally) coil supply voltage low or replace spring release if faulty
spring release faulty
Circuit breaker opens Undervoltage release Check and correct the UVR
Secondary contact wiring Make sure electrical pin and
(fault trip indicator button operates; voltage too low supply voltage (85-110% rated
problem socket connectors are properly
is not out) or zero voltage)
seated in molded plug. Verify
Check control signal(s) to proper wiring
Shunt trip operates shunt trip; correct if necessary
Spring release closing Clear Digitrip 1150 relay
Inspect latch condition and coil signal blocked contact
Trip latch is defective
engagement before closing;
Circuit breaker cannot be closed Opening and/or closing Check reason for lock
consult Cutler-Hammer service
locally (but can be closed pushbuttons locked
center
remotely)
Circuit breaker cannot Shunt trip control signal Check supply voltage exceeds
Circuit breaker does not Charging motor supply Check charging motor electrical
be opened remotely, but absent or too low 70% of rated voltage when
recharge electrically but will voltage absent or too low circuit voltage (check under
can be opened locally signal is applied to shunt trip
recharge manually (<85%) load)
Shunt trip is faulty or Remove front cover; check
Charging motor faulty
improperly installed voltage supplied to shunt Replace charging motor
trip; make sure shunt trip is assembly
seated and retainer snapped
into place. Check for shunt Drawout circuit breaker will not Circuit breaker will not Circuit breaker ratings do not
trip motion; replace shunt lever-in fully enter cell (cell correspond to the cassette
trip if faulty rejection code plate) requirements

Secondary contact wiring Make sure electrical pin and Levering-in screw not
socket connectors are properly in fully DISCONNECT Rotate levering-in screw
problem
seated in molded plug. Verify position at insertion counterclockwise to
proper wiring DISCONNECT position, then
insert breaker fully into
Circuit breaker cannot OPEN pushbutton locked Remove lock Levering-in screw in cassette
be opened locally DISCONNECT position
Faulty mechanism or Contact Cutler-Hammer but not pushed in far Push circuit breaker in as far
main contacts welded service center enough it will go, cover should be
flush with front of cassette
Protective boots covering side plate
stationary disconnects
Remove boots
Shutter jammed or
BREAKER MAGNUM SB locked Clear problem
TROUBLESHOOTING
GUIDE

68 EATON CORPORATION www.eaton.com

Instructions for Installation, Operation and Instructional Leaflet IB2C12063H03
Maintenance of Magnum SB Insulated Case Effective March 2012
Low Voltage Power Circuit Breakers

Section 8: Renewal Parts

General
All renewal parts and/or spare parts recommendations for Type
Magnum SB Circuit Breakers are supplied in separate Renewal
Parts Documentation, not this instruction manual. Refer to
the most recent version of this documentation for specific
assistance.
When ordering parts, always specify, if known, the part name
and style number. If the style number is not known, it would
help to refer to a pictorial and/or graphic reference. Also include
the circuit breaker type, General Order number and other MAGNUM SB
information as shown on the nameplate on the front cover of SPARE PARTS
the circuit breaker (Figures 2 and 20).
Some detailed parts shown in the figures in this manual may
only be available as a part of a sub-assembly. Certain parts may
not be available at all for field installation. Some parts in the
figures are illustrated just to show their function and location
in the assembly. The Renewal Parts Documentation indicates
which parts are available and in what form. For additional
information, visit the Eaton website at www.EatonElectrical.
com.

EATON CORPORATION www.eaton.com 69

Instructional Leaflet IB2C12063H03 Instructions for Installation, Operation and
Effective March 2012 Maintenance of Magnum SB Insulated Case
Low Voltage Power Circuit Breakers

MAGNUM
WARRANTY
INFORMATION

Disclaimer of warranties and limitation of liability

The information, recommendations, descriptions, and safety
notations in this document are based on Eaton Corporations
(Eaton) experience and judgment, and may not cover all
contingencies. If further information is required, an Eaton sales
office should be consulted.
Sale of the product shown in this literature is subject to the terms
and conditions outlined in appropriate Eaton selling policies or
other contractual agreement between Eaton and the purchaser.
THERE ARE NO UNDERSTANDINGS, AGREEMENTS,
WARRANTIES, EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING
WARRANTIES OF FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR
MERCHANTABILITY, OTHER THAN THOSE SPECIFICALLY SET
OUT IN ANY EXISTING CONTRACT BETWEEN THE PARTIES. ANY
SUCH CONTRACT STATES THE ENTIRE OBLIGATION OF EATON.
THE CONTENTS OF THIS DOCUMENT SHALL NOT BECOME
PART OF OR MODIFY ANY CONTRACT BETWEEN THE PARTIES.
In no event will Eaton be responsible to the purchaser or user in
contract, in tort (including negligence), strict liability, or otherwise
for any special, indirect, incidental, or consequential damage
or loss whatsoever, including but not limited to damage or loss
of use of equipment, plant or power system, cost of capital,
loss of power, additional expenses in the use of existing power
facilities, or claims against the purchaser or user by its customers
resulting from the use of the information, recommendations, and
descriptions contained herein.
The information contained in this manual is subject to change
without notice.

Eaton Corporation
Electrical Group
1000 Cherrington Parkway
Moon Township, PA 15108
United States
877-ETN-CARE (877-386-2273)
Eaton.com
Power Chain Management is a registered
2011 Eaton Corporation Trademark of Eaton Corporation
All Rights Reserved
Printed in USA All other Trademarks are property of their
Publication No. IB2C12063H03 respective owners.
March 2012

70 EATON CORPORATION www.eaton.com

SPD SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICE INSTRUCTION MANUAL
Instruction Manual IM01005019E - Rev. 3 Effective April 2010

Eaton SPD Series

Surge Protective Device
For Integrated Units
Instruction Manual IM01005019E - Rev. 3 Eaton SPD Series
Effective April 2010 Surge Protective Device for Integrated Units

Table of Contents

1.0 Introduction ....................................................................................... 1

1.1 Manual Organization ...................................................................1
1.2 Product Overview ....................................................................... 1
1.3 Safety Precautions ...................................................................... 1
1.4 Catalog Numbering System ...................................................... 1
1.5 Equipment Testing ..................................................................... 2

2.0 Installation ........................................................................................ 2

2.1 Preparation for Installation ........................................................ 2
2.2 Installation Locations ................................................................. 2
2.2.1 Direct Bus Mount Applications ......................................... 2
2.2.2 Connected Through a Circuit Breaker Applications ....... 2
2.3 Installation Procedures .............................................................. 2
2.3.1 Direct Bus Mount Applications ......................................... 2
2.3.2 Connected Through a Circuit Breaker Applications ....... 5

3.0 Operating Features .......................................................................... 6

3.1 General ........................................................................................ 6
3.2 Displays and Indicators ............................................................. 6
3.2.1 Basic Feature Package ...................................................... 6
3.2.2 Standard Feature Package ................................................ 7
3.2.3 Standard With Surge Counter Feature Package ............. 7
3.2.4 SPD Display Rotation.......................................................... 8
3.3 Remote Display Panel (RDP) Option ........................................ 8

4.0 Troubleshooting ............................................................................... 8

5.0 Specifications .................................................................................... 10

6.0 Ordering Guidelines ......................................................................... 11

7.0 Warranty ............................................................................................ 12

Eaton is a registered trademark of Eaton Corporation or its subsidiaries and affiliates. National Electric Code and NEC are registered trade-
marks of the National Fire Protection Association. Power Chain Management is a registered trademark of Eaton Corporation, UL is a federally
registered trademark of Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. All other trademarks are property of their respective companies.

B Eaton Corporation www.eaton.com

Eaton SPD Series Instruction Manual IM01005019E - Rev.3
Surge Protective Device for Integrated Units Effective April 2010

1.0 Introduction WARNING

1.1 Manual Organization Arc flash during installation could cause injury. Use
appropriate safety precautions and equipment for arc
This Installation Manual describes the safe installation, testing flash protection.
and operation of the Eaton SPD Series Surge Protective Device
(SPD).
This manual is organized into seven sections, as follows: 1.4 Catalog Numbering System
1.0 Introduction Each Eaton SPD Series unit has a name plate that identifies
the parameters used for manufacture. These parameters are
2.0 Installation
expressed in letters and numbers, to reflect the Series, kA
3.0 Operating Features Rating, Voltage Code, Feature Package, and Application.
4.0 Troubleshooting
Table 1. Catalog Numbering System
5.0 Specifications
6.0 Ordering Guidelines
SPD 250 480D 2 J
7.0 Warranty
1.2 Product Overview
The Eaton SPD Series protects critical electrical and electronic
Series Voltage Code Application
equipment from damage by power surges. This is done by
shunting high energy lightning surges (and other transient dis-
turbances) away from the equipment being protected. It does
this in nanoseconds by providing a low impedance surge path kA Rating Feature Package
to ground while supporting power frequency voltage.
The Eaton SPD Series is designed to mount on Panelboards,
Switchgear, Switchboards, Busway, and Motor Control Centers For example, a 480 volt Delta (3-wire plus Ground) for use in
(MCCs). It is available with surge current capacity ratings from an MCC application requires an SPD model SPD 250480D2J,
50 to 400kA. where:
The Eaton SPD Series is available in three feature pack- SPD = SPD model,
ages (Basic, Standard, and Standard with Surge Counter), as
described in Section 3, "Operating Features." Each model is 250 = the kA rating (50 400 kA),
available in Delta, Wye, and Split Phase wiring configurations. 480D = the voltage,
All Eaton SPD Series models have been tested and certified by 2 = the feature package (Basic, Standard, Standard With Surge
Underwriters Laboratory (UL), to comply with UL Standard Counter), and,
1449, 3rd Edition.
J = the Application Suffix (such as Direct Bus Mounted in a
1.3 Safety Precautions panelboard or Connected Through a Circuit Breaker).
These numbers appear as part of the product label attached to
A licensed/qualified electrician must complete all instructions
the front left side of the SPD. See Figure 1.
in this manual in accordance with the National Electric Code
(NEC), state, and local codes, or other applicable country
codes. All applicable local electrical codes supersede these
instructions.

WARNING
Improper installation could cause death, injury and
equipment damage. Follow all Warnings and Cautions.
Completely read and understand the information in this
instruction manual before attempting to install or oper-
ate this equipment.

Improper wiring could cause death, injury and/or equip-

ment damage. Only licensed/qualified electricians who
are trained in the installation and service of electrical
services are to install and service this equipment.

Hazardous voltages are present inside the SPD during

normal operation. Follow all safe work practices to Figure 1. Product Label
avoid electrical shock.

SPD SURGE
PROTECTIVE
DEVICE SAFETY
PRECAUTIONS
Eaton Corporation www.eaton.com 1
Instruction Manual IM01005019E - Rev. 3 Eaton SPD Series
Effective April 2010
SPD SURGE Surge Protective Device for Integrated Units
PROTECTIVE DEVICE
EQUIPMENT TESTING
1.5 Equipment Testing notice
a poor ground, or grounding/bonding violations, could
prevent the spd from performing as specified.
WARNING
do not use the spd to carry or pass through ground to
CONDUCTING DIELECTRIC, MEGGER, OR HI-POTENTIAL TESTING other devices or leads. Damage to the equipment may
WITH THE SPD INSTALLED WILL CAUSE INTERNAL DAMAGE TO THE result.
spd. THE SPD will also cause the test to fail.
Check the facility grounding system. All grounding, bonding,
Every Eaton SPD Series unit is tested at the factory for dielec- and earthing must meet the NEC and any other national, state
tric breakdown. No further SPD testing is required for installa- and local electrical codes.
tion.
If you desire to test distribution equipment by performing 2.2 Installation Locations
dielectric, megger, or hi-potential tests, any installed SPD must Eaton's SPD Series can be installed directly to the bus for
be disconnected from the power distribution system to prevent Panelboard applications.
damage to the unit.
The SPD can also be connected through a circuit breaker for
Follow this procedure to safely disconnect the SPD: installations in Panelboards, Switchboards, Switchgear, MCCs
and Busway applications.
1. Remove bus connected SPDs completely from the instal- Follow these guidelines to determine the best location for
lation prior to performing any form of hi-potential testing. mounting this product.
2. Isolate SPDs connected via conductors as follows:
2.2.1 Direct Bus Mount Applications
a. 3-wire delta SPDs: Turn off the circuit breaker to Install the SPD on the load side of the main breaker. Connect
isolate the SPD, if connected through a circuit the SPD directly to the bus located as close as possible to
breaker. the main breaker.
b. Wye connected SPDs: Turn off the circuit breaker and
2.2.2 Connected Through a Circuit Breaker Applications
remove the Neutral connection.
3. Remove MCC units with SPDs from the MCC structure.
Install the SPD next to the first breaker after the incoming
main lugs or main breaker.
2.3 Installation Procedures
2.0 Installation
2.3.1 Direct Bus Mount Applications

warning
installing an spd that is improperly rated for the electri-
cal system voltage could create a potentially hazardous
condition, resulting in injury or equipment damage.
2.1 Preparation for Installation
caution
eaton spd series products must be installed or replaced
by a qualified electrician to avoid injury or equipment
damage.
Before installing an Eaton SPD Series unit, do the following:
Verify that the area is clear of any dirt, debris or clutter that
may hamper the installation process.
Verify that there is enough space in the cabinet or MCC to
install the SPD. See Section 2.3, "Installation Procedures" for
dimensions.
Confirm that all tools and equipment needed for the installa-
tion are available.
Confirm that the system voltage and wiring configuration is
the same as the SPD you are installing. Check the voltage
rating label on the front left side of the SPD. See Figure 1.
1. Verify that the SPD you are about to install is rated
for the application voltage and system. See Table 5 in
Section 6, "Ordering Guidelines".
2. Follow all national, state and local electrical codes when con-
necting the SPD.
3. Before mounting the SPD, first determine the bus bar con-
figuration. If the panelboard uses an offset B-Phase bus bar
configuration, no action is required. If the panelboard uses a
coplanar bus bar configuration, remove the bus bar
extension bushing from the back of the SPD and discard.
See Figure 2.
4. Mount the SPD to the support brackets (customer supplied)
using #10 fasteners and tighten to 4.1 Nm (36 in-lbs). See
Figures 4 and 5 for mounting details.
5. Install the bus mount fasteners and tighten to 4.1 Nm (36
in-lbs). See Figure 3.

warning
turn off the power supply before working in any electri-
cal cabinet or on any circuit breaker panel. failure to do
so could result in injury or death from electrical shock. Figure 2. Bus Bar Extension Bushing
2 Eaton Corporation www.eaton.com

OPERATOR PRESTART SPD SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICE

Eaton SPD Series Instruction Manual IM01005019E - Rev.3
Surge Protective Device for Integrated Units Effective April 2010

6. Select the correct wiring diagram for the SPD you are install-
ing. You must refer to this diagram while wiring the SPD.
See Figures 6, 7, 8, and 9, on page 4.

Figure 3. Bus Connection

3X .221
BUS MTG
MOUNTING 8.80 [223.5]
4X MTG .19 [4.8] 4.40 [111.8]
BUS .34 [8.5] .04 [1.0] 2.015 [51.2] 2.015 [51.2]

.95 [24.0]

5.40 [137.0]
MTG 3.42 [86.9]
4.66 [118.4]
3.42 [86.9]

2.52 [64.0] .26 [6.7] 3.42 [86.9] 4X .218 MOUNTING

3.45 [87.7] TERMINALS 8.74 [222.0]
4X #10-32 X .38 DP
9.50 [241.3] BRASS TERMINALS

Figure 4. Dimensions for 50-200kA Units

MOUNTING 8.80 [223.5]

4X MTG 2.52 [63.9] 3.42 [86.9]

3.42 [86.9]
MTG 3.42 [86.9]
5.40 [137.0]
4.66 [118.4]

1.71 [43.5]

4.85 [123.1] 4X .218 MOUNTING

TERMINALS 8.74 [222.0]
5.78 [146.8] 9.50 [241.3] 4X #10-32 X .38 DP
BRASS TERMINALS

Figure 5. Dimensions for 250-400kA Units

Eaton Corporation www.eaton.com 3

Instruction Manual IM01005019E - Rev. 3 Eaton SPD Series
Effective April 2010 Surge Protective Device for Integrated Units

Figure 6. Wiring - Single Phase Units (230 L) Figure 8. Wiring - 3-Phase Delta Units

Figure 7. Wiring - Split Phase Units

Figure 9. Wiring - 3-Phase Wye Units

SPD SURGE
PROTECTIVE
DEVICE WIRING
AND CONTROL
DIAGRAMS

4 Eaton Corporation www.eaton.com

Eaton SPD Series Instruction Manual IM01005019E - Rev.3
Surge Protective Device for Integrated Units Effective April 2010

9. The SPD (Standard and Standard with Surge Counter mod-

els) also has an available connection for remote monitoring
of the Form C relay contacts. See Figure13. This is a green
connector located on the side of the SPD. To make the con-
nection, remove the green connector and install the remote
monitor leads (connector supports 12-24AWG wire). Fasten
the remote monitoring wires to the N.O., N.C and COM con-
nection points per the label on the front of the SPD. Contacts
are rated: 150 Vac or 125 Vdc at 1A. Follow all national, state
and local electrical codes. With wiring complete, plug the
green connector into the SPD.

Figure 10. Wiring - High Leg Delta Units

NNote: Please consult the factory for 240 delta high leg (4W+G) applica-
tions with high leg on the 'C' Phase.
7. Connect the System Ground wire (green) to the SPDs
Surge Ground connection using a ring terminal suitable
for use with a #10 fastener and a #10-32 x 3/8" fastener
(customer supplied). Tighten the Surge Ground connection Figure 13. Form C Connection
to 4.1 Nm (36 in-lbs). If the system uses an isolated ground,
connect the isolated ground wire to Surge Ground. There 10. Install the dead-front panel to complete the installation.
are two Surge Ground connection points provided on the
SPD. Connect only one of them. See Figure11.
2.3.2 Connected Through a Circuit Breaker Applications

1. Verify that the SPD you are about to install is rated for
the application voltage and system. See Table 5 in Section 6,
"Ordering Gidelines".
2. Follow all national, state and local electrical codes when
connecting the SPD.
3. Mount the SPD to the support brackets (customer sup-
plied) using #10 x 2-3/4" fasteners and tighten to 4.1 Nm
(36 in-lbs). For 50-200kA models, see Figure 4 for mount-
ing dimensions. For 250-400kA models, see Figure 5 for
mounting dimensions. Note: Mount the SPD as close as
possible to the circuit breaker.
Figure 11. Ground Connection 4. Determine the wire length required to connect to the
breaker and cut Phase wires to the appropriate length.
(To maximize SPD performance, wire length should be
8. If equipped, connect the System Neutral wire (grey or as short as possible). Note: For wire lengths longer than
white) to the SPD. Connect the System Neutral wire to the 4", Phase wires should be twisted once for each 4" of
SPDs Neutral connection using a ring terminal suitable for wire length to maximize SPD performance.
use with a #10 fastener and a #10-32 x 3/8" fastener (cus-
tomer supplied). Tighten the Neutral connection to 4.1 Nm 5. Connect Phase wire to circuit breaker. See Figure 14, and
(36 in-lbs). There are two Neutral connection points provided the wiring diagrams shown in Figures 6, 7, 8 and 9.
on the SPD. Connect only one of them. See Figure 12.

Figure 12. Neutral Connection Figure 14. Phase Connections

Eaton Corporation www.eaton.com 5

Instruction Manual IM01005019E - Rev. 3 Eaton SPD Series
Effective April 2010 Surge Protective Device for Integrated Units

6. Connect the System Ground wire (green) to the SPDs 2. Connect the RDP cable to the SPD. Use tie wraps
Surge Ground connection using a ring terminal suitable (already on the SPD) to secure the cable to the
for use with a #10 fastener and #10-32 x 3/8" fastener SPD. See Figure 16. Cable can be routed as a right
(customer supplied). Tighten the Surge Ground connec- or left dress.
ion to 4.1 Nm (36 in-lbs). If the system uses an isolated
ground, connect the isolated ground wire to Surge
Ground. There are two Surge Ground connection points
provided on the SPD. Connect only one of them. See
Figure 11.
7. If equipped, connect the System Neutral wire (grey or
white) to the SPD. Connect the System Neutral wire to
the SPDs Neutral connection using a ring terminal suit
able for use with a #10 fastener and a #10-32 x 3/8" fas-
tener (customer supplied). Tighten the Neutral connec-
tion to 4.1 Nm (36 in-lbs). There are two Neutral connection
points provided on the SPD. Connect only one of them.
See Figure 12.
Figure 16. RDP to SPD Connection
8. The SPD (Standard and Standard with Surge Counter
models) also has a connection available for remote
monitoring of the Form C relay contacts. See Figure 14. 3. Connect the RDP cable to the display. Use tie wraps
This is a green connector located on the side of the SPD. (already on the RDP) to secure the cable to the
To make the connection, remove the green connector RDP. See Figure 17.
and install the remote monitor leads (connector supports
12-24 AWG wire). Fasten the remote monitoring wires to
the N.O., N.C. and COM connection points per the label
on the front of the SPD. Contacts are rated: 150 Vac or
125 Vdc at 1A. Follow all national, state and local electrical
codes. With wiring complete, plug the green connector into
the SPD.
9. The final step of the SPD installation depends on the spe-
cific application. The various applications are listed below
by catalog suffix.
a. Suffix 'B': This is the Remote Display Panel (RDP)
option. The RDP option requires the addition of a fac-
tory supplied RDP cable. See Section 3.3, "Remote
Display Panel (RDP) Option" for Cable Catalog num-
bers.
1. Install the RDP using cutout and mounting dimen-
sions provided in Figure 15.

Figure 17. RDP Cable to Display Connection

b. Suffix 'C': This unit is intended for use in Panelboard,

Switchboard, and Busway applications.
1. Ensure that the dead-front or door has the appro-
priate cut-out to accommodate the SPD Display.
See Figure 4 or Figure 5.
2. Install dead-front or door and secure.
c. Suffix 'J': This unit is intended for MCC applications
that require a NEMA 12 enclosure rating.
1. Ensure that the MCC bucket door has the appro-
priate cut-out to accommodate the SPD Display.
See Figure 4 or Figure 5.
2. Place an appropriate NEMA 12 rated gasket around
the Display opening on the inside of the door.
3. Install the door and secure.

Figure 15. RDP Cutout and Mounting

6 Eaton Corporation www.eaton.com

Eaton SPD Series Instruction Manual IM01005019E - Rev.3
Surge Protective Device for Integrated Units Effective April 2010

3.0 Operating Features 3.2.2 Standard Feature Package

3.1 General The Eaton SPD Series Standard Feature Package display is
shown in Figure 19.
The Eaton SPD Series comes in three feature packages: Basic,
Standard, and Standard with Surge Counter. The operating spe-
cifics of each feature package are described below.
The Eaton SPD Series requires no operator involvement, other
than to monitor the display panel to determine status of the
SPD.
After system power is applied, the SPD automatically begins
protecting downstream electrical equipment from voltage tran-
sients.
Some SPD units have a Form C relay contact that allows for the
remote indication of SPD status. Form C contact wires are con-
nected via a three terminal connector. See Figure 13.

3.2 Displays and Indicators

All Eaton SPD Series units (Basic, Standard, and Standard With
Surge Counter) use a display panel to indicate system status.
The display panel is slightly different for each feature package.
Each display has both green and red light emitting diodes
(LEDs) to indicate the status of the protection on each phase.
Green indicates the phase is fully protected. Red indicates a
loss of protection. Wye, Split Phase and High-Leg Delta units
have an additional set of green/red LEDs to indicate status of
Neutral/Ground protection.
When the LEDs turn red, an audible alarm will also sound on
units equipped with an audible alarm.
Specific operating conditions displayed for each Eaton SPD
Series Feature Package are described below.
3.2.1 Basic Feature Package
The Eaton SPD Basic Feature Package display is shown in
Figure 18.
Figure 19. Standard Feature Package Display
The Standard Feature Package has the following features:
All features of the Basic Feature Package.
One Form C relay contact rated at 150Vac or 125Vdc @1A.
Normal operating conditions. N.O. = OPEN. N.C =
CLOSED.
Loss of protection on any phase or loss of power. N.O. =
CLOSED. N.C. = OPEN.
Audible alarm with Reset push button.
EMI/RFI filtering.
3.2.3 Standard With Surge Counter Feature Package
The Eaton SPD Series Standard With Surge Counter Feature
Package display is shown in Figure 20.

Figure 18. Basic Feature Package Display

Figure 20. Standard With Surge Counter Feature Package
The Basic Feature Package has the following features: Display

The Standard With Surge Counter Feature Package has the fol-
Green LEDs: Illumination indicates the phase is fully pro-
lowing features:
tected, and operating normally, with all protection active and
available. Green LEDs also indicate Neutral to Ground protec- All features of the Standard Feature Package.
tion on units with a Neutral wire. Green LEDs do not indicate LCD screen that displays surge count.
on/off status of power.
Reset button to RESET the surge counter to zero.
Red LEDs: Illumination indicates a loss of protection, and
that one or more protective devices are now inactive and
unavailable for that Phase. Red LEDs also indicate Neutral to
Ground protection on units with a Neutral wire. Red LEDs do
not indicate on/off status of power.

Eaton Corporation www.eaton.com 7

Instruction Manual IM01005019E - Rev. 3 Eaton SPD Series
Effective April 2010 Surge Protective Device for Integrated Units

3.2.4 SPD Display Rotation
The SPD display can be rotated on the SPD enclosure, up to 360
degrees. This allows you to position the display for the best vis-
ibility regardless of the position in which the SPD is installed.
Rotations are at 90, 180, and 270 degrees.
For a typical horizontal mounting see Figure 21. For a typical ver-
tical mounting see Figure 22.
Reposition the SPD display as follows:
1. Remove power from the unit.
2. Remove and discard the perforated overlay material at the
two opposite corners of the display.
3. Remove the two phillips head screws that hold the display.
4. Rotate the display to the desired position. Be careful not to
overstress the display ribbon cable.
5. Place the display back onto the SPD enclosure. Again, be
careful not to overstress or crimp the ribbon cable.
6. Replace the two phillips head screws. Tighten screws to
1.35 Nm (12 in-lbs).
7. Restore power to the unit.
3.3 Remote Display Panel (RDP) Option
The Eaton Series SPD displays may be monitored on a remote
display panel (RDP). This is indicated by the catalog style with a
'B' suffix (such as SPD250480D2B).
A separately purchased RDP cable is required to connect the
SPD unit to the display.
Table 2 lists these cables and their part numbers.
Table 2. RDP Cable Options
Description Catalog No.
4 ft. Cable for RDP SPDRDCAB04
8 ft. Cable for RDP SPDRDCAB08
12 ft. Cable for RDP SPDRDCAB12
4.0 Troubleshooting
Many SPD failures result from improper installation. Once the
SPD is installed properly, it is a highly reliable unit.
If the SPD does not function properly, first confirm that it is
installed properly. See Section 2, Installation.
If the SPD malfunctions after it has been operating routinely,
refer to Table 3. This Troubleshooting Chart identifies possible
causes and solutions to the malfunction. Further assistance
may be obtained by calling Eatons Applications Engineers, at
1-800-809-2772, option 4, sub-option 2, including being directed
to the warranty process if applicable.

SPD SURGE
PROTECTIVE DEVICE
TROUBLESHOOTING
Figure 21. Typical Horizontal Display Mounting GUIDE

Figure 22. Typical Vertical Display Mounting

8 Eaton Corporation www.eaton.com

Eaton SPD Series Instruction Manual IM01005019E - Rev.3
Surge Protective Device for Integrated Units SPD Effective April 2010

NORMAL
Table 3. Troubleshooting Chart OPERATION
Condition Probable Cause Solution

Green LEDs ON (1 per phase) and one Green LED ON for Normal operation N/A.
Neu/Gnd Protection
Audible Alarm OFF, Form C (N.C.) contact in the CLOSED Normal operation N/A.
state
Phase Green LED is OFF, same Phase Red LED is ON, Phase protection compromised or lost Replace SPD
Audible Alarm is ON
Extended Temporary Overvoltage (TOV) Check electrical system for TOV sources, correct,
replace SPD
Significant surge event
Replace SPD
Neu/Gnd Green LED is OFF, Neu/Gnd Red LED is ON, Neu/Gnd protection is compromised or lost Replace SPD
Audible Alarm is ON (for models with Neutral connections)
Significant surge event Replace SPD
All phase Green LEDs OFF, all phase RED LEDs ON, All phase protection is compromised or lost Replace SPD
Audible Alarm is ON
SPD rated voltage is less than system voltage Replace SPD with correct voltage model

Extended Temporary Overvoltage (TOV) Check electrical system for TOV sources, correct,
replace SPD
Significant surge event
Replace SPD

One of the display Red LEDs is ON. Audible Alarm is OFF
All Green and Red LEDs are OFF, LCD display (on Surge
Counter models) is OFF
Audible Alarm Silence button has been depressed and
Alarm is silenced
SPD is not connected to a power source
Normal operation
If power is cycled and a fault condition still exists, the
Audible Alarm will reactivate
Check system voltage at SPD connection
Check SPD connections

Eaton Corporation www.eaton.com 9

Instruction Manual IM01005019E - Rev. 3 Eaton SPD Series
Effective April 2010 Surge Protective Device for Integrated Units

5.0 Specifications
Table 4. Specifications

Description Specification

Surge current capacity per phase 50, 80, 100, 120, 160, 200, 250, 300, 400 kA ratings available

Nominal discharge current (In) 20kA

Short circuit current rating (SCCR) 200kA

SPD Type Basic feature package = Type 1 (can also be used in Type 2 applications)
Standard and Standard with Surge Counter feature packages = Type 2
Standard split phase voltages available 120/240
Single phase 230
Three phase wye system voltages available 120/208, 127/220, 230/400, 277/480, 347/600
Three phase delta system voltages 240, 480, 600
Three phase high leg delta system voltages 120/240
Input Power Frequency 50/60 Hz
Power consumption (Basic units)
208Y, 220Y, 230L, 240S, 240D, and 240H voltage codes 0.5W
400Y and 480Y and 480D voltage codes 1.1W
600Y and 600D voltage codes 1.3W
Power consumption (Standard and Standard with Surge Counter units)
208Y, 220Y, 230L, 240S, 240D, and 240H voltage codes 0.6W
400Y, 480Y, and 480D Basic voltage codes 1.7W
600Y and 600D voltage codes 2.1W
Protection modes Single split phase .....................L-N, L-G, N-G, L-L
Single phase .............................L-N, L-G, N-G
Three phase Wye...................... L-N, L-G, N-G, L-L
Three phase delta......................L-G, L-L
Three phase high leg delta........L-N, L-G, N-G, L-L
Maximum continuous operating voltage (MCOV)
208Y, 220Y, 240S, 240D, and 240H voltage codes 150 L-N,150 L-G, 150 N-G, 300 L-L
230L, 400Y and 480Y voltage codes 320 L-N, 320 L-G, 320 N-G, 640 L-L
600Y voltage code 420 L-N, 420 L-G, 420 N-G, 840 L-L
240 D voltage code 320 L-G, 320 L-L
480 D voltage code 640L- L-G, 640 L-L
600D voltage code 840 L-G, 840 L-L
Ports 1
Operating temperature -40 through 50 C (-40 through 122 F)
Operating humidity 5% through 95%, non-condensing
Operating altitude Up to 16,000 ft (5000 m)
Seismic withstand capability Meets or exceeds the requirements specified in the IBC 2006, CBC 2007, and UBC Zone 4
Weight 50-200kA - Approximately 1.6 kg (3.5 lbs) 250 - 400kA - Approximately 3.2kg (7.0 lbs)
Form C relay contact ratings 150 Vac or 125 Vdc, 1A maximum
Form C relay contact loogic Power on, normal state - NO contact = OPEN, NC contact = CLOSED
Power off, fault state, - NO contact = CLOSED, NC contact = OPEN
EMI/RFI filtering attenuation (Standard and Standard With Surge Counter Up to 50 dB from 10 kHz to 100 MHz
Agency certifications and approvals UL1449 3rd Edition recognized component for the US and Canada, UL1283 (Type 2 SPDs only)
Warranty 10 Years

10 Eaton Corporation www.eaton.com

Eaton SPD Series Instruction Manual IM01005019E - Rev.3
Surge Protective Device for Integrated Units Effective April 2010

6.0 Ordering Guidelines

Table 5. Eaton SPD Series

SPD 250 480D 2 J

SPD
kA Rating
Voltage Code
Options
50kA Per Phase Options
80kA Per Phase Integrated Units
100kA Per Phase 240S = 120/240 Split Phase
120kA Per Phase 208Y = 120/208 Wye (4W + G)
160kA Per Phase 220Y = 127/220 Wye (4W + G)
200kA Per Phase 400Y = 230/400 Wye (4W + G)
250kA Per Phase 480Y = 277/480 Wye (4 W + G)
300kA Per Phase 600Y = 347/600 Wye (4W + G)
400kA Per Phase 240D = 240 Delta (3W + G)
480D = 480 Delta (3 W + G)
600D = 600 Delta (4W + G)
240H = 240 Delta High Leg (4W + G) on 'B' Phase
230L = 230 Single Phase
NOTE: Please consult the factory for 240 Delta HIgh
Leg (4W+G) applications with high leg on 'C' Phase

Feature Package Application Suffix

Options Options
1 = Basic. Integrated Units
Dual colored LED per Phase to indicate Protection status
Dual colored LED to indicate protection status of the N-G Mode on A = Panelboards, Direct Bus Mounted
units with a Neutral Wire B = Switchgear (Includes remote display panel & mounting hardware). Order cable
2 = Standard. separately
Dual colored LED Per Phase to indicate Protection Status C = Panelboards, Switchboards, Busway
Dual colored LED to indicate Protection Status of the N-G Mode on J = Motor Control Centers
units with a Neutral Wire
Audible alarm with Silence button NOTE: Units used in Panelboard applications are available in
Form 'C' Relay Contact. See Table 4 Specifications 50 200kA ratings only
EMI/RFI filtering Providing up to 50dB of Noise Attenuation from NOTE: Use the 'C' option for Panelboard Applications when
10KHz to 100Mhz unit is connected through a Circuit Breaker
3 = Standard With Surge Counter
Dual colored LED Per Phase to indicate Protection Status
Dual colored LED to indicate Protection Status of the N-G Mode on
units with a Neutral Wire
Audible alarm with Silence button
Form 'C' Relay Contact
EMI/RFI filtering Providing up to 50dB of Noise Attenuation from
10kHz to 100Mhz
Surge Counter with Reset Button

Example: SPD 250480D2J = SPD Series, 250kA Per Phase, 480D Voltage, Standard Feature Package, Motor Control Center Application.

Eaton Corporation www.eaton.com 11

Instruction Manual IM01005019E - Rev. 3 Eaton SPD Series
Effective April 2010 Surge Protective Device for Integrated Units

7.0 Warranty
Eaton warrants these products for a period of 10 years from the
date of delivery to the purchaser to be free from defects in both
workmanship and materials. Eaton assumes no risk or liability
for results of the use of the products purchased from it, includ-
ing but without limiting the generality of the foregoing: (1) The
use in combination with any electrical or electronic components, SPD WARRANTY
circuits, systems, assemblies, or any other materials or sub- INFORMATION
stances; (2) Unsuitability of any product for use in any circuit or
assembly.
Purchasers rights under the warranty shall consist solely of
requiring Eaton to repair, or at Eaton's sole discretion, replace,
free of charge, F.O.B. factory, and defective items received at
said factory within said term determined by Eaton to be defec-
tive. The giving of or failure to give any advice or recommenda-
tions by Eaton shall not constitute any warranty by or impose
any liability upon Eaton. The foregoing constitutes the sole and
exclusive liability of Eaton AND IS IN LIEU OF ANY AND ALL
OTHER WARRANTIES EXPRESSED, IMPLIED OR STATUTORY
AS TO THE MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR PURPOSE
SOLD, DESCRIPTION, QUALITY, PRODUCTIVENESS OR ANY
OTHER MATTER.
In no event shall Eaton be liable for special or consequential
damages or for delay in performance of the warranty.

This warranty does not apply if the product has been misused,
abused, altered, tampered with, or used in applications other
than specified on the nameplate. At the end of the warranty
period, Eaton shall be under no further warranty obligation
expressed or implied.
The product covered by this warranty certificate can only be
repaired or replaced by the factory. For help on troubleshoot-
ing the SPD, or for warranty information, call 1-800-809-2772,
Option 4, sub-option 2. Repair or replacement units will be
returned collect. If Eaton finds the return to be a manufacturers
defect, the product will be returned prepaid. SPD
REPLACEMENT
INSTRUCTION

12 Eaton Corporation www.eaton.com

Eaton SPD Series Instruction Manual IM01005019E - Rev.3
Surge Protective Device for Integrated Units Effective April 2010

Notes

Eaton Corporation www.eaton.com 13

Instruction Manual IM01005019E - Rev. 3 Eaton SPD Series
Effective April 2010 Surge Protective Device for Integrated Units

Copyright 2010 by Eaton Corporation, Moon Township, PA, USA. All rights reserved. No part
of this document may be reproduced in any way without the express written approval of Eaton
Corporation.

Specifications contained herein are subject to change without notice.

EATON CORPORATION - CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY NOTICE TO PERSONS

RECEIVING THIS DOCUMENT AND/OR TECHNICAL INFORMATION IN THIS DOCUMENT,
INCLUDING THE DRAWING AND INFORMATION CONTAINED THEREON, IS CONFIDENTIAL
AND IS THE EXCLUSIVE PROPERTY OF EATON CORPORATION, AND IS MERELY ON LOAN
AND SUBJECT TO RECALL BY EATON AT ANY TIME. BY TAKING POSSESSION OF THIS
DOCUMENT, THE RECIPIENT ACKNOWLEDGES AND AGREES THAT THIS DOCUMENT
CANNOT BE USED IN ANY MANNER ADVERSE TO THE INTERESTS OF EATON, AND THAT
NO PORTION OF THIS DOCUMENT MAY BE COPIED OR OTHERWISE REPRODUCED
WITHOUT THE PRIOR WRITTEN CONSENT OF EATON. IN THE CASE OF CONFLICTING
CONTRACTUAL PROVISIONS, THIS NOTICE SHALL GOVERN THE STATUS OF THIS
DOCUMENT.

DISCLAIMER OF WARRANTIES AND LIMITATION OF LIABILITY

The information, recommendations, descriptions and safety notations in this document

are based on Eaton Corporation's ("Eaton") experience and judgment and may not cover all
contingencies. If further information is required, an Eaton sales office should be consulted.
Sale of the product shown in this literature is subject to the terms and conditions outlined
in appropriate Eaton selling policies or other contractual agreement between Eaton and the
purchaser. THERE ARE NO UNDERSTANDINGS, AGREEMENTS, WARRANTIES, EXPRESSED
OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING WARRANTIES OF FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR
MERCHANTABILITY, OTHER THAN THOSE SPECIFICALLY SET OUT IN ANY EXISTING
CONTRACT BETWEEN THE PARTIES. ANY SUCH CONTRACT STATES THE ENTIRE
OBLIGATION OF EATON. THE CONTENTS OF THIS DOCUMENT SHALL NOT BECOME PART
OF OR MODIFY ANY CONTRACT BETWEEN THE PARTIES.

In no event will Eaton be responsible to the purchaser or user in contract, in tort (including neg-
ligence), strict liability or otherwise for any special, indirect, incidental or consequential damage
or loss whatsoever, including but not limited to damage or loss of use of equipment, plant or
power system, cost of capital, loss of power, additional expenses in the use of existing power
facilities, or claims against the purchaser or user by its customers resulting from the use of the
information, recommendations and descriptions contained herein.

Eaton Corporation
Electrical Group
1000 Cherrington Parkway
Moon Township, PA 15108
United States
1-800-809-2772, option 4, sub-option 2
Eaton.com

2010 Eaton Corporation PowerChain Management is a registered

All Rights Reserved trademark of Eaton Corporation.
Printed in USA
Publication No. IM01005019E TBG000335 All other trademarks are property of their
April 2010 respective owners.
DIGITRIP RMS 520M LSIG INSTRUCTIONS
Instructional Leaflet IL70C1037H05 Effective October 2009

Digitrip models 520, 520i; and 520M, 520Mi,

520MC, 520MCi trip units for use only in
Magnum and Magnum DS circuit breakers
m WARNING
DO NOT ATTEMPT TO INSTALL OR PERFORM
MAINTENANCE ON EQUIPMENT WHILE IT IS
ENERGIZED. DEATH OR SEVERE PERSONAL INJURY
CAN RESULT FROM CONTACT WITH ENERGIZED
EQUIPMENT. ALWAYS VERIFY THAT NO VOLTAGE IS
PRESENT BEFORE PROCEEDING. ALWAYS FOLLOW
SAFETY PROCEDURES. EATON IS NOT LIABLE FOR
THE MISAPPLICATION OR MISINSTALLATION OF
ITS PRODUCTS.

m WARNING
OBSERVE ALL RECOMMENDATIONS, NOTES,
CAUTIONS, AND WARNINGS RELATING TO THE
SAFETY OF PERSONNEL AND EQUIPMENT. OBSERVE
AND COMPLY WITH ALL GENERAL AND LOCAL HEALTH
AND SAFETY LAWS, CODES, AND PROCEDURES.

NNote: The recommendations and information contained

herein are based on experience and judgement, but
should not be considered to be all inclusive or to cover
every application or circumstance that may arise.
If you have any questions or need further
information or instructions, please contact
your local Eaton representative or visit
www.eaton.com.
DIGITRIP RMS
520M LSIG
SAFETY
PRECAUTIONS
Instructional Leaflet IL70C1037H05
Effective October 2009
Contents
Description Page
List of figures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
List of tables. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Section 1: General description of Digitrip trip units . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Protection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Mode of trip and status information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Installation and removal. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Wiring. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Plexiglass cover. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Ground Alarm/Power Supply Module (520M/MC models only) . 9
Display feature (520M and 520MC only). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Standards. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Section 2: General description of Magnum circuit breakers. . . . . 11
General. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Low-energy trip actuator. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Ground fault protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Current sensors (Magnum standard frames). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Current sensors (Magnum double-wide frames). . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Section 3: Principles of operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
General. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Trip and operation indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Making Current Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Zone interlocking. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Section 4: Protection settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
General. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Long delay current setting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Long delay time setting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Short delay current setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Short delay time setting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Instantaneous current setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Ground fault current setting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Ground fault time delay setting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
INCOM (Digitrip 520MC models only). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
2 eaton corporation www.eaton.com
Digitrip models 520, 520i; and 520M, 520Mi,
520MC, 520MCi trip units for use only in
Magnum and Magnum DS circuit breakers
Description Page
Section 5: Test procedures. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
General. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
When to test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Functional field testing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Performance testing for ground fault trip units
primary injection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Section 6: Trip unit battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
General. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Battery check. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Battery installation and removal. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Section 7: Frame ratings (sensor ratings
and rating plugs) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Section 8: Record keeping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Section 9: References. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Magnum and Magnum DS circuit breakers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Time-current curves. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Section 10: Digitrip 520MC with
Maintenance Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
General. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Maintenance Mode settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Arming Maintenance Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Remote indicator. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Choosing the reduction setting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Tripping and testing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Appendix A: Zone interlocking examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Appendix B: Troubleshooting guide. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Appendix C: Typical breaker master connection diagram. . . . . . . 37
Appendix D: Modbus translator wiring. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Digitrip models 520, 520i; and 520M, 520Mi,
520MC, 520MCi trip units for use only in
Magnum and Magnum DS circuit breakers
List of figures
Description Page
Figure 1. Digitrip 520MC Trip Unit with Rating Plug. . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Figure 2. Installation of the Digitrip Unit into a Magnum Breaker
(Side View). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Figure 3. Installation of the Rating Plug and Mounting Screw. . . . 9
Figure 4. Ground Alarm/Power Supply Module for the
520M or 520MC Trip Units. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Figure 5. Wiring Diagram for 520M and 520MC Models
with Ground Alarm/Power Supply Module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Figure 6. Tripping Circuit for a Typical Magnum
Breaker (Partial). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Figure 7. Three-Pole, Four-Wire Breaker with
Neutral Sensor Connections for 3200A Frame
Using Residual Ground Fault Sensing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Figure 8. Neutral Sensor Connections for 4000A Frame
Using Residual Ground Fault Sensing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Figure 9. Digitrip Neutral Sensor Types (or Source Ground Sensor).14
Figure 10. Four-Pole 3200A Frame (4000A IEC) Using Residual
Ground Fault (Earth-Fault) Sensing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Figure 11. Source Ground Fault Sensing Scheme
for 3200A Frame. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Figure 12. Source Ground Fault Sensing Scheme
for 4000A FrameDouble-Wide. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Figure 13. Zero Sequence Sensing Scheme for 3200A Frame. . . 16
Figure 14. Multiple Source/Multiple Ground Scheme. . . . . . . . . . 16
Figure 15. Block Diagram with Breaker Interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Figure 16. Digitrip 520 LI. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Figure 17. Digitrip 520 LSI. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Figure 18. Digitrip 520 LSIG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Figure 19. Digitrip 520i WLSIG. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Figure 20. Digitrip 520M MLSI. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Figure 21. Digitrip 520M MLSIA. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Figure 22. Digitrip 520M MLSIG. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Figure 23. Digitrip 520Mi MWLSIG. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Figure 24. Digitrip 520MC CLSI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Instructional Leaflet IL70C1037H05
Effective October 2009
Description Page
Figure 25. Digitrip 520MC CWLSIG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Figure 26. Digitrip 520MC ARMLSI. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Figure 27. Digitrip 520MC ARMLSIG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Figure 28. Digitrip 520MC ARMLSIA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Figure 29. Digitrip 520MC ARMWLSIG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Figure 30. Long Delay Current Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Figure 31. Long Delay Time Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Figure 32. Long Time Memory (LTM) Jumper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Figure 33. Short Delay Current Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Figure 34. Short Delay Time Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Figure 35. Instantaneous Current Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Figure 36. Ground Fault Current Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Figure 37. Ground Fault Time Delay Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Figure 38. INCOM Network with Remote Master
Computer or BIM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Figure 39. Functional Test Kit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Figure 40. Connection Details for Conducting Single-Pole,
Single-Phase Current Tests with the Breaker Removed
from the Cell. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Figure 41. Connection Details for Conducting Single-Phase
Current Tests with the Breaker Removed from the Cell. . . . . . . . 28
Figure 42. Alternate Connection Details Using Three Poles
to Develop a Ground Fault Condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Figure 43. Digitrip Battery. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Figure 44. Typical Trip Function Record Nameplate . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Figure 45. Automatic Trip Operation Record. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Figure 46. Typical Performance Test Record Form. . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Figure 47. Maintenance Mode WiringDigitrip 520MC. . . . . . . . 33
Figure 48. Typical Zone Interlocking. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Figure 49. Typical Zone Interlocking Connections with
Two Main Breakers (M1, M2) and a Tie Breaker (T). . . . . . . . . . . 35
Figure 50. Typical Breaker Master Connection Diagram. . . . . . . . 37
Figure 51. Modbus Translator Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
eaton corporation www.eaton.com 3
Instructional Leaflet IL70C1037H05 Digitrip models 520, 520i; and 520M, 520Mi,
Effective October 2009 520MC, 520MCi trip units for use only in
Magnum and Magnum DS circuit breakers
List of tables
Description Page
Table 1. Protection Types Available for Digitrip Trip Units . . . . . . . 6
Table 2. Communication Functions Available for
Digitrip 520MC Units. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Table 3. Digitrip Sensing Modes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Table 4. Ground (Earth) Fault Current Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12

4 eaton corporation www.eaton.com

 Digitrip models 520, 520i; and 520M, 520Mi,
520MC, 520MCi trip units for use only in
Magnum and Magnum DS circuit breakers
Section 1: General description of Digitrip
trip units
DigitripE trip units are breaker subsystems that provide the
protective functions of a circuit breaker. The trip units are in
removable housings, installed in the breaker, and can be replaced
or upgraded in the field by the customer. This instructional leaflet
specifically covers the application of Digitrip trip units (see Table 1)
installed in MagnumE and Magnum DS breakers. Throughout this
instructional leaflet, the use of the term Magnum breakers refers
to both the Magnum and Magnum DS low voltage, AC power
circuit breakers.
The Magnum Digitrip line of trip units consists of the 520, 520M,
and 520MC for ULT standards and models 520i, 520Mi, and 520MCi
for IEC standards. (See Table 1 for available protection types.) Only
models 520MC and 520MCi provide communications. (See Table 2
for data that will be communicated.)
The Digitrip 520, 520M, and 520MC trip units may be applied on
both 50 and 60 Hz systems.
Auxiliary
Power
Module
Input
Four-
Character
LCD
Instructional Leaflet IL70C1037H05
Effective October 2009
All trip unit models are microprocessor-based ac protection devices
that provide true rms current sensing for the proper coordination
with the thermal characteristics of conductors and equipment. The
primary function of the Digitrip trip unit is circuit protection. The
Digitrip analyzes the secondary current signals from the circuit
breaker current sensors and, when preset current levels and time
delay settings are exceeded, will send an initiating trip signal to the
trip actuator of the circuit breaker. In addition to the basic protection
function, the Digitrip 520 family of trip units provides mode of trip
information such as:
Long time trip (overload)
Short time trip
Instantaneous trip
Ground (earth) fault trip (if supplied)
The current sensors provide operating power to the trip unit. As
current begins to flow through the breaker, the sensors generate a
secondary current that powers the trip unit.
The Digitrip 520 family of trip units provides five phase and two
ground (time-current) curve shaping adjustments. To satisfy the
protection needs of any specific installation, the exact selection of
the available protection function adjustments is optional. The short
delay and ground fault pickup adjustments can be set for either
FLAT or I2t response. A pictorial representation of the applicable
time-current curves for the selected protection functions is provided,
for user reference, on the face of the trip unit as shown in Figure 1.

Protection
Rating Each trip unit is completely self-contained and requires no external
Plug control power to operate its protection systems. It operates from
current signal levels derived through current sensors mounted in the
circuit breaker. The types of protection available for each model are
Test Port shown in Table 1 and Figure 16 through Figure 27.
(covered)
NNote: The Digitrip 220+ (LI modelFigure 16), 520 (LSI modelFigure
17), 520M (MLSI modelFigure 20) and 520MC (CLSI modelFigure 24)
can be used on three-pole or four-pole circuit breakers for the protection of
the neutral circuit. Only these four models can provide neutral protection,
Protection although models MLSIA, MLSIG, MWLSIG, CLSIA, CLSIG, and CWLSIG can
Settings provide neutral metering. Refer to the National Electrical CodeT (NECT) for
the appropriate application for four-pole breakers.

INCOM Mode of trip and status information

Transmit
LED Cause of Trip LED On all models, a green light emitting diode (LED), labeled Status,
blinks approximately once each second to indicate that the trip unit
is operating normally. This Status LED will also blink at a faster rate
Figure 1. Digitrip 520MC Trip Unit with Rating Plug if the Digitrip is in a pickup, or overload, mode.
Red LEDs on the face of the trip units (for long delay, short delay,
and instantaneous) flash to indicate the cause, or trip mode, for
an automatic trip operation (for example, ground fault, overload,
or short circuit trip). A battery in the Digitrip unit maintains the trip
indication until the Reset/Battery Test button is pushed. The battery
is satisfactory if its LED lights green when the Battery Check button
DIGITRIP RMS DIGITRIP RMS is pushed (see Section 6).
520M LSIG PARTS 520M LSIG NNote: The Digitrip unit provides all protection functions regardless of the
status of the battery. The battery is only needed to maintain the automatic
IDENTIFICATIONS NORMAL trip indication.
OPERATION

eaton corporation www.eaton.com 5

Instructional Leaflet IL70C1037H05 Digitrip models 520, 520i; and 520M, 520Mi,
Effective October 2009 520MC, 520MCi trip units for use only in
Magnum and Magnum DS circuit breakers
Table 1. Protection Types Available for Digitrip Trip Units
Digitrip Trip Unit Type 520/520i 520M/520Mi 520MC/520MCi
Ampere range 2006300A 2006300A 2006300A
rms sensing Yes Yes Yes
Communications No No Yes c
Protection and coordination
Figure number reference 16, 17, 18, 19 20, 21, 22, 23 24, 25, 26, 27, 28, 29
Protection Ordering options LI, LSI, LSIG, WLSIG MLSI, MLSIG, MLSIA, MWLSIG CLSI, CWLSIG, ARMLSI, ARMLSIG,
ARMLSIA, ARMWLSIG
Fixed rating plug (In) Yes Yes Yes
Overtemperature trip Yes Yes Yes
Long delay protection Long delay setting 0.41.0 x (In) 0.41.0 x (In) 0.41.0 x (In)
Long delay time I t at 6 x (Ir)
2
224s 224s 224s
Long delay thermal memory Yes Yes Yes
Short delay protection Short delay pickup a 2001000% x (Ir) 2001000% x (Ir) 2001000% x (Ir)
Short delay time I2t at 8 x (Ir) 100500 ms 100500 ms 100500 ms
Short delay time FLAT 100500 ms 100500 ms 100500 ms
Short delay time ZSI b Yes Yes Yes
Instantaneous Protection Instantaneous pickup a 2001000% x (In) 2001000% x (In) 2001000% x (In)
OFF position Yes, except for LI Yes Yes
Making current release Yes Yes Yes
Ground (earth) fault protection Ground fault option Yes Yes Yes
Ground fault alarm No Yes d Yes d
Ground fault pickup 25100% x (In) c 25100% x (In) c 25100% x (In) c
Ground fault delay I t at 0.625 x (In)
2
100500 ms 100500 ms 100500 ms
Ground fault delay flat 100500 ms 100500 ms 100500 ms
Ground fault ZSI b Yes Yes Yes
Ground fault memory Yes Yes Yes
Neutral protection Yes, Cat LSI only Yes, Cat MLSI only Yes, Cat CLSI only
Maintenance Mode No No Yes g
System diagnostics
Status/long pickup LED Yes Yes Yes
High load alarm/alarm contacts No Yes d, Cat MLSI only Yes d, Cat CLSI only
Cause of Trip LEDs Yes e Yes e Yes e
Magnitude of trip current No Yes d Yes d
Remote ground trip/alarm contacts No Yes d Yes d
System metering
Digital display No Four-char. LCD Four-char. LCD
a Additional setting is marked M1 where:
8003200A Frame: M1 = 14 x /n for plug amps 2001250A
M1 = 12 x /n for plug amps 1600, 2000, 2500A
M1 = 10 x /n for plug amps 3000, 3200A, 4000A (IEC only)
40006300A Frame: M1 = 14 x /n for plug amps 2000, 2500A
M1 = 12 x /n for plug amps 3200, 4000, 5000A (see Section 2)
M1 = 10 x /n for plug amps 6000, 6300A
b ZSI = Zone selective interlock (see Section 3).
c Limited to 1200A; this is only for UL versions, not for IEC models that have W in catalog number.
d Requires Ground Alarm/Power Supply Module (see Section 1).
e Four Cause of Trip LEDsL, S, I, G. Making current release is indicated by the Instantaneous LED.
f 6300A rating for IEC only.
g Units with ARM in catalog number.

6 eaton corporation www.eaton.com

Digitrip models 520, 520i; and 520M, 520Mi, Instructional Leaflet IL70C1037H05
520MC, 520MCi trip units for use only in Effective October 2009
Magnum and Magnum DS circuit breakers
Table 2. Communication Functions Available for Digitrip 520MC Units
Catalog Number 5CLSI 5CLSIG 5CLSIA 5WLSIG
Remote information via communications X X X X
Breaker Status
Open/Closed/Tripped X X X X
Address register X X X X
Trip event values
Protection settings X X X X
Current values
Phase A current (amperes) X X X X
Phase B current (amperes) X X X X
Phase C current (amperes) X X X X
Phase N current (amperes) a X X X X
Phase G current (amperes) N/A X X X
Remote messagesalarm
Overload (long pickup) X X X X
High load alarm X N/A N/A N/A
Ground alarm N/A Xb X Xb
Remote messagestrip
Long delay trip X X X X
Short delay trip X X X X
Instantaneous trip X X X X
Ground trip N/A X N/A X
Overtemperature trip c X X X X
Plug trip (plug problem) d X X X X
MCR trip (making current release trip) e X X X X
High instantaneous trip f X X X X
Slave action commands
Remote reset X X X X
a Breaker must be four-pole or neutral sensor wired. NNotes:
b Breaker will trip and Alarm contact will operate. X = Function included
c Overtemperature trip indication via communicationsLong LED shown on front panel.
N/A = Not applicable
d Plug trip cause through communicationsINST LED shown on front panel.
e MCR trip cause through communicationsINST LED shown on front panel.

f High instantaneous trip cause through communicationsINST LED on front panel.

eaton corporation www.eaton.com 7

Instructional Leaflet IL70C1037H05 Digitrip models 520, 520i; and 520M, 520Mi,
Effective October 2009 520MC, 520MCi trip units for use only in
Magnum and Magnum DS circuit breakers

Mouting Boss
Steel Mouting Plate

J3 (3 Point) Guide Pin

J4 (4 Point)
Connectors

Digitrip 220/520

Dimple
Ground Alarm/
Power Supply Module Pin 1 Connector K2
(520M/MC option only)

M04 x 80 mm Mounting Screw

M4 Bushing
Rating Plug (3 Pins)

Pin 1 Connector K1

0.045 Dia. Pins Exiting

Digitrip Housing
DIGITRIP RMS
520M LSIG PARTS
IDENTIFICATIONS Wires with Connectors Spring Clip
Connector I1 (520MC only)

Figure 2. Installation of the Digitrip Unit into a Magnum Breaker (Side View)

Installation and removal

Installation of the trip unit
Align the Digitrip unit with the guide pins and spring clip of the
Magnum circuit breaker. Press the unit into the breaker until the pins
on the trip unit seat firmly into the connector housing and the unit
clicks into place (see Figure 2).
m CAUTION
DO NOT FORCE THE RATING PLUG INTO THE CAVITY.
Use a 1/8-inch (3 mm) wide screwdriver to tighten the M4 screw
and secure the plug and the trip unit to the circuit breaker (see
Figure 3). Close the rating plug door.

Rating plug installation

m WARNING
DO NOT ENERGIZE THE MAGNUM BREAKER WITH THE DIGITRIP
REMOVED OR DISCONNECTED FROM ITS CONNECTOR. DAMAGE TO
INTERNAL CURRENT TRANSFORMERS MAY OCCUR DUE TO AN OPEN
CIRCUIT CONDITION.
m CAUTION
IF A RATING PLUG IS NOT INSTALLED IN THE TRIP UNIT, THE UNIT WILL
INITIATE A TRIP WHEN IT IS ENERGIZED.
Insert the rating plug into the cavity on the right-hand side of the trip
unit. Align the three pins on the plug with the sockets in the cavity.
The plug should fit with a slight insertion force.
m CAUTION
THE M4 SCREW SHOULD BE TIGHTENED ONLY UNTIL IT IS SNUG BECAUSE
THERE IS NO STOP. DO NOT USE A LARGE SCREWDRIVER. A 1/8-inch
(3 mm) WIDE SCREWDRIVER BLADE IS ADEQUATE.
Trip unit/rating plug removal
To remove the rating plug from the trip unit, open the rating plug
door. Use a 1/8-inch (3 mm) wide screwdriver to loosen the M4
screw. Pull the door to release the rating plug from the trip unit.
To remove the trip unit from the circuit breaker, deflect the spring
clip to release the unit from the steel mounting plate. Pull the unit to
disengage the two or three 9-pin connectors from the circuit breaker
(see Figure 2).

DIGITRIP
REMOVAL AND
REPLACEMENT
INSTRUCTION

8 eaton corporation www.eaton.com

Digitrip models 520, 520i; and 520M, 520Mi, Instructional Leaflet IL70C1037H05
520MC, 520MCi trip units for use only in Effective October 2009
Magnum and Magnum DS circuit breakers
Ground Alarm/Power Supply Module
(520M/MC models only)
The Ground Alarm/Power Supply Module (see Figure 4) is an
optional accessory for the Digitrip 520M, 520Mi and is a required
accessory to enable communications on the Digitrip 520MC and
520MCi models. The module can be installed beneath the metal
mounting plate of the trip unit in the Magnum circuit breaker.
The module covers the following input voltage ratings: 120 Vac
(7802C83G11), 230 Vac (7802C83G12), 2448 Vdc (7802C82G12),
and 125 Vdc (7802C82G13). The burden of the Power/Relay Module
is 10 VA.

Figure 3. Installation of the Rating Plug and Mounting Screw

Wiring
The internal components of the breaker, and how they are wired out
to the breaker secondary contacts, are shown in the breaker master
connection diagram provided as Appendix C.

Plexiglass cover
A clear, tamper-proof, plexiglass door sits on the breaker cover. This
door allows the settings to be viewed but not changed, except by
Figure 4. Ground Alarm/Power Supply Module for the 520M or
authorized personnel. The plexiglass cover meets applicable tamper-
520MC Trip Units
proof requirements. The cover is held in place by two cover screws.
Security is ensured by the insertion of a standard meter seal through
the holes in both of the cover retention screws. The plexiglass cover
has an access hole for the Step and Reset/Battery Test pushbuttons.

eaton corporation www.eaton.com 9

Instructional Leaflet IL70C1037H05 Digitrip models 520, 520i; and 520M, 520Mi,
Effective October 2009 520MC, 520MCi trip units for use only in
Magnum and Magnum DS circuit breakers
Auxiliary power Ground fault alarm
When the module is wired as shown in Figure 5, it will provide an A ground fault alarm alerts a user to a ground fault condition without
auxiliary power supply so that the 520M/520Mi or 520MC/520MCi tripping the circuit breaker. A red Alarm Only LED on the front of the
liquid crystal display (LCD) will be functional even when the circuit trip unit will indicate the presence of a ground fault condition that
breaker has no load. A Digitrip 520M or 520MC trip unit without exceeds the programmed setting.
auxiliary power will not display data until load current reaches
approximately 30% single-phase or 10% three-phase of the The ground fault alarm relay is energized when the ground current
(In) rating. continuously exceeds the ground fault pickup setting for a time
in excess of a 0.1-second delay. The alarm relay will reset
automatically if the ground current is less than the ground fault
Maintenance Ground de pickup (see Figure 5, Note 4).
Mode Active Fault Alarm
High load alarm (520M/520MC models only)
Control Remote Ground c
Voltage b f Fault Trip The Digitrip 520M and 520MC models of the LSI style only
(Figure 20 and Figure 24) and the module shown in Figure 4
A-11
A-10

A-14

ATR COM A-15

MM ALM A-9

and Figure 5 will provide a High Load Alarm contact instead of

the Ground Alarm function when wired to the breaker secondary
REL COM

contacts A-10 and A-11. The function activates after a 1-second

ATR Volt
Output+

G-ALM2
Output

time delay when any phase current exceeds 85% of the Ir setting.
J3-3

J4-5

J4-4

J4-4

J4-2

J4-1
J3-2
J3-1

Display feature (520M and 520MC only)

G-Alarm

a The Digitrip 520M/520Mi and 520MC/520MCi models have a user

Ground Alarm/Power Supply Module interface in addition to the green and red LED trip indicators. This
seven-element display performs a metering function and can be
used to monitor load currents.
K2-1
K2-3
K2-6

When the Step button on the face of the trip unit is pressed and
Digitrip 520M/MC released, the display will show PH 1, for Phase 1 or A, and the
current value. If the Step button is not pressed again, the display
will continue to show the current value for Phase 1. Each time
that the Step button is pressed, the next monitored function will
be displayed. The other real-time readings can be displayed in the
Available Style
a Contact rating (resistive load): sequence below:
AC 0.5A at 230 Vac
Input Voltages Number b AC 1A at 120 Vac PH 2 Phase 2 (B)
DC 1A at 48 Vdc
120 Vac 10% 7802C83G11
DC 0.35A at 125 Vdc
PH 3 Phase 3 (C)
230 Vac 10% 7802C83G12 b Verify input voltage rating before energizing circuit. PH 4 Neutral
2448 Vdc 10% 7802C82G12 c When used in conjunction with a T. U. Cat. PH 5 Ground (if ground function is supplied)
5MWLSIG, 5MLSIG, 5CWLSIG or 5CLSIG, will
125 Vdc 7802C82G13 indicate GF trip. HI Highest phase current
(100140 range) d When used in conjunction with T.U. Cat. 5MLSIA OL Overload (Digitrip in Overload mode)
or 5CLSIA, will indicate GF alarm. Pushing the Step button while the unit is in the OL mode
e When used in conjunction with a Trip Unit Cat. will have the unit again display the overload current value
5MLSI or 5CLSI, will indicate High Load alarm.
f When used in conjunction with Trip Unit Cat.
HL High Load Alarm (Cat 5MLSI and 5ARMLSI only)
5ARMLSI(G), see Section 10. HELP This message will indicate that the trip unit
is out of calibration and should be replaced at the
Figure 5. Wiring Diagram for 520M and 520MC Models with earliest opportunity.
Ground Alarm/Power Supply Module
In addition, the Digitrip 520MC and Digitrip 520M (product built
with Auxiliary Power Module input pins present, see Figure 1) will
Ground alarm display and freeze the magnitude of the trip value after a trip event
A second function of the module is to provide either a ground trip if auxiliary power is available. Use the Step pushbutton to view each
or ground alarm only output contact via the relay supplied in the phase value. The highest value that can be presented is 9999. Any
module. On Digitrip 520M/520MC with ground fault protection, an fault currents greater than this value will be shown as HI. Pushing
LED on the front of the unit also provides an indication of ground the Reset pushbutton will clear this data.
fault trip. Also related to the phase value after a trip event are four dashes
- - - -. This message means that the microprocessor could not
Ground fault trip complete its writing of the trip events magnitude into its nonvolatile
When the Ground Alarm/Power Supply Module is used with the memory. A possible cause of this would be the lack or loss of
MLSIG model, this unit will provide ground fault trip contacts when auxiliary power during the trip event.
the circuit breaker trips on a ground fault. You must then push the
Reset button on the Digitrip in order to reset the contacts (see Standards
Figure 5, Note 3). The Digitrip 520, 520M, and 520MC trip units are listed by
Underwriters LaboratoriesT, under UL File E52096, for use in
Magnum circuit breakers. These same units are recognized by
the Canadian Standards AssociationT (CSAT).
All Digitrip units have also passed the IEC 947-2 test program that
includes radiated and conducted emission testing. As a result, all
units carry the CE mark.

10 eaton corporation www.eaton.com

Digitrip models 520, 520i; and 520M, 520Mi,
520MC, 520MCi trip units for use only in
Magnum and Magnum DS circuit breakers
Section 2: General description of Magnum
circuit breakers
General
Magnum circuit breakers are tripped automatically on overload fault
current conditions by the combined action of three components:
1. The sensors, which measure the current level.
2. The Digitrip trip unit, which provides a tripping signal to the trip
actuator when current and time delay settings are exceeded.
3. The low-energy trip actuator, which actually trips the
circuit breaker.
Figure 6 shows this tripping circuit for a typical Magnum circuit
breaker. This arrangement provides a very flexible system, covering
a wide range of tripping characteristics described by the time-current
curves referenced in Section 9.
Top End Low Energy Trip Actuator
ST+ Black
ST
Polarity
Marks
Digitrip
Bottom End
Figure 6. Tripping Circuit for a Typical Magnum Breaker (Partial)
The automatic overload and short-circuit tripping characteristics for a
specific circuit breaker are determined by the ratings of the installed
current sensors with a matching rating plug and the selected
functional protection settings. Specific setting instructions are
provided in Section 4.
When the functional protection settings are exceeded, the Digitrip
unit supplies a trip signal to the trip actuator. As a result, all tripping
operations initiated by the protection functions of the Digitrip trip
unit are performed by its internal circuitry. There is no mechanical
or direct magnetic action between the primary current and the
mechanical tripping parts of the breaker, and external control power
is not required.
m WARNING
IMPROPER POLARITY CONNECTIONS ON THE TRIP ACTUATOR COIL WILL
DEFEAT THE OVERLOAD AND SHORT CIRCUIT PROTECTION, WHICH COULD
RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY. OBSERVE POLARITY MARKINGS ON THE
TRIP ACTUATOR LEADS AND CONNECT THEM PROPERLY, USING THE
INSTRUCTIONS PROVIDED.
Instructional Leaflet IL70C1037H05
Effective October 2009
Low-energy trip actuator
The mechanical force required to initiate the tripping action of
a Magnum circuit breaker is provided by a special low-energy
trip actuator. The trip actuator is located under the black molded
platform on which the Digitrip unit is supported. The trip actuator
contains a permanent magnet assembly, moving and stationary
core assemblies, a spring, and a coil. Nominal coil resistance is
22 ohms and the black lead is positive. The circuit breaker
mechanism assembly contains a mechanism-actuated reset lever
and a trip lever to actuate the tripping action of the circuit breaker.
When the trip actuator is reset by the operating mechanism, the
moving core assembly is held in readiness against the force of the
compressed spring by the permanent magnet. When a tripping
action is initiated, the low-energy trip actuator coil receives a tripping
pulse from the Digitrip unit. This pulse overcomes the holding effect
of the permanent magnet, and the moving core is released to trigger
the tripping operation via the trip lever.
Ground fault protection
General
When the Digitrip 520 family includes ground fault protection
features, the distribution system characteristics (for example,
system grounding, number of sources, number and location of
ground points, and the like) must be considered along with the
manner and location in which the circuit breaker is applied to the
system. These elements are discussed in this section.
The Digitrip 520 uses three modes of sensing to detect ground
fault currents: residual, source ground, and zero sequence (see
Table 3). Magnum circuit breakers can accommodate all three
types, except for four-pole breakers. The breaker secondary contact
inputs B-6, B-7 are used to configure the breaker cell positions for
the three schemes. No jumper from B-6 to B-7 programs the unit
for a residual ground fault scheme, while a jumper from B-6 to B-7
programs the trip unit for either a source ground or zero sequence
configuration. If present, this jumper resides on the stationary side
of the switchgear assembly. In all three schemes, the proper current
sensor input is required on the external sensor input terminals B-4,
B-5 of the breaker secondary contacts.
Table 3. Digitrip Sensing Modes
Ground (Earth) Breaker Digitrip GF
Fault Sensing Secondary Applicable Figure Sensing
Method Contacts Reqd. Breakers Reference Element Used
Residual No jumper Three- or 7, 8, 10, 14 Element R5
four-pole
Source ground Jumper B6 to B7 Three-pole only 12 Element R4
Zero sequence Jumper B6 to B7 Three-pole only 13 Element R4
NNote: This information applies to trip units with ground.
Residual sensing
Residual sensing is the standard mode of ground fault sensing in
Magnum circuit breakers. This mode uses one current sensor on
each phase conductor and one on the neutral for a four-wire system
(shown in Figure 7 and Figure 8). If the system neutral is grounded,
but no phase to neutral loads are used, the Digitrip 520 family of
units includes all of the components necessary for ground fault
protection. This mode of sensing vectorially sums the outputs of
the three or four individual current sensors. For separately mounted
neutrals, as long as the vectorial sum is zero, then no ground fault
exists. The neutral sensor must have characteristics and a ratio
that are identical to the three internally mounted phase current
sensors. Available types of neutral sensors are shown in Figure 9.
Residual ground fault sensing features are adaptable to main and
feeder breaker applications. Available ground fault pickup settings
employing residual sensing are given in Table 4. Figure 10 shows a
four-pole breaker with residual ground fault sensing.
eaton corporation www.eaton.com 11
Instructional Leaflet IL70C1037H05
Effective October 2009
m CAUTION
IF THE SENSOR CONNECTIONS ARE INCORRECT, A NUISANCE TRIP
MAY OCCUR. ALWAYS OBSERVE THE POLARITY MARKINGS ON THE
INSTALLATION DRAWINGS. TO eNSURE CORRECT GROUND FAULT
EQUIPMENT PERFORMANCE, CONDUCT FIELD TESTS TO COMPLY WITH
NEC REQUIREMENTS UNDER ARTICLE 230-95(C).
Source ground sensing
Depending upon the installation requirements, alternate ground
fault sensing schemes may be dictated (see Figure 11 and
Figure 12). The ground return method is usually applied when
ground fault protection is desired only on the main circuit breaker
in a simple radial system. This method is also applicable to double-
ended systems where a midpoint grounding electrode is employed.
For this mode of sensing, a single current sensor mounted on
the equipment-bonding jumper directly measures the total ground
current flowing in the grounding electrode conductor and all other
equipment-grounding conductors.
The settings shown in Table 3 will apply when the neutral
sensor is not the same as the frame rating in a ground return
sensing scheme.
Digitrip models 520, 520i; and 520M, 520Mi,
520MC, 520MCi trip units for use only in
Magnum and Magnum DS circuit breakers
Zero sequence sensing
Zero sequence sensing, also referred to as vectorial summation
(see Figure 13), is applicable to mains, feeders, and special
schemes involving zone protection. Zero sequence current
transformers (5.06 x 15.37 in. [128 x 390 mm] rectangular inside
dimensions) are available with 100:1 and 1000:1 ratios (styles
9253C07G01, G11).
Multiple source/multiple ground
A multiple source/multiple ground scheme is shown in Figure 14.
In this figure, a ground fault is shown that has two possible return
paths, via the neutral, back to its source. The three neutral sensors
are interconnected to sense and detect both ground fault and
neutral currents.
Contact Eaton for more details on this scheme.
Ground fault settings
The adjustment of the ground fault functional settings (FLAT
response or I2t) is discussed in Section 4. The effect of these
settings is illustrated in the ground fault time-current curve
referenced in Section 9. Applicable residual ground fault pickup
settings and current values are given in Table 4, as well as in the
ground time-current curve.

Table 4. Ground (Earth) Fault Current Settings

Ground Fault Current Settings (Amperes) a
Installed Sensor and Rating Plug (Amperes) In 0.25 0.30 0.35 0.40 0.50 0.60 0.75 1.0
200 50 60 70 80 100 120 150 200
250 63 75 88 100 125 150 188 250
300 75 90 105 120 150 180 225 300
400 100 120 140 160 200 240 300 400
600 150 180 210 240 300 360 450 600
630 158 189 221 252 315 378 473 630
800 200 240 280 320 400 480 600 800
1000 250 300 350 400 500 600 750 1000
1200 300 360 420 480 600 720 900 1200
1250 312 375 438 500 625 750 938 1250
1600 400 480 560 640 800 960 1200 1600 b
2000 500 600 700 800 1000 1200 1500 b 2000 b
2500 625 750 875 1000 1250 1500 1875 2500
3000 750 900 1050 1200 1500 b 1800 b 2250 b 3000 b
3200 800 960 1120 1200 1600 b 1920 b 2400 b 3200 b
4000 c 1000 1200 1400 b 1600 b 2000 b 2400 b 3000 b 4000 b
5000 c 1250 b 1500 b 1750 b 2000 b 2500 b 3000 b 3750 b 5000 b
6000 1500 b 1800 b 2100 b 2400 b 3000 b 3600 b 4500 b 6000 b
6300 c 1575 1890 2205 2520 3150 3780 4725 6300
a Tolerance on settings are 10% of values shown.
b On models 520 LSIG, 520M, and 520MC LSIG, the shaded values are set to a maximum trip value of 1200A for NEC.
c See page 17.

12 eaton corporation www.eaton.com

Digitrip models 520, 520i; and 520M, 520Mi, Instructional Leaflet IL70C1037H05
520MC, 520MCi trip units for use only in Effective October 2009
Magnum and Magnum DS circuit breakers

Source
LN LA LB LC
Black

+ K1-2
Trip
Digitrip 520
Actuator - K1-3
with GF
1 10:1
K1-9

K1-8
R/1 1 K1-7

K1-6
K1-5 a
1
K1-4 R5
b
B-7 K2-1
B-6 K2-7
B-5 K2-9
c
B-4 K2-8
R/1 10:1 Aux. CT

Load

a In this scheme, all breaker secondary currents (at the 100 mA level) are summed together at the PC board donut transformer to sense
ground fault via element R5.
b No jumper on secondary contacts B-6, B-7.
c Neutral input (if four-wire) is via contacts B-4, B-5. Neutral current input to secondary contacts is 1A, equivalent to one per unit ground.

Figure 7. Three-Pole, Four-Wire Breaker with Neutral Sensor Connections for 3200A Frame Using Residual Ground Fault Sensing

Source
LN1 LN2 LA1 LB1 LC1 LA2 LB2 LC2
Black

+ K1-2
Trip Digitrip 520
Actuator - K1-3 with GF
20:1
K1-9
2000:1 2000:1
K1-8

b K1-7
2000:1 2000:1
K1-6
a
K1-5
2000:1 2000:1
K1-4 R5
B-7 K2-1
B-6 K2-7
K2-9
B-5
2000:1
B-4 K2-8
20:1 Aux. CTs

2000:1 Load

a In this scheme, all breaker secondary currents (at the 100 mA level) are summed together at the PC board donut transformer to sense ground
fault via element R5.
b In this scheme, the current sensors in the breaker poles are parallel-wired to achieve a 4000A breaker rating. Other available ratings in this
double-wide configuration are 6300A, 5000A, 3200A, 2500A, and 2000A.

Figure 8. Neutral Sensor Connections for 4000A Frame Using Residual Ground Fault Sensing

eaton corporation www.eaton.com 13

Instructional Leaflet IL70C1037H05 Digitrip models 520, 520i; and 520M, 520Mi,
Effective October 2009 520MC, 520MCi trip units for use only in
Magnum and Magnum DS circuit breakers

Item Current Ratio

H01 200:1
H02 250:1
H03 300:1
H04 400:1
H05 600:1
H06 800:1
H07 1000:1
H08 1200:1
H09 1600:1
H10 2000:1
H11 2500:1
H12 3000:1
H13 3200:1
H14 630:1
H15 1250:1
H16 3150:1
H17 4000:1
H18 100:1

All secondary currents to be 1.00A nominal

at full scale.

Insulation level: 0.6 kV, BIL 10 kV, full-wave

Continuous thermal current rating factor:

1.33 at 30C ambient.,1.0 at 55C ambient

Figure 9. Digitrip Neutral Sensor Types (or Source Ground Sensor)

Source
LN LA LB LC
Black

+ K1-2
Trip Digitrip 520
Actuator - K1-3 with GF

1 10:1
K1-9

K1-8
R/1 1 K1-7

K1-6
K1-5 a In this scheme, all breaker secondary
a
1 currents (at the 100 mA level) are
K1-4 summed together at the PC board
R5
B-7 donut transformer to sense ground
b fault via element R5.
B-6 b Do not jumper on secondary contacts
K2-9 B-6, B-7. This will defeat all ground
fault protection in application for
four-pole breaker.
K2-8
R/1
10:1 Aux. CT

Load

Figure 10. Four-Pole 3200A Frame (4000A IEC) Using Residual Ground Fault (Earth-Fault) Sensing

14 eaton corporation www.eaton.com

Digitrip models 520, 520i; and 520M, 520Mi, Instructional Leaflet IL70C1037H05
520MC, 520MCi trip units for use only in Effective October 2009
Magnum and Magnum DS circuit breakers

Source

Black

Trip Digitrip 520

Actuator with GF

c
b

10:1 Aux. CTs

Load
Ground Return Electrode Conductor
Typical ApplicationMain
a In this scheme, the residential sensing element R is not used. The ground current is direct true ground current and is sensed directly via element R .
5 4
b A jumper is required on B-6, B-7 (secondary contacts) to program the Digitrip 520 to use element R and input on B-4, B-5 directly for source ground sensing.
4
c This scheme is not applicable to four-pole breakers. No secondary contacts (B-4 and B-5) are available on four-pole breakers. Do not jumper B-6, B-7 in four-pole applications.

Figure 11. Source Ground Fault Sensing Scheme for 3200A Frame

Source

Black

Trip Digitrip 520

Actuator with GF

d
b

a
c

20:1 Aux. CTs

Load
Ground Return Electrode Conductor
a In this scheme, the current sensors in the breaker poles are parallel-wired to achieve a 4000A breaker rating. The ground fault is sensed directly via element R .
4
b A jumper is required on B-6, B-7 secondary contacts to program the Digitrip 520 to use element R directly for source ground sensing.
4
c Source ground sensor input is via B-4, B-5. Source ground current input to secondary contacts is 2A, equivalent to one per unit ground.
d This scheme is not applicable to four-pole breakers. No secondary contacts (B-4 and B-5) are available on four-pole breakers. Do not jumper B-6, B-7 in four-pole applications.

Figure 12. Source Ground Fault Sensing Scheme for 4000A FrameDouble-Wide

eaton corporation www.eaton.com 15

Instructional Leaflet IL70C1037H05 Digitrip models 520, 520i; and 520M, 520Mi,
Effective October 2009 520MC, 520MCi trip units for use only in
Magnum and Magnum DS circuit breakers

Source

Black

Trip Digitrip 520

Actuator with GF

c
b

a
Load
a This scheme uses a large zero sequence CT to magnetically sum the currents and the output is sensed via element R .
4
b A jumper is required on B-6, B-7 to program the Digitrip to use element R .
4
c This scheme is not applicable to four-pole breakers.

Figure 13. Zero Sequence Sensing Scheme for 3200A Frame

IG/2 N N IG/2

IG/2
IG/2

B5 ig/2 ig
ig/2
B5
B4
IG
ig/2

B4
M1 M2
iG/2 ig Digitrip
T
Ground
R5 Sensor
R5
B5 ig/2 B4
Neutral Sensors Wired
in a Loop Configuration
N
R5 IG in

NNotes:
Breaker M2 trips since this is the only breaker seeing the IG fault via element R5.
No jumper on B-6, B-7 terminalsall breakers are programmed for standard residual ground fault protection.
Auxiliary CTs not shown. Wiring needed at system level is shown as a dotted line.
Capital letters represent primary current. Lowercase letters represent secondary current.
The three breakers (M1, M2, and T) must all have the same breaker/sensor rating.

Figure 14. Multiple Source/Multiple Ground Scheme

16 eaton corporation www.eaton.com

Digitrip models 520, 520i; and 520M, 520Mi,
520MC, 520MCi trip units for use only in
Magnum and Magnum DS circuit breakers
Current sensors (Magnum standard frames)
The three (three-pole) or four (four-pole) primary current sensors are
installed internally in the circuit breaker on the lower conductors of
the breaker. The current sensor rating defines the breaker rating (In).
For example, 2000A:1A sensors are used on a 2000A rated breaker.
There are four auxiliary current transformers with a ratio of 10:1 that
further step down the rated current to 100 milliamperes, which is
equivalent to 100% (In) to the Digitrip.
The primary current sensors produce an output proportional to
the load current and furnish the Digitrip with the information and
energy required to trip the circuit breaker when functional protection
settings are exceeded.
If a set of current sensors with a different ratio are installed in the
field, the rating plug must also be changed. The associated rating
plug must match the current sensor rating specified on the plug
label. The current sensor rating can be viewed through openings in
the back of the breaker.
Current sensors (Magnum double-wide frames)
The six (three-pole) or eight (four-pole) current sensors installed
in the circuit breaker are located on the lower conductors. The
poles are paralleled and the corresponding current sensors are also
paralleled (see Figure 8). For example, a 4000A breaker phase rating
has two 2000:1 current sensors wired in parallel, which provides
an overall ratio of 4000:2. The auxiliary current transformers have
a ratio of 20:1 for this size breaker that further step down the
rated current to 100 milliamperes and is equivalent to 100% (In)
to the Digitrip.
Section 3: Principles of operation
General
All models of trip units are designed for industrial circuit breaker
environments where the ambient temperatures can range from
20C to +85C but rarely exceed 70C to 75C. If, however, Zone interlocking
temperatures in the neighborhood of the trip unit exceed this range,
the trip unit performance may be degraded. In order to ensure that
the tripping function is not compromised due to an overtemperature
condition, the microcomputer chip has a built-in overtemperature
protection feature, factory set to trip the breaker if the chip
temperature is excessive. If overtemperature is the reason
for the trip, the red Long Delay Time LED will flash.
The Digitrip uses the Eaton custom-designed CHip (Cutler-
Hammer Integrated Processor) chip, an integrated circuit that
includes a microcomputer to perform its numeric and logic functions.
The principles of operation of the trip unit are shown in Figure 15.
All sensing and tripping power required to operate the protection
function is derived from the current sensors in the circuit breaker.
The secondary currents from these sensors provide the correct input
information for the protection functions, as well as tripping power,
whenever the circuit breaker is carrying current. These current
signals develop analog voltages across the current viewing resistors.
The resulting analog voltages are digitized by the CHip chip.
The microcomputer continually digitizes these signals. This data is
used to calculate true rms current values, which are then continually
compared with the protection function settings and other operating
data stored in the memory. The software then determines whether
to initiate protection functions, including tripping the breaker through
the trip actuator.
DIGITRIP
OPERATOR
PRESTART
Instructional Leaflet IL70C1037H05
Effective October 2009
Trip and operation indicators
The LEDs on the face of the trip unit, shown in Figure 1 and Figure
16 to Figure 27, flash red to indicate the reason for any automatic
trip operation. Each LED is strategically located in the related
segment of the time-current curve depicted on the face of the trip
unit. The reason for the trip is identified by the segment of the time-
current curve where the LED is illuminated. Following an automatic
trip operation, the backup battery continues to supply power to
the LEDs as shown in Figure 15. The LED pulse circuit, shown
in Figure 15, is provided to reduce battery burden and will supply
a quick flash of the trip LED approximately every four seconds. It
is therefore important to view the unit for at least five seconds to
detect a flashing cause of trip indicator.
Following a trip operation, push the Reset\Battery Test button,
shown in Figure 1, to turn off the LEDs. A green LED, shown in
Figure 1, indicates the operational status of the trip unit. Once the
load current through the circuit breaker exceeds approximately 10%
(three-phase power) of the current sensor rating, the green LED will
flash on and off once each second to indicate that the trip unit is
energized and operating properly.
NNote: A steady green Status LED typically indicates that a low level of load
current, on the order of 5% of full load, exists.
Making Current Release
All models of trip units have a Making Current Release function.
This safety feature prevents the circuit breaker from being closed
and latched-in on a faulted circuit. The nonadjustable release
is preset at to a peak current of 25 x In, which correlates to
approximately 11 x In (rms) with maximum asymmetry.
The Making Current Release is enabled only for the first two cycles
following an initial circuit breaker closing operation. The Making
Current Release will trip the circuit breaker instantaneously and
flash the Instantaneous LED.
m notice
The provision for the zone selective interlocking function is
standard on circuit breakers with digitrip trip units for short
time and ground fault (earth fault) functions.
for ansi/ul circuit breakers with digitrip trip units, the
appropriate jumper to terminal b8 and b9 must be added on
the circuit breaker if zone interlocking is not desired or field
testing is desired.
for iec circuit breakers with digitrip trip units, the zone
interlocking function is not wired out to the circuit breaker
secondaries (i.e., zone functionality is not present in
secondaries b7, b8, and b9). the trip unit will always follow
the programmed short time or ground time setting. this is
accomplished via a wiring harness internal to the circuit
breaker. if the zone interlocking function is desired for iec
circuit breakers with digitrips, please refer to eaton for
appropriate instructions on how to adjust the internal
wiring harness to activate the zone interlocking function
associated with secondaries b7, b8, and b9 of the circuit
breaker.
eaton corporation www.eaton.com 17
Instructional Leaflet IL70C1037H05
Effective October 2009
Zone selective interlocking (or zone interlocking) is available for the
Digitrip 520 family on the Short Delay and Ground Fault Protection
functions (see Figure 15). The zone interlocking signal is wired via
a single set of wires labeled Zone In (Zin) and Zone Out (Zout) along
with a zone common wire. The Zone Selective Interlocking function
on the Digitrip 520 family has combined the logic interlocking of
short delay and ground fault. A zone out signal is sent whenever
the ground fault pickup is exceeded or when the short delay value
of 2 x (Ir) is exceeded. Zone selective interlocking provides the
fastest possible tripping for faults within the zone of protection
of the breaker and yet also provides positive coordination among
all breakers in the system (mains, ties, feeders, and downstream
breakers) to limit a power outage to only the affected parts of the
Digitrip models 520, 520i; and 520M, 520Mi,
520MC, 520MCi trip units for use only in
Magnum and Magnum DS circuit breakers
system. When zone interlocking is employed, a fault within the
zone of protection of the breaker will cause the Digitrip 520 family
of units to:
Trip the affected breaker immediately and, at the same time
Send a signal to upstream Digitrip units to restrain from tripping
immediately. The restraining signal causes the upstream breakers
to follow their set coordination times, so that the service is only
minimally disrupted while the fault is cleared in the shortest
time possible
For an example of how zone selective interlocking may be used, see
Appendix A of this instructional leaflet.

(Line/Upper)
N A B C
Ground Alarm
Power Supply
Trip
Optional for 520M
Required for 520MC
Actuator TA
Making Current
Release Circuitry FET
(see Section 3)

Current Sensors Trip LED

(See Section 8) Trip (See Section 1)

4-Bit LED
Latch Pulse
Chip Circuit
Internal Intregrated
Bridge Processor
Power Battery +3V
Circuits
Supply CHip
Status LED Custom
(See
Section 3) Designed

Display for 520M/MC

Residual
Ground Zone Interlock Zout
Detection Protection Setting Circuitry
(See Section 2) (See Section 4) (See Section 3) Zin

AUX. CTs
(Load/Lower)

Typical Phase or
Ground Sensing Rating Plug
(See Section 7)
Resistor

Figure 15. Block Diagram with Breaker Interface

18 eaton corporation www.eaton.com

Digitrip models 520, 520i; and 520M, 520Mi, Instructional Leaflet IL70C1037H05
520MC, 520MCi trip units for use only in Effective October 2009
Magnum and Magnum DS circuit breakers

Digitrip 520

5LI

Figure 16. Digitrip 520 LI Figure 18. Digitrip 520 LSIG

Figure 17. Digitrip 520 LSI Figure 19. Digitrip 520i WLSIG

eaton corporation www.eaton.com 19

Instructional Leaflet IL70C1037H05 Digitrip models 520, 520i; and 520M, 520Mi,
Effective October 2009 520MC, 520MCi trip units for use only in
Magnum and Magnum DS circuit breakers

Figure 20. Digitrip 520M MLSI Figure 22. Digitrip 520M MLSIG

Figure 21. Digitrip 520M MLSIA Figure 23. Digitrip 520Mi MWLSIG

20 eaton corporation www.eaton.com

Digitrip models 520, 520i; and 520M, 520Mi, Instructional Leaflet IL70C1037H05
520MC, 520MCi trip units for use only in Effective October 2009
Magnum and Magnum DS circuit breakers

Digitrip 520MC

PH4 Neutral

Unit Status Battery Check

Step Reset/Battery Test

Test
Kit Catalog

Dependent on Ir
Ir = In x Long Delay .4
Setting 1.0 .5 2
24 4
.95 .6 Long
20 7
.9 .7 Delay
Dependent on In .8 Setting 15 10
12
In = Max Amp Rating Long
2 Delay
(Current Sensor Rating) M1 2.5
Time
10 3 Short @ 6xIr
8 4 Delay
6 Setting
High
Load .1
.5* .2
Alarm
.3* .3 Short
.1* .4 Delay
.5 Time
2
OFF 3
* = I 2 t Response M1 4
Transmit 10 6
8
Instantaneous

Figure 24. Digitrip 520MC CLSI Figure 26. Digitrip 520MC ARMLSI

Figure 25. Digitrip 520MC CWLSIG

Figure 27. Digitrip 520MC ARMLSIG

eaton corporation www.eaton.com 21

Instructional Leaflet IL70C1037H05 Digitrip models 520, 520i; and 520M, 520Mi,
Effective October 2009 520MC, 520MCi trip units for use only in
Magnum and Magnum DS circuit breakers

Section 4: Protection settings

General
Before placing any circuit breaker in operation, set each trip
unit protection setting to the values specified by the engineer
responsible for the installation. The number of settings that must be
made is determined by the type of protection supplied by each unit,
as illustrated in Figure 16 through Figure 27. Each setting is made
by turning a rotary switch, using a small screwdriver. The selected
setting for each adjustment appears on the trip unit label.
The installed rating plug must match the current sensors that
establish the maximum continuous current rating of the circuit
breaker (In). Instantaneous and ground current settings are defined
in multiples of (In).
To illustrate the effect of each protection curve setting, simulated
time-current curves are pictured on the face of the trip unit. Each
rotary switch is located nearest the portion of the simulated time-
current curve that it controls. Should an automatic trip occur (as a
result of the current exceeding the pre-selected value), the LED in
the appropriate segment of the simulated time-current curve will
light red, indicating the reason for the trip.
The available settings, along with the effects of changing the
settings, are given in Figure 30 through Figure 37. Sample settings
are represented in boxes 2 .

Long delay current setting

There are eight available long delay settings, as illustrated in Figure
30. Each setting, called (Ir), is expressed as a multiple (ranging from
0.41) of the current (In). The nominal current pickup value is 110%
of the setting.
NNote: (Ir) is also the basis for the short delay current setting (see page 23).
Figure 28. Digitrip 520MC ARMLSIA

Long Delay Setting lr lr

lr
1 x ln = lr Available Settings
0.4, 0.5, 0.6, 0.7,
0.8, 0.9, 0.95, 1.0

In Multiples of
Amperes (ln)

Figure 30. Long Delay Current Settings

Figure 29. Digitrip 520MC ARMWLSIG

22 eaton corporation www.eaton.com

Digitrip models 520, 520i; and 520M, 520Mi, Instructional Leaflet IL70C1037H05
520MC, 520MCi trip units for use only in Effective October 2009
Magnum and Magnum DS circuit breakers
Long delay time setting
Digitrip Test Kit Port
There are eight available long delay time settings, as illustrated in Test Kit Test Kit
Figure 31, ranging from 224 seconds. These settings are the total
Connector
clearing times when the current value equals six times (Ir). (Bridging)
Notch LTM Inactive

Connector
Long Delay Time (Storage)
2 Seconds at 6 x lr LTM Active

(Also Recommended
Position for Field Testing)
Available
Settings Figure 32. Long Time Memory (LTM) Jumper
2, 4, 7, 10,
12, 15, 20, 24
Seconds at
The action of the LTM must be considered when performing
6 Times multiple long delay time tests (see Section 5).
Long Delay
Setting (lr) Short delay current setting
There are eight available short delay current settings, as illustrated
in Figure 31. Seven settings are in the range from 210 times (Ir).
(Remember: (Ir) is the long delay current setting.) The maximum
value M1 is based on the ampere rating of the circuit breaker and is
listed in Note 4 of Table 1.

6 x lr Available Settings
2.0, 2.5, 3.0. 4.0, 5.0, 6.0, 8.0, 10.0, M1
Short Delay Setting
Figure 31. Long Delay Time Settings In Multiples of
2 x lr Long Delay Setting (lr)
NNotes: In addition to the standard long delay protection element, trip units
also have a Long Time Memory (LTM) function, which protects load circuits
from the effects of repeated overload conditions. If a breaker is reclosed soon
after a long delay trip, and the current again exceeds the long delay setting,
(Ir), the LTM automatically reduces the time to trip to allow for the fact that
the load circuit temperature is already higher than normal because of the
prior overload condition. Each time the overload condition is repeated, the
M1 Value is Specified on Rating Plug
LTM causes the breaker to trip in a progressively shorter time. When the load
current returns to normal, the LTM begins to reset; after about 10 minutes
it will have reset fully, so the next long delay trip time will again correspond
to the setting value. In certain applications, it may be desirable to disable Figure 33. Short Delay Current Settings
the LTM function. Open the test port located at the lower left-hand front of
the trip unit and use small, long nose pliers to move the LTM jumper inside Short delay time setting
the test port (see Figure 32) to its inactive position. (The LTM function can
be enabled again at any time by moving the LTM jumper back to its original As illustrated in Figure 34, there are two different short delay
active position.) response curve shapes: fixed time (FLAT) and I2t.
The shape selected depends on the type of selective coordination
chosen. The I2t response curve will provide a longer time delay for
current below 8 x Ir than will the FLAT response curve.

eaton corporation www.eaton.com 23

Instructional Leaflet IL70C1037H05 Digitrip models 520, 520i; and 520M, 520Mi,
Effective October 2009 520MC, 520MCi trip units for use only in
Magnum and Magnum DS circuit breakers
Instantaneous current setting
There are eight available instantaneous current settings, as
illustrated in Figure 35. Six settings are in the range from 210 x
(In) the rating plug value, and the other two settings are M1 x (In) or
Off. The value that M1 has depends upon the sensor rating of the
circuit breaker and is specified both on the rating plug label and on
Short Delay Time the applicable time-current curves referenced in Section 9.
0.4 Seconds
Setting Inst.
Available Settings
6 x ln
2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 8,
10, M1, OFF*

In Multiples of
Rating Plug
Amperes (ln)

M1 value is specified on rating plug.

*No OFF on Digitrip 5205LI style
Available Settings
0.1, 0.2, 0.3,
0.4, 0.5 Figure 35. Instantaneous Current Settings
Seconds with
FLAT Response
Ground fault current setting
The eight ground fault current settings are labeled with values from
0.25 to 1.0 x (In) (see Figure 36). The domestic (U.S.) models have
a maximum of 1200A, limited by the firmware of the unit, as shown
in Table 1 and Table 4. The specific ground current settings for each
model are listed in Table 4 and on the applicable time-current curve
l2t Shape
Returns to FLAT for the breaker.
Response at
Currents Higher
than 8 x lr Available Settings
Ground Fault 0.25, 0.3, 0.35,
Setting 0.4, 0.5, 0.6,
0.4 x ln 0.75, 1.0

Specific Values
Given on Circuit
Breaker Time-
*0.1, *0.3, *0.5 Current Curve
Seconds with and in Table 4
l2t Shape

Figure 36. Ground Fault Current Settings

*Indicates l t Shape
2
8 x lr
Figure 34. Short Delay Time Settings
Five FLAT (0.1, 0.2, 0.3, 0.4, 0.5 seconds) and three I2t (0.1*, 0.3*,
0.5* seconds) response time delay settings are available. The I2t
response settings are identified by an asterisk (*). The I2t response
is applicable to currents less than eight times the ampere rating of
the installed rating plug (Ir). For currents greater than 8 x (Ir), the I2t
response reverts to the FLAT response.
NNotes: Also see Section 3, zone interlocking.
Ground fault time delay setting
As illustrated in Figure 37, there are two different ground fault
curve shapes: fixed time (FLAT) or I2t response. The shape selected
depends on the type of selective coordination chosen. The I2t
response will provide a longer time delay for current below
0.625 x In than will the FLAT response.
Five FLAT (0.1, 0.2, 0.3, 0.4, 0.5 seconds) and three I2t (0.1*, 0.3*,
0.5* seconds) response time delay settings are available. The I2t
response settings are identified by an asterisk (*). The I2t response
is applicable to currents less than 0.625 times the ampere rating of
the installed rating plug (In). For currents greater than 0.625 x (In), the
I2t response reverts to the FLAT response.
NNote: Also see Section 3, zone interlocking.

24 eaton corporation www.eaton.com

Digitrip models 520, 520i; and 520M, 520Mi, Instructional Leaflet IL70C1037H05
520MC, 520MCi trip units for use only in Effective October 2009
Magnum and Magnum DS circuit breakers
INCOM (Digitrip 520MC models only)
INCOM communication to a host computer or a BIM is possible with
the Digitrip 520MC unit. The address range is 001999. The factory
default address is 999 hex.
Ground Fault Time
0.3 Seconds To set the desired address or to view the address, depress and
hold the Reset/Battery Test button for five seconds. Depress the
Step button to select a new address. Users may simultaneously
depress and hold in the Step and Reset/Battery Test buttons for
fast advance.

Breaker Interface Module (BIM)

Available Settings The Breaker Interface Module (BIM) can be used to monitor up to
31 Digitrip 520MC trip units. The acceptable addresses are 001031.
0.1, 0.2, 0.3, 0.4, 0.5
Seconds with
FLAT Response
Remote master computer
When desired, Digitrip 520MC trip units can communicate with a
BIM or remote master computer (IBM PC compatible with Eaton
CONI card or MINT ) and using PowerNet communication software
Version 3.20 or greater (see Figure 38 for typical wiring.)

l2t Shape
Returns to FLAT
Response at
Approximately 0.625 ln
0.1*, 0.3*, 0.5*
Seconds with
l2t Shape

* On Label Indicates l2t Shape

Figure 37. Ground Fault Time Delay Settings

Typical IBM Compatible

Computer

Breaker Interface
Monitor (BIM II)

b See View A Twisted Pair.

No. 18 AWG
c
Cutoff Shield or Connect to
Eaton Coni Card Unused Customer Terminal
Do Not Ground
a
Res d

H001 H002 H = 9600 Baud

(Y) 1
2
Typical Magnum
3
4
Circuit Breaker
(BL)
with Digitrip
520MC Trip Unit
View A
3-Digit INCOM Address as
Displayed on Trip Unit e
a Refer to master circuit breaker connection diagrams in Appendix C.
b Modular telephone connector, Type RJ11, supplied by user.
c Ground shielding at computer and BIM as shown. Where devices are daisy-chained, interconnect shielding, but do not ground the connection.
d 100 ohm 1/2 watt carbon terminating resistor required at last breaker. See T.D. 17-513.
e See Section 4 for programming INCOM function.

Figure 38. INCOM Network with Remote Master Computer or BIM

eaton corporation www.eaton.com 25

Instructional Leaflet IL70C1037H05 Digitrip models 520, 520i; and 520M, 520Mi,
Effective October 2009 520MC, 520MCi trip units for use only in
Magnum and Magnum DS circuit breakers
INCOM network interconnections Section 5: Test procedures
INCOM sends bursts of data on a 92115.2 kHz carrier at a General
9600 baud rate over twisted pair conductors to interconnect the
many devices comprising the network.
The Digitrip 520MC will light the red LED shown in Figure 1 when m WARNING
transmitting on INCOM. DO NOT ATTEMPT TO INSTALL, TEST, OR PERFORM MAINTENANCE ON
Recommended cable specifications: EQUIPMENT WHILE IT IS ENERGIZED. DEATH OR SEVERE PERSONAL
INJURY CAN RESULT FROM CONTACT WITH ENERGIZED EQUIPMENT.
Eaton cable catalog #IMPCABLE, Style #2A95705G01 DE-ENERGIZE THE CIRCUIT AND DISCONNECT THE CIRCUIT BREAKER
Belden 9463 cable family BEFORE PERFORMING MAINTENANCE OR TESTS.
Identical Commscope or Quabbin cables

These bursts of data can be captured and used in a variety of ways
depending upon the manner in which the master computer software
program is written. For example, all the settings can be viewed
via the master computer. Another example is that the data for the
individual phase current values are available on the network, but the
software must select the appropriate data, decode it, and display
it in a useful manner. Following an overcurrent trip operation, the
sequence of coded data varies slightly. The cause of trip, the value,
the phase (or ground) current responsible for the trip are available on
the network.
DIGITRIP
TESTING
m WARNING
ANY TRIPPING OPERATION WILL CAUSE DISRUPTION OF SERVICE
AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, RESULTING IN THE UNNECESSARY
SWITCHING OF CONNECTED EQUIPMENT.
m CAUTION
TESTING A CIRCUIT BREAKER WHILE IT IS IN-SERVICE AND CARRYING
LOAD CURRENT IS NOT RECOMMENDED. TESTING OF A CIRCUIT BREAKER
THAT RESULTS IN THE TRIPPING OF THE CIRCUIT BREAKER SHOULD BE
DONE ONLY WITH THE CIRCUIT BREAKER IN THE TEST OR DISCONNECTED
CELL POSITIONS OR WHILE THE CIRCUIT BREAKER IS ON A TEST BENCH.
When to test
Testing prior to startup can best be accomplished with the breaker
out of its cell or in the Test, Disconnected, or Withdrawn
(or Removed) cell positions.
NNote: Since time-current settings are based on desired system coordination
and protection schemes, the protection settings selected and preset in
accordance with Section 4 should be reset to their as-found conditions if
altered during any routine test sequence.

Functional field testing

m CAUTION
PERFORMING TESTS WITHOUT THE Eaton-APPROVED TEST KIT MAY
DAMAGE THE DIGITRIP UNIT.

Field test kit

Use the test receptacle to verify a functional load test of a major
portion of the electronic circuitry of the Digitrip and the mechanical
trip assembly of the breaker. The testing can determine the accuracy
of the desired trip settings by performing long delay, short delay,
and ground fault functional tests. The Eaton-approved test kit is
listed below.

Model Test Kit

Digitrip 520 family Test kit (140D481G02R, 140D481G02RR, 140D481G03, or G04)
with test kit adapter 8779C02G04 or PACB test kit 87C0270

The test port is located on the front left-hand corner of the trip unit
(see Figure 1). To access the port, remove the plexiglass cover from
the front of the circuit breaker. Using a small screwdriver, gently pry
up on the test port cover to remove this item.

DIGITRIP
TESTING
EQUIPMENT

26 eaton corporation www.eaton.com

 Digitrip models 520, 520i; and 520M, 520Mi,
520MC, 520MCi trip units for use only in
Magnum and Magnum DS circuit breakers
m CAUTION
BEFORE PLUGGING A TEST KIT INTO THE TEST PORT, PLACE THE LTM
JUMPER IN THE INACTIVE POSITION (SEE FIGURE 30). AFTER TESTING,
RETURN THE LTM JUMPER TO ITS ORIGINAL POSITION.
The test kit authorized by Eaton for use with the Digitrip units plugs
into the test port of the unit and provides a secondary injection test
that simulates the current transformer. Existing test kits, styles
140D481G02R, 140D481G02RR, 140D481G03 or G04, along with
the Magnum test kit adapter 8779C02G04, can be used to test the
trip unit and breaker.
Functional test kit (handheld)
Description of handheld test kit
A battery-powered test kit is also available and capable of testing
trip elements for Digitrip units 520/520M/520MC and Digitrip 220+,
including power-up, instantaneous trip, short delay trip, and ground
(earth) fault trip. These test selections are chosen with the switch
labeled Select Test located in the upper right-hand corner of the
test kit (see Figure 39). The test currents are not adjustable for this
test kit.
The style number of this device is #70C1056.
Test procedure
Complete procedural instructions for the Eaton functional test kit can
be found in I.L. #5721B13, which is packaged with each test kit.
Figure 39. Functional Test Kit
NNote: After completion of testing, perform a power-up by depressing Reset
pushbutton, which will clear the trip memory. Disconnect cable from test kit
to prevent accidental operation and battery drainage. Reset the Instantaneous
setting to its original condition. Reposition the LTM jumper to the as-found
condition. Install the small cover on the Digitrip and install the breakers
plexiglass cover.
DIGITRIP
TESTING
EQUIPMENT
Instructional Leaflet IL70C1037H05
Effective October 2009
Currents
Each test selected by the Select Test switch on the test kit supplies
a fixed milliampere current value. The long delay setting will affect
the per unit (Ir) current value and the response of the Digitrip unit.
Batteries
The functional test kit contains a total of seven 9V batteries.
A lithium ion cell is the preferred battery type for BAT A and is
attached to the main PC board of the test kit. This battery has a
much longer lifespan to accurately perform the selected tests. The
remaining six batteries are located on a separate board in the test kit
and serve to power up the display on the 520M trip unit.
LEDs A and B function to represent sufficient battery voltage
from both the single lithium cell and the six alkaline batteries,
respectively. If either LED does not light or lights only dimly, replace
the appropriate battery or batteries within the functional test kit
case. To do this, open the back of the case using a screwdriver and
remove the battery or batteries from their respective locations. For
best results, replace lithium battery (Battery A) with ULTRALIFET
U9VL battery. When replacing battery sixpack (Battery B), replace all
batteries at the same time using standard 9V alkaline batteries.
Performance testing for ground fault trip units
primary injection
Code requirements
The NEC, under Article 230-95-C, requires that any ground fault
protection system be performance tested when first installed.
Conduct tests in accordance with the approved instructions provided
with the equipment. Make a written record of this test and make the
results available to the authority having inspection jurisdiction.
Standards requirements
As a follow-up to the basic performance requirements stipulated
by the NEC, UL Standard No. 1053 requires that certain minimum
instructions must accompany each ground fault protection system.
These statements (General test instructions), plus a copy of the
record forms (Figure 44, Figure 45, and Figure 46), are included as
part of this instructional leaflet.
General test instructions
The interconnected system must be evaluated only by qualified
personnel and in accordance with the equipment assemblers
detailed instructions.
To avoid improper operations following apparently correct simulated
test operations, the polarity of the neutral sensor connections
(if used) must agree with the equipment assemblers detailed
instructions. Where a question exists, consult the specifying
engineer and/or equipment assembler.
m WARNING
PERSONAL INJURY CAN OCCUR WHEN WORKING ON POWER SYSTEMS.
ALWAYS TURN OFF POWER SUPPLYING BREAKER BEFORE CONDUCTING
TESTS. TEST OUT OF THE CELL, IF POSSIBLE. THERE IS A HAZARD OF
ELECTRICAL SHOCK OR BURN WHENEVER WORKING IN OR AROUND
ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT.
Verify the grounding points of the system using high voltage testers
and resistance bridges to ensure that ground paths do not exist that
could bypass the sensors.
Use a low voltage (024V), high-current, ac source to apply a test
current of 125% of the Digitrip unit pickup setting through one
phase of the circuit breaker. This should cause the breaker to trip
in less than 1 second and operate the alarm indicator, if one is
supplied. Reset the breaker and the alarm indicator. Repeat the
test on the other two phases (see Figure 40).
eaton corporation www.eaton.com 27
Instructional Leaflet IL70C1037H05 Digitrip models 520, 520i; and 520M, 520Mi,
Effective October 2009 520MC, 520MCi trip units for use only in
Magnum and Magnum DS circuit breakers
Apply the same current as described above through one phase An alternative test setup is shown in Figure 42. This three-pole in
of the breaker, returning through the neutral sensor. The breaker series hookup should be employed when a low ground pickup setting
should not trip, and the alarm indicator, if one is supplied, should is to be tested like 0.24x and 0.3x, and if auxiliary power to Digitrip
not operate. Repeat the test on the other two phases. can not be provided. The test circuit does provide a net residual
ground current excitation of 1. Two of the phases cancel each
other out as far as ground fault, but now the Digitrip is provided with
Primary Disconnect
Suitable Conductors StabsWhen Drawout
three-pole power-up current simulating three-phase power.

Primary Disconnect Stabs

Suitable
A B C When Drawout
Conductors

A B C
Low Voltage
AC Current
Source
Low Voltage
AC Current Polarity and
Source Identification

Polarity and Identification

Figure 40. Connection Details for Conducting Single-Pole, Figure 42. Alternate Connection Details Using Three Poles to
Single-Phase Current Tests with the Breaker Removed from Develop a Ground Fault Condition
the Cell

Apply the same current as described above through any two phases
of the breaker. The breaker should not trip, and the alarm indicator, if
one is supplied, should not operate. Repeat the test using the other
two combinations of breaker phases (see Figure 41) or through a
breaker pole and the neutral that employs a neutral sensor.
m CAUTION
RESTORE ALL TEMPORARY CONNECTIONS MADE FOR THE PURPOSE
OF CONDUCTING TESTS TO PROPER OPERATING CONDITIONS BEFORE
RETURNING THE BREAKER TO SERVICE.

Primary Disconnect Record the test results on the test form provided with the
Suitable Conductors StabsWhen Drawout equipment (see Figure 46).

A B C

Low Voltage
AC Current
Source

Polarity and
Shorting Identification
Conductors

Figure 41. Connection Details for Conducting Single-Phase

Current Tests with the Breaker Removed from the Cell

28 eaton corporation www.eaton.com


Digitrip models 520, 520i; and 520M, 520Mi,
520MC, 520MCi trip units for use only in
Magnum and Magnum DS circuit breakers
Section 6: Trip unit battery
General
The battery plays no part in the protection function of the trip unit.
As indicated in Figure 15, the battery is provided to maintain the red
LED indication of the cause of trip. The battery is located under the
rating plug door. A Battery Check pushbutton and a green Battery
Check LED is also provided. On the initial installation of the circuit
breaker, pull to remove battery and discard the insulating tab and
then replace battery (see Figure 43). This will activate the battery.
Check the battery status by depressing the Battery Test pushbutton.
Pull Out After Installation
DIGITRIP
REMOVAL Instructional Leaflet IL70C1037H05
INSTRUCTION Effective October 2009
Battery installation and removal
The 3V lithium cell battery (see Figure 43) is easily removed and
replaced. The battery is located in the cavity adjacent to the rating
plug mounting screw, but is not part of the rating plug. Insert a small
screwdriver at the left side of the rating plug, and to the left of the
word OPEN, to open the rating plug door. Remove the old battery
by pulling up on the removal tab that wraps under the battery cell.
When inserting the new cell, pay special attention to ensure that
the proper polarity is observed. The main body of the battery is the
positive (+) side.
NNote: The battery can be replaced at any time, even while the circuit breaker
is in-service, without affecting the operation of the circuit breaker or its
protection functions.

m CAUTION
Insulating Tab Rating Plug Door Flipped Open EXERCISE CARE WHEN REPLACING THE BATTERY TO ENSURE THAT THE
CORRECT POLARITIES ARE OBSERVED. POLARITY MARKINGS ARE SHOWN
ON THE RATING PLUG WHEN THE HINGED COVER IS OPEN. ACCIDENTALLY
INSTALLING THE BATTERY IN THE REVERSE DIRECTION WILL NOT HARM
EITHER THE TRIP UNIT OR THE BATTERY, BUT WILL DEFEAT THE FUNCTION
OF THE BATTERY.
Use Type 1/3 N Lithium
Battery Only
The replacement battery should be the same type as that already in
the trip unit or an equivalent. Acceptable 3V lithium batteries may be
Pull to Remove Battery obtained from the following companies:
Company Model
Figure 43. Digitrip Battery VARTA Batteries, Inc. CR 1/3N
300 Elmsford Boulevard
Battery check Elmsford, NY 10523
914-592-2500
The battery is a long-life, lithium, camera-type unit. Check the status (www.varta.com)
of the battery at any time by pressing the Battery Check pushbutton
and observing the green LED. If the Battery Check LED does not Duracell, Inc. DL 1/3N
light green, replace the battery. The condition of the battery has Berkshire Corporate Park
no effect on the protection function of the trip unit. Even with the Bethel, CT 06801
battery removed, the unit will still trip the breaker in accordance with 1-800-551-2355
its settings. However, without the battery, the Cause of Trip LED will (www.duracell.com)
not flash red. If the battery is replaced, one or more of the Cause of Sanyo Energy Corporation CR 1/3N
Trip LEDs may be illuminated. Push the Reset/Battery Test button to 2055 Sanyo Avenue
turn off the indicators; the trip unit will be ready to indicate the next San Ysidro, CA 92173
cause of trip. 619-661-6620
NNote: A healthy battery is required to fully reset the 4-bit latch chip and (www.sanyo.co.jp)
associated Cause of Trip LEDs (see Figure 15).

After replacing battery,

properly dispose.

eaton corporation www.eaton.com 29

Instructional Leaflet IL70C1037H05 Digitrip models 520, 520i; and 520M, 520Mi,
Effective October 2009 520MC, 520MCi trip units for use only in
Magnum and Magnum DS circuit breakers
Section 7: Frame ratings (sensor ratings Section 8: Record keeping
and rating plugs) Use the forms shown in Figure 44 and Figure 45 for record
The frame rating of a circuit breaker is the maximum rms current it keeping. Fill in these forms, giving the indicated reference
can continuously carry. The maximum short-circuit current rating of information and initial time-current trip function settings. If desired,
the circuit breaker is usually related to the frame rating as well. make a copy of the form and attach it to the interior of the breaker
cell door or another visible location. Figure 46 provides a place for
A current value, (In), that is less than the full frame rating may be recording test data and actual trip values.
chosen to be the basis for the coordination of the protection function
of the breaker without affecting its short-circuit current capability. Ideally, sheets of this type should be used and maintained by those
For the Digitrip 520 family of trip units, this is implemented by personnel in the users organization that have the responsibility for
changing the current sensors and the corresponding rating plug. protection equipment.
These sensors and rating plugs are available in kit form.
DIGITRIP
The current sensor rating is the maximum current the circuit breaker TRIP FUNCTION SETTINGS
can carry with the specified current sensors installed. The sensor
Circuit No./Address Breaker Shop Order Reference
rating can be the same or less than the frame rating, but not greater.
__________________ _______________________
This value, (In), is the basis for the trip unit current settings:
PER UNIT MULTIPLIERS
1. The Instantaneous and Ground Current Settings (if provided) are Rating Plug Amperes (In) Ir Continuous Ampere Rating = LDS x In
multiples of (In) (see Section 4). __________________ ___________________________
2. The Long Delay Current Setting, (Ir), is a fractional multiple of (In): Trip Per Unit Multi Ampere Time Delay
Long Delay Current Setting = (Ir) = LD x (In) (see Section 4). Function Setting Equivalent Setting
3. The Short Delay Current Setting is a multiple of (Ir): Short Delay Inst. In
Current Setting = SD x (Ir) = SD x [LD x (In)] (see Section 4).
Long Delay In Sec.
Short Delay Ir Sec.
m CAUTION Ground Fault In Sec.
BEFORE YOU FIT THE RATING PLUG INTO THE TRIP UNIT, BE SURE TO
Date________________ By __________________________________________
CHECK THAT EACH BREAKER POLE SENSOR RATING MATCHES THAT
PRINTED ON THE RATING PLUG DOOR. INSTALLING A RATING PLUG Figure 44. Typical Trip Function Record Nameplate
THAT DOES NOT MATCH THE SENSOR RATING CAN PRODUCE SERIOUS
MISCOORDINATION AND/OR FAILURE OF THE PROTECTION SYSTEM.
DIGITRIP
NNote: Rating plugs from Digitrip models 210, 500, or 510 CANNOT be used AUTOMATIC TRIP OPERATION RECORD
with 520 family model trip units.
Circuit No./Address Circuit Breaker Shop Order Reference
Trip Function Settings Reference
Orig. 0 Rev. 1 Rev. 2 Rev. 3
Instantaneous
Long delay setting
Long delay time
Short setting
Short time
Ground fault setting
Ground fault time
Date of Trip Trip Mode Setting Setting Investigated
Indicator Ref. Change By
Made

Figure 45. Automatic Trip Operation Record

30 eaton corporation www.eaton.com

Digitrip models 520, 520i; and 520M, 520Mi, Instructional Leaflet IL70C1037H05
520MC, 520MCi trip units for use only in Effective October 2009
Magnum and Magnum DS circuit breakers

GROUND FAULT TEST RECORD FORM Section 9: References

Ground Fault Test Record should be retained by those in charge of the buildings electrical
installation in order to be available to the authority having jurisdiction. Magnum and Magnum DS circuit breakers
Test Date Circuit Breaker Results Tested By I.B. 2C12060 Magnum DS Breaker Instructions
Number I.B. 2C13060 Magnum I. Breaker Instructions
4A36346 Zone Interlocking Application with
Non-Magnum Breakers
I.L. 66A7508 Instruction for mMINT Modbus Translator Module

Time-current curves
The time-current curves are listed below for particular trip unit
models. All protection function time-current settings should be made
following the recommendations of the specifying engineer in charge
of the installation.
70C1295 Digitrip 220P or 520 (LI) (L) curve
70C1296 Digitrip 220P or 520 (LI) (I) curve
70C1006 Digitrip 520 (LS) curve
70C1007 Digitrip 520 (I) curve
70C1008 Digitrip 520 (G) curve
70C1446 Digitrip 520MC Maintenance Mode trip

m NOTICE
the provision for the zone selective interlocking function
is standard on circuit breakers with digitrip trip units
for short time and ground fault (earth fault) functions.
for ansi/ul circuit breakers with digitrip trip units, the
appropriate jumper to terminal b8 and b9 must be added
on the circuit breaker if zone interlocking is not desired
or field testing is desired.
for iec circuit breakers with digitrip trip units, the zone
interlocking function is not wired out to the circuit breaker
secondaries (i.e., zone functionality is not present in
secondaries b7, b8, and b9). the trip unit will always follow
the programmed short time or ground time setting. this is
Figure 46. Typical Performance Test Record Form
accomplished via a wiring harness internal to the circuit
breaker. if the zone interlocking function is desired for iec
circuit breakers with digitrips, please contact eaton for
appropriate instructions on how to adjust the internal
wiring harness to activate the zone interlocking function
associated with secondaries b7, b8, and b9 of the circuit
breaker.

eaton corporation www.eaton.com 31

Instructional Leaflet IL70C1037H05
Effective October 2009
Section 10: Digitrip 520MC with
Maintenance Mode
m WARNING
ONLY CERTIFIED AND Competent PERSONNEL SHOULD ATTEMPT
TO INSTALL OR MAINTAIN POTENTIALLY HAZARDOUS EQUIPMENT.
DO NOT ATTEMPT TO INSTALL OR PERFORM MAINTENANCE ON
EQUIPMENT WHILE IT IS ENERGIZED. DEATH OR SEVERE Personal
INJURY CAN RESULT FROM CONTACT WITH ENERGIZED EQUIPMENT.
ALWAYS VERIFY THAT NO VOLTAGE IS PRESENT BEFORE PROCEEDING.
ALWAYS FOLLOW SAFETY PROCEDURES. EaTON IS NOT LIABLE FOR THE
MISAPPLICATION OR MISINSTALLATION OF ITS PRODUCTS.
m caution
Observe all recommendations, notes, cautions, and warnings
relating to the safety of personnel and equipment. Observe
and comply with all general and local health and safety
laws, codes, and procedures.
m caution
a flash hazard analysis should be done to determine personal
protective equipment requirements.
General
Per the above WARNING, it is highly recommended that
maintenance be conducted on electrical equipment, including
circuit breakers with the system de-energized.
For situations that arise where this is not possible, the Maintenance
Mode function of the Digitrip 520MC family (Cat. 5ARMLSI,
5ARMLSIG, 5ARMLSIA) can reduce arc flash incident energy that
is generated on a fault condition. This is accomplished by an analog
trip circuit which, when armed, provides a fast-acting response
to the fault. The reduced arc condition will occur only in devices
downstream of the trip unit in Maintenance Mode. This is separate
from the normal system protection setting of Instantaneous. The
Maintenance Mode is located in the upper, white portion of the unit.
Maintenance Mode settings
The Maintenance Mode settings (labeled R5, R4, R3, R2, R1)
provide the Arc Flash Reduction setting. R5 is the maximum
reduction setting, which correlates to the lowest pickup value.
Nominal trip current of Maintenance Mode settings:
Setting R5 2.5 x Rating Plug Amperes
Setting R4 4.0 x Rating Plug Amperes
Setting R3 6.0 x Rating Plug Amperes
Setting R2 8.0 x Rating Plug Amperes
Setting R1 10.0 x Rating Plug Amperes
DIGITRIP
PREVENTIVE
MAINTENANCE
32 eaton corporation www.eaton.com
Digitrip models 520, 520i; and 520M, 520Mi,
520MC, 520MCi trip units for use only in
Magnum and Magnum DS circuit breakers
Arming Maintenance Mode
There are three ways to arm the Maintenance Mode Arc Flash
Reduction setting. One method is locally via the two-position switch
in the Maintenance Mode section of the trip unit. Turning the
switch to the ON position will arm the setting selected. A blue LED
confirms that the function is on.
For the other two methods of arming the Maintenance Mode
function, this switch must be in the position labeled 0/1. With this
setting, a remote switch wired through the breaker secondary
contacts can remotely arm the Maintenance Mode setting. A
high quality, gold-plated or palladium contact is required in this
application. The blue LED will verify that the function is armed.
(See wiring diagram Figure 47.)
A third method to arm the Maintenance Mode setting is via a
communication device. A Palm Pilot along with an IR Mint device
can be employed to arm the setting. By initiating the ENABLE
setting, the Maintenance Mode selection in the control screen of
the Palm, Maintenance Mode is set. There is a confirmation screen
that verifies the arming. A BIM (Breaker Interface Module) is another
communication method to arm the setting. When Maintenance
Mode setting is enabled via device communications, this setting
must be disabled by device communications.
Remote indicator
The Magnum circuit breaker will be wired with secondary contacts
A9 and A12. Circuit breakers built after September 2005 have a
normally open contact available to customer use. This contact can
be used to indicate remotely that the Maintenance Mode setting
is armed. Refer to diagram below for a wiring of this remote (blue
light) indicator.
Choosing the reduction setting
The Arcflash Reduction Maintenance System is an eight-position
rotary switch that has five unique settings. Setting R5 is repeated
four times. From the factory, the Magnum circuit breaker is shipped
with the Digital unit set to the R5 setting and with its arming switch
set to the 0/1 position. The 0/1 position means that it is locally
OFF, but can be remotely turned ON. The blue LED, if illuminated,
provides indication that the Maintenance Mode setting is armed
per one of the three methods described on page 32. In general, the
selection of one of the Reduction Settings (R5 through R1) should
be determined and selected by a person who is experienced in
power system analysis.
This setting choice normally does not change unless there are future
system modifications that could increase or decrease fault levels at
the circuit breaker location.
Tripping and testing
The Maintenance Mode function will provide fast tripping even when
the regular Instantaneous is set to OFF. The Instantaneous LED
position is also used to indicate a trip initiated by the Maintenance
Mode setting. The LCD display, if powered, will indicate this with
four dashes.
The Maintenance Mode setting, external wiring (if any), and tripping
functionality should be periodically verified by primary or secondary
injection current testing.
DIGITRIP
TESTING
Digitrip models 520, 520i; and 520M, 520Mi, Instructional Leaflet IL70C1037H05
520MC, 520MCi trip units for use only in Effective October 2009
Magnum and Magnum DS circuit breakers

e
Remote
Control Indicator
L
Voltage (BlueLight)
d

Arcflash Remote Arcflash

Reduction Reduction Maintenance
Maintenance System Switch
System Switch
g

a
b Communication wiring to IR MINT,
BIM, MODBUS MINT or PowerNet
computer. This can activate g
c Maintenance Mode if desired.

c
A15
A14

A12

A10
B7

A9

B1 B2 A12 B7

Alternate Customer
Wiring (partial)

Magnum Breaker (with MM wiring)

a The Digitrip 520MC (Cat. #5ARMxxx) can locally be placed in Maintenance Mode via a two-position switch located on the trip unit. The function can also be armed via a remote switch as shown.
In addition, the function can also be activated via communications. A blue LED on the Digitrip verifies that Maintenance Mode is armed.
b The recommended selector switch for this low voltage application is Eaton part number 10250T1333-2E, which includes a contact block rated for logic level and corrosive use.
c The maximum length of this wiring to the remote Arcflash Reduction Maintenance System switch (or alternate relay contact) is 9.78 feet (3m). Use #20 AWG wire or larger.
d Control voltage is 120 Vac or 230 Vac, or 2448 Vdc or 125 Vdc. Check circuit breaker front cover for trip unit power requirements.
e A remote stack light, annunciator panel, or other remote indication device can be connected to verify that the Digitrip is in Maintenance Mode.
f Relay in GF Alarm/PS Module closes when Maintenance Mode is armed. Contact is rated 1A at 120 Vac or 0.5A at 230 Vac or 1A at 2448 Vdc or 0.35A at 125 Vdc.
g The Digitrip 520MC can also be placed remotely in its Maintenance Mode via a general purpose relay (ice cube type with logic level contacts) activated by a remote control switch.
A recommended type is IDEC Relay RY22. Choose voltage as desired.

Figure 47. Maintenance Mode WiringDigitrip 520MC

eaton corporation www.eaton.com 33

Instructional Leaflet IL70C1037H05 Digitrip models 520, 520i; and 520M, 520Mi,
Effective October 2009 520MC, 520MCi trip units for use only in
Magnum and Magnum DS circuit breakers
Appendix A: Zone interlocking examples Main and feeder trip units will begin to time out and, in the event
that the branch breaker does not clear the fault, the feeder breaker
CASE 1: There is no zone selective interlocking (standard time will clear the fault in 0.3 seconds (as above). Similarly, in the event
delay coordination is used). that the feeder breaker does not clear the fault, the main breaker
Assume that a ground fault of 2000A occurs and refer to Figure 48. will clear the fault in 0.5 seconds (as above).

Fault at location 3 Fault at location 2

The branch breaker will trip, clearing the fault in 0.1 seconds.
Fault at location 2
The feeder breaker will trip, clearing the fault in 0.3 seconds.
Fault at location 1
The main breaker will trip, clearing the fault in 0.5 seconds.
CASE 2: There is zone selective interlocking.
Assume a ground fault of 2000A occurs and refer to Figure 48.
Fault at location 3
The branch breaker trip unit will initiate the trip in 0.045 seconds
to clear the fault and the branch will send a restraint signal to the
feeder trip unit; the feeder will send a restraint interlocking signal
to Z1.
The feeder breaker trip unit will initiate the trip in 0.045 seconds to
clear the fault and will send an interlocking signal to the main trip
unit. The main trip unit will begin to time out and, in the event that
the feeder breaker Z2 does not clear the fault, the main breaker will
clear the fault in 0.5 second (as above).
Fault at location 1
There are no interlocking signals. The main breaker trip unit will
initiate the trip in 0.045 seconds.
Figure 49 presents a zone selective interlocking connection diagram
for a system with two main breakers from incoming sources and a
bus tie breaker.
NNote: The blocking diode D1 is needed so that the feeder breakers can send
interlocking signals to both the main and the tie breakers, and prevent the tie
breaker from sending an interlocking signal to itself.

3200A Main

C
ZO Zone
0.5 Sec. 1
1200A
ZI

Zone 1 1 1600A Feeder

Notes:
A1: Wiring to be twisted pair of AWG #14 to #20. Route zone
interlocking wiring separate from power conductors. DO NOT
0.3 Sec. C GROUND any zone interlocking wiring.
400A Zone
ZO 2
A2: The maximum distance between two farthest breakers on
different zones (from the ZO downstream to ZI upstream terminals
ZI is 250 feet (76m).
A3: A maximum of 20 breakers may be contained in parallel in
one zone.
Zone 2 200A Branch
2 A4: Provide a self-interlocking jumper (on Zone 3) if coordination
is desired with other downstream circuit breakers not providing
the zone interlock feature.
0.1 Sec. Legend
100A C = Common (ungrounded) B7Contact
C Zone ZO = Zone Out output signal to higher level zone B9Contact
Zone 3
ZO 3 ZI = Zone In input signal from lower level zone B8Contact
= Fault at location 2
ZI 2
3
See Note A4

Figure 48. Typical Zone Interlocking

34 eaton corporation www.eaton.com

Digitrip models 520, 520i; and 520M, 520Mi, Instructional Leaflet IL70C1037H05
520MC, 520MCi trip units for use only in Effective October 2009
Magnum and Magnum DS circuit breakers

M1 M2
C C
ZO ZO
ZI ZI
0.5 Sec. 0.5 Sec.

T
C
ZO
ZI
0.3 Sec.

F11 F12 D1 1N4004 F21 F22 F23

C C C C C
ZO ZO ZO ZO ZO
ZI ZI ZI ZI ZI
0.1 Sec. 0.1 Sec. 0.1 Sec. 0.1 Sec. 0.1 Sec.

Figure 49. Typical Zone Interlocking Connections with Two Main Breakers (M1, M2) and a Tie Breaker (T)

eaton corporation www.eaton.com 35

Instructional Leaflet IL70C1037H05 Digitrip models 520, 520i; and 520M, 520Mi,
Effective October 2009 520MC, 520MCi trip units for use only in
Magnum and Magnum DS circuit breakers

Appendix B: Troubleshooting guide

Symptom Probable Cause Possible Solution(s) References
Unit Status LED is not blinking Current through breaker is <25% of No problem, Status LED will not operate with breaker currents <25%
sensor rating of sensor rating
Trip unit is malfunctioning Replace trip unit
Unit Status LED is steady on Light loading No problem, Status LED will not flash until 25% of sensor rating See Section 3 Note
Trip unit is malfunctioning Replace trip unit
As soon as current starts to flow through the Rating plug is not installed or is loose Install rating plug and/or check for loose connections
breaker, it trips and the Instantaneous Trip LED
Rating plug is open internally Replace rating plug
comes on
Trip unit is malfunctioning Replace trip unit
LED does not come on when Battery Check Battery installed backwards. Install correctly
button is pressed or Cause of Trip does not light
Dead battery. Replace battery
after a trip via Digitrip
Trip unit is malfunctioning Replace trip unit
Breaker trips on ground fault There actually is a ground fault Find location of the fault
On four-wire residual systems, the Check connections at terminals B-4 and B-5, check that the neutral See Section 2 Notes
neutral current sensor may not have the current sensor ratio matches the breaker, check that the connections
correct ratio or be properly connected from the neutral current sensor to the breaker are not reversed, check
B-6, B-7 for correct programming of jumper
Trip unit is malfunctioning Replace trip unit
High inrush phase currents may cause Connect Zout to Zin jumper to provide some time delay, see Caution in
fictitious ground pickup momentarily Section 3
Breaker trips too rapidly on ground fault or short Connection from Zout to Zin is missing. Make connections B-8 to B-9 Refer to Appendix A
delay (zone selective interlocking not used)
Trip unit settings are not correct Change settings
Trip unit is malfunctioning Replace trip unit
Breaker trips too rapidly on Long Time Memory Disable Long Time Memory Refer to Section 4
function long delay
Trip unit settings are not correct Change settings, Long Time Delay setting is based on 6 Ir
Cause of Trip LEDs flashing and breaker is closed Trip unit was not reset from previous Depress Reset pushbutton to clear LED flashing
event or test
Battery voltage too low to reset latch Replace battery See Section 6
chip and LEDs
A Cause of Trip LED keeps retriggering in the Digitrip memory buffer not Need to reset Digitrip unit when Status LED is operational. Possibly do See also Note in
application (Digitrip 520M and 520MC) completely reset this by temporarily (or permanently) adding auxiliary power and then Section 5
depress Reset pushbutton to fully clear trip buffer
LCD Display is not energized Light load Check breaker ordering information Refer to Section 1
No auxiliary power unit Check voltage input terminalsA14, A15 Refer to Section 1
Circuit breaker containing Digitrip 520MC* does Wrong address Check address See Section 4
not communicate with PowerNet or BIM.
No power Check for auxiliary powerA14, A15 See Figure 1 and
*Only Digitrip 520MC styles have
refer to Section 1
communication features. Check Status LED and Transmit LED
Hardware problem Check communications wiringB1, B2 See Appendix C
Missing termination resistor See Figure 38

DIGITRIP
TROUBLESHOOTING
GUIDE

36 eaton corporation www.eaton.com

 N LINE LA LB LC

SEE NOTE 3 SEE NOTE 5

SR SR
B-12 CLOSE CONTACT
AC
ZONE_COM K2-1 G_ALARM
B-7 Z_COM J3-1
52b OUTPUT- SR
K2-2 J3-2 B-13 CLOSE COIL
#22 AWG SEE NOTE 1 BRKCLSD
K2-3 OUTPUT+
(MCR) +30VDC INPUT (520M ONLY) J3-3 AC

ZONE_IN K2-4
B-8 Z_IN J4-4 G_ALM 1 ATR_REL_COM
ZONE_OUT K2-5 A-10
B-9 Z_OUT
K2-6 J4-3 G_ALM 2 ATR_ALARM
G_ALARM A-11
BLACK WHITE BROWN ATR_VOLT
GF_SGND K2-7 J4-2 A-14
B-6 GF_SGND
N ATR V_COM
X1 B-5 NEUTRAL1 ACTN K2-9 J4-1 A-15
N1
R/1
X2 B-4 NEUTRAL2 K2-8 OTS2_MAKE
N2 A-4
H2 10:1

CONTROL DIAGRAM
J2-1 J1-1 K1-1 520M
GROUND
POWER
MODULE
/ 520MC
SUPPLY
ALARM
Only OTS2 OST2_COM
DGND RATING A-5
HIGH INST. HIGH (OPT.)
BLACK

DIGITRIP WIRING AND

COIL A J2-2 INST. PLUG OST2_BREAK
J1-2 K1-2 A-6
J2-3 TRIP ST1
MODULE +
HIGH INST.
COIL B J2-4 TA 24 OHM
OST1_MAKE
520MC, 520MCi trip units for use only in

J2-5 J1-3 K1-3 A-1

(WHEN ST-
HIGH INST. OTS1 OST1_COM
COIL C J2-6 SUPPLIED) DIGITRIP A-2
(OPT.)
Magnum and Magnum DS circuit breakers

Figure 50. Typical Breaker Master Connection Diagram

SEE NOTE 2
520/520M/520MC OST1_BREAK
Digitrip models 520, 520i; and 520M, 520Mi,

A-3
1 WHT ACTC BRN K1-5
C1
R/1 CSC
K1-4
C2 ELECTRIC OPERATOR (OPT.) SC
10:1 A-16
1 WHT ACTB BRN K1-7 BRIDGE RECTIFIER
B1
R/1 CSB (WHEN REQ.) MOTOR+
K1-6 B-15
B2 MOTOR AC
10:1
1 ACTA K1-9 MOTOR CUT-OFF LEV-IN
WHT BRN
A1 SWITCH DOOR SWITCH
R/1 CSA (WHEN REQ.)
K1-8 AC MOTOR-
A2 B-14
10:1
I1-2 I1-1 RESISTOR (WHEN REQ.)

52a
INCOM 2 2 1 ST
B2 B-10
B1 ST
INCOM 1 B-11

ST UVR UVR
For Digitrip 520MC Only A-7
AC AC
Appendix C: Typical breaker master connection diagram

B-28
AC AC UVR
PDAD WIRES B-29 A-8
B-30 Notes:
1. Four-wire crimp connection. B-20 B-24
52a
AUX. SWITCH B-21 B-25
2. Three-wire crimp if High Instantaneous Trip Module is supplied. (OPTIONAL)
3. Three-wire socket used with Digitrip 520M Ground Alarm Power Supply Module will B-22 B-26
52b
B-23 B-27
hang unconnected if Digitrip 520 is supplied.
4. All auxiliary switches shown with breaker in open position and with spring not
charged and with trip unit in non-tripped state (OTS switches). A-27 B-16
52a
AUX. SWITCH A-28 B-17
5. The SR device has additional circuitry that provides a 0.5 second signal pulse
(OPTIONAL)
for closing operation. Power must be removed and then reapplied for a subsequent A-29 B-18
52b
A-30 B-19
operation.
6. To provide selected time delays for short time and/or ground time functions for
testing or non-zone interlocking applications, a jumper from B-8 to B-9 is required. A-19 A-23
52a
7. On three-pole breakers only, having ground fault functionality, a jumper installed AUX. SWITCH A-20 A-24
(OPTIONAL)
from B-6 to B-7 will enable source ground fault sensing and disable residual ground A-21 A-25
52b
A-22 A-26
fault sensing inputs B-4 and B-5 will be reassigned for source ground sensor inputs.

eaton corporation www.eaton.com

LOAD

37
Effective October 2009
Instructional Leaflet IL70C1037H05
Instructional Leaflet IL70C1037H05 Digitrip models 520, 520i; and 520M, 520Mi,
Effective October 2009 520MC, 520MCi trip units for use only in
Magnum and Magnum DS circuit breakers

Appendix D: Modbus translator wiring

The Digitrip 520MC in a Magnum breaker can communicate its INCOM network uses a 3-pin. The RS-485 Modbus uses a 4-pin
data using ModbusT RTU protocol by employing a mMINT device connector that consists of signals A, B, COMmon, and SHielD.
to act as a translator from INCOME communication to Modbus
Three baud rates of 1200, 9600, or 19200 are selectable via
communications. A Modbus master device is shown wired to
programming switch for the Modbus network. The INCOM
gather data.
baud rate is fixed at 9600 baud.
The mMINT module Cat. No. MMINT uses DIN rail mounting.
Connector types are plug-in-Phoenix. Power is 5-pin.

COM inv Non Invert Input

A B COM SH

Modbus Master mMINT d

d a e c
b

B-1 B-2 B-1 B-2

Digitrip 1150
Digitrip 1150

Magnum Circuit Breaker

Magnum Circuit Breaker
a Control voltage is 120 Vac 20% or 24125 Vdc.
b Communication cable is Eaton style 2A957805G01 or Belden 9463 cable.
c The overall network will support up to 32 devices with any addresses from 1247.
d Terminating resistor is 121 ohm 1 watt. Use the mMINT switches to insert these terminators at the mMINT device.
e Ground cable shield at this terminal.

Figure 51. Modbus Translator Wiring

38 eaton corporation www.eaton.com

Digitrip models 520, 520i; and 520M, 520Mi, Instructional Leaflet IL70C1037H05
520MC, 520MCi trip units for use only in Effective October 2009
Magnum and Magnum DS circuit breakers

eaton corporation www.eaton.com 39

Instructional Leaflet IL70C1037H05
Effective October 2009
Disclaimer of warranties and
limitation of liability
The information, recommendations, descriptions, and safety
notations in this document are based on Eaton Corporations
(Eaton) experience and judgment, and may not cover all
contingencies. If further information is required, an Eaton sales
office should be consulted.
Sale of the product shown in this literature is subject to the terms
and conditions outlined in appropriate Eaton selling policies or
other contractual agreement between Eaton and the purchaser.
THERE ARE NO UNDERSTANDINGS, AGREEMENTS,
WARRANTIES, EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING
WARRANTIES OF FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR
MERCHANTABILITY, OTHER THAN THOSE SPECIFICALLY SET
OUT IN ANY EXISTING CONTRACT BETWEEN THE PARTIES. ANY
SUCH CONTRACT STATES THE ENTIRE OBLIGATION OF EATON.
Digitrip models 520, 520i; and 520M, 520Mi,
520MC, 520MCi trip units for use only in
Magnum and Magnum DS circuit breakers
THE CONTENTS OF THIS DOCUMENT SHALL NOT BECOME
PART OF OR MODIFY ANY CONTRACT BETWEEN THE PARTIES.
In no event will Eaton be responsible to the purchaser or user in
contract, in tort (including negligence), strict liability, or otherwise
for any special, indirect, incidental, or consequential damage or loss
whatsoever, including but not limited to damage or loss of use of
equipment, plant or power system, cost of capital, loss of power,
additional expenses in the use of existing power facilities, or claims
against the purchaser or user by its customers resulting from the
use of the information, recommendations, and descriptions
contained herein.
The information contained in this manual is subject to change
without notice.

DIGITRIP
WARRANTY
INFORMATION

Eaton Corporation
Electrical Sector
1000 Cherrington Parkway
Moon Township, PA 15108
United States
877-ETN-CARE (877-386-2273)
Eaton.com

2009 Eaton Corporation PowerChain Management is a registered

All Rights Reserved trademark of Eaton Corporation.
Printed in USA
Publication No. IL70C1037H05 / Z8939 All other trademarks are property of their
October 2009 respective owners.
SWITCHBOARD TESTS
 Field Service Report

Service Report

EESS
Startup of Smithsonians Electric Panels - GAMBOA.

Prepared for:

Smithsonians / ITESA

Prepared by:

Rangel Isaas Alvarado Walles

Senior Field Service Engineer EESS Central America
Eaton Electrical Engineering Services & Systems
Tel: +507 260-1287 / 2407
Mobile: +507 6616-8542
e-mail: rangelialvarado@eaton.com
www.eaton.com/electrical

1
 Field Service
Report

Field Service Data:

Eaton Job Number: EESS-SE013-14

Service Date: December 9, 2014

December 11, 2014
December 26, 2014

Site Location: Smithsonians, Gamboa

Prepared for: Smithsonians / ITESA

Client contact: Edgar Bonilla (ITESA)

Service attended by: Eaton Corporation

Eaton Electrical Services and Systems
Panam, Centro Comercial Boulevard el Dorado.

Service Representative: Daniel Castillo (Ing. de Servicios de Campo)

Rangel Alvarado (Ing. de Servicios de Campo)
Rubn Gutierrez (Supervisor)
 Field Service
Report

Executed Work.

Startup of principal, emergency and electric room panel boards at the Center
of Research Smithsonians located in Gamboa.

Visual Inspections:
o Acceptable results, panel boards are neat and clean.
o Breakers are in good condition.

Mechanical Operation Test:

o Breakers operate adequately, were exercised and reviewed, the results of
each one was satisfactory.
o The mechanical trip operation (TRIP) was verified and the results were
satisfactory.

Isolation tests:
o Control wiring and also the incoming cables were disconnected.
o 1000 VDC by 1 minute was applied with a Megger equipment of 10 kV.
o The test results were satisfactory on the existing outsider panelboards and
the indoor panelboards (Main, Generator, Switchboard 1, and Switchboard
2). The minimum acceptable value in the protocol is about1 M.

Digitrip trip unit tests

o The results were satisfactories.

Contact Resistance Tests (Ducter)

o The results were satisfactories.
 Field Service
Report

Switchboard Tests Main Panel #1

NOTATION MAIN #1

TYPE PRLC TYPE 3R

AMPERES 2000 A

VOLTAGE 480/277

VISUAL INSPECTION
PHYSICAL CONDITION SCRATCHES ON THE LEFT DOOR
PANEL AND DOOR ALIGNMENT ACCEPTABLE
WATERPROOF SEAL ACCEPTABLE
LABELS ACCEPTABLE
CLEANING ACCEPTABLE
ANCHORAGE ACCEPTABLE
NON USED OPENINGS ACCEPTABLE
BARS ISOLATION ACCEPTABLE
SPACES HEATER ACCEPTABLE
VENTILATION ACCEPTABLE
CT Y PT NOT APPLICABLE
METERS NOT APPLICABLE
MECHANICAL INTERLOCKS NOT APPLICABLE
KEY INTERLOCK NOT APPLICABLE
FILTERS NOT APPLICABLE
ANCHORAGE BUS ACCEPTABLE
EQUIPMENT ANCHORAGE ACCEPTABLE
LEAD OR WIRE IDENTIFICATION ACCEPTABLE

ISOLATION RESISTANCE
1000 V AT 1 MINUTE
A-GND 943 M
B-GND 433 M
C-GND 282 M
A-B 2.08 G
B-C 1.16 G
C-A 1.42 G
 Field Service
Report

COMMENTS

THERE WERE FOUND SCRATCHES ON THE LEFT DOOR, THIS

MUST BE FIXED TO PREVENT FUTURE CORROSION.
 Field Service
Report

Magnum Tests

NOTATION MAIN #1 MAIN #2 SWBD1 MAIN SWBD2 MAIN

MAGNUM MAGNUM MAGNUM MAGNUM

TYPE SBS620 SBS620 SBS620 SBS620

TRIP UNIT 520 LSIG 520 LSIG 520 LSIG 520 LSIG

FRAME 2000 A 2000 A 2000 A 2000 A

INTERRUPTIVE CAPACITY 65 KA 65 KA 65 KA 65 KA

RATING PLUG 1200 A 1200 A 1200 A 1200 A

VISUAL INSPECTION ACCEPTABLE ACCEPTABLE ACCEPTABLE ACCEPTABLE

PHYSICAL AND MECHANICAL
CONDITION ACCEPTABLE ACCEPTABLE ACCEPTABLE ACCEPTABLE
CELL CONDITION ACCEPTABLE ACCEPTABLE ACCEPTABLE ACCEPTABLE
MECHANICAL INTERLOCK ACCEPTABLE ACCEPTABLE ACCEPTABLE ACCEPTABLE
PRIMARY CONNECTORS ACCEPTABLE ACCEPTABLE ACCEPTABLE ACCEPTABLE
GROUND CONNECTION ACCEPTABLE ACCEPTABLE ACCEPTABLE ACCEPTABLE
BARRIER AND ISOLATORS ACCEPTABLE ACCEPTABLE ACCEPTABLE ACCEPTABLE
ARC CUTTER ACCEPTABLE ACCEPTABLE ACCEPTABLE ACCEPTABLE
PRINCIPAL CONTACT ACCEPTABLE ACCEPTABLE ACCEPTABLE ACCEPTABLE
OPERATION MANUAL ACCEPTABLE ACCEPTABLE ACCEPTABLE ACCEPTABLE
STATUS INDICATORS ACCEPTABLE ACCEPTABLE ACCEPTABLE ACCEPTABLE

ISOLATION RESISTANCE (CLOSED BREAKER)

1000 V AT 1 MINUTE
MAIN #1 MAIN #2 SWBD1 MAIN SWBD2 MAIN
A-GND 943 M 880 M 318 M 178 M
B-GND 433 M 525 M 370 M 213 M
C-GND 282 M 832 M 339 M 176 M
A-B 2.08 G 2.56 G 201 M 147 M
B-C 1.16 G 2.35 G 191 M 139 M
C-A 1.42 G 2.85 G 168 M 146 M
 Field Service
Report

ISOLATION RESISTANCE (LINE LOAD OPEN BREAKER)

1000 V A 1 MINUTE MAIN #1 MAIN #2 SWBD1 MAIN SWBD2 MAIN

PHASE A PENDING PENDING 19.7 G 5.29 G

PHASE B PENDING PENDING 19.7 G 16.56 G
PHASE C PENDING PENDING 17.9 G 9.67 G

TRIP UNIT TESTS 520 LSIG

LT PICKUP 1272 A 1308 A 1308 A 1308 A

LT DELAY 3.4 S 3.3 S 3.4 S 3.3 S
ST PICKUP 7200 A 7140 A 7140 A 7140
ST DELAY 53 mS 52 Ms 59 mS 52 mS
INST PICKUP 7020 A 6840 A 7200 A 6840 A
GF PICKUP 1224 A 1236 A 1236 A 1236 A
GF DELAY 56 mS 54 mS 54 mS 54mS

ACCEPTABLE ACCEPTABLE ACCEPTABLE ACCEPTABLE

TEST RESULTS S S S S
 AVE. LA PULIDA, RIO ABAJO, PANAM

TEL. 507 236-3093

FAX. 507 236-6427

COMPANY INFORMATION

Companys name: Ingeniera Tcnica Especializada S.A. (ITESA).

Companys address: Ave. La pulida, Rio Abajo, Panam.
Company Phone number: 507 236-3093.
Fax: 507 236-6427.
Email: info@itesapanama.com
City/Town: Panam/ Rio Abajo

CONTRACTOR INFORMATION
 WARRANTY FORM

FOR

INGENIERIA TECNICA ESPECIALIZADA S.A. (ITESA)

Warranty For: SMITHSONIAN TROPICAL RESEARCH INSTITUTE (STRI).

We hereby warrant that the electrical switchboard including main#1, main#2, generator
panelboard, SWBD1, SWBD2 that we have provided in the SMITHSONIAN TROPICAL
RESEARCH INSTITUTE has been completed in accordance with the requirements of
Specification Sections 26 23 00.00 40 (SWITCHBOARDS AND SWITCHGEAR) and the other
Contract Documents.

We agree to repair or replace any or all of our work, together with any other adjacent work
which may be displaced by so doing, that may prove to be defective in workmanship or
material within a period of one (1) years from the date of acceptance of the above-named
Project by the Owner; and we also agree to repair any and all damages resulting from such
defects, all without any expense to the Owner, ordinary wear and tear and unusual abuse or
neglect excepted.

Signed______________________________________________Date ___________________

Name:
______________________________________________Title____________________
Ingeniera Tcnica Especializada S.A.
Ave. La Pulida y Calle 13
Rio Abajo, Panam
Rep. de Panam.

Warranty contact information: Provide the list of names in order, for contact purposes in case
of warranty claim notifications.

Name Title Phone email

1.
__________________________________________________________________________

2.
__________________________________________________________________________

3.
__________________________________________________________________________

4.
__________________________________________________________________________
Ingeniera Tcnica Especializada -ITESA 1
Smithsonian Tropical Research institute WARRANTIES
Final 10 October 2015
WARRANTY INFORMATION